2023-2026 Mini Countryman SUV CONTROLS User Manual
MyCarUserManual.com
USER MANUALS FOR EVERY MAKE & MODEL

CONTROLS for Your Mini Countryman SUV Third Generation (2023-2026)

CONTROLS  
Dashboard  
Dashboard  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
In the vicinity of the steering wheel  
1
2
Safety switchꢀꢁ93  
Power windowsꢀꢁ90  
Unlocking  
Locking  
5
Turn signal lever and light  
3
4
Exterior mirror adjustment buttonꢀꢁ108  
Buttons for the central locking sys-  
temꢀꢁ86  
30  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Exterior lighting menuꢀꢁ156  
Audio, see Owner's Manual  
for Navigation, Entertainment,  
Communicationꢀꢁ6  
Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tantꢀꢁ154  
Voice control, MINI Intelli-  
gent Personal Assistantꢀꢁ49  
Driving lights automaticꢀꢁ157  
Low-beam headlightsꢀꢁ157  
Telephone, see Owner's  
Manual for Navigation, En-  
tertainment and Communica-  
tionꢀꢁ6  
Adaptive lighting func-  
tionsꢀꢁ160  
Exterior lighting offꢀꢁ157  
Using selection listsꢀꢁ147  
Turn signalꢀꢁ153  
Accessing and resetting trip  
dataꢀꢁ136  
High-beam headlights, head-  
light flasherꢀꢁ153  
10 Wiper lever  
Wipersꢀꢁ163  
6
7
Shift paddlesꢀꢁ126  
Rain sensorꢀꢁ164  
Sport Boost functionꢀꢁ128  
Steering wheel buttons, left  
Turn speed control systems  
on/offꢀꢁ216  
Cleaning the windshieldꢀꢁ164  
Select speed control sys-  
temꢀꢁ216  
Rear wiper in Canadian mod-  
elsꢀꢁ165  
Store speedꢀꢁ216  
Rear wiperꢀꢁ165  
Adjusting the speedꢀꢁ216  
Clean the rear windowꢀꢁ165  
8
9
Driver Attention Cameraꢀꢁ207  
Steering wheel buttons, right  
Shortcutsꢀꢁ46  
11  
Horn, entire surface  
12 Adjusting the steering wheelꢀꢁ110  
13 Unlocking the hoodꢀꢁ361  
Volume, see Owner's Manual  
for Navigation, Entertainment  
and Communicationꢀꢁ6  
14  
Opening and closing cargo  
areaꢀꢁ77  
31  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Dashboard  
In the vicinity of the center console  
1
2
3
MINI Interaction Unitꢀꢁ43  
Glove compartmentꢀꢁ296  
Switch console  
Vehicle settings  
menuꢀꢁ49  
Parking assistance sys-  
temsꢀꢁ242  
Parking brakeꢀꢁ131  
Hazard warning sys-  
temꢀꢁ377  
Selector leverꢀꢁ123  
Defrost functionꢀꢁ281  
Turning drive-ready state  
on/offꢀꢁ120  
Rear window de-  
frosterꢀꢁ282  
MINI Modesꢀꢁ129  
Volume button, see Own-  
er's Manual for Navigation,  
Entertainment, Communi-  
cationꢀꢁ6  
32  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
In the vicinity of the headliner  
1
Emergency Call, SOSꢀꢁ379  
6
7
Interior lighting menuꢀꢁ49  
Interior lightsꢀꢁ161  
2
3
4
Glass sunroofꢀꢁ93  
Interior cameraꢀꢁ293  
Indicator light, front pass-  
enger airbagꢀꢁ169  
5
Reading lightsꢀꢁ161  
33  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle  
Sensors of the vehicle  
Vehicle features and options  
Cameras  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Front camera  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Overview  
The front camera is located above the li-  
cense-plate carrier.  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
cameras and sensors are installed in the ve-  
hicle:  
Camera behind the windshield  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Front camera.  
Camera behind the windshield.  
Exterior mirror cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Front radar sensor.  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Side radar sensors, rear.  
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear  
bumpers.  
The camera behind the windshield is lo-  
cated near the interior mirror.  
–
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
34  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
–
–
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-  
fall.  
Top view cameras  
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the  
road.  
–
–
In tight curves.  
When the camera field of view is cov-  
ered, for instance by a fogged up wind-  
shield or labels.  
–
–
–
–
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
One exterior mirror camera is located at the  
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.  
With open doors or open cargo area.  
When driving toward bright lights or  
strong reflections, e.g., setting sun.  
Rearview camera  
–
–
When it is dark outside.  
The camera has overheated due to ex-  
cessive temperatures and temporarily  
turned off.  
–
During calibration of the camera imme-  
diately after vehicle delivery.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will  
be displayed when the system limits are  
reached.  
The rearview camera is located in the han-  
dle strip on the rear of the vehicle.  
Radar sensors  
Safety information  
Warning  
Functional requirement of the  
cameras  
For the cameras to function correctly, the  
area around the cameras must be clean and  
free.  
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also  
the driver assistance systems can be im-  
paired by external influences, e.g., inter-  
ference. There is a risk of accident, injury,  
or property damage. Watch the surround-  
ing traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Additional information:  
–
–
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 386.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 387.  
System limits of the cameras  
The cameras may not work properly, e.g.,  
show something that is incorrect, in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
35  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle  
Front radar sensor  
Functional requirement of the  
radar sensors  
For the radar sensors to function correctly,  
the area around the radar sensors must be  
kept clean and free.  
Additional information:  
–
–
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 386.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 387.  
System limits of the radar sensors  
The function of the radar sensors may be  
restricted or not available, for instance in  
the following situations:  
The front radar sensor is located above the  
license-plate carrier.  
Radar sensors, side, front  
–
–
–
In case of dirty sensors.  
In case of iced-up sensors.  
If sensors are covered such as by labels,  
films or a license-plate carrier.  
–
–
–
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for  
instance due to parking damage.  
If the radiation range of the sensors is  
covered, e.g., by protruding cargo.  
When the field of view of the sensors  
is covered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges,  
snow hills, vehicles or trailers.  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the front bumper.  
–
–
After improper paint work on the vehi-  
cle in the area of the sensors.  
Radar sensors, side, rear  
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the  
road.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will  
be displayed when the system limits are  
reached.  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the rear bumper.  
36  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Ultrasonic sensors, side  
Ultrasonic sensors  
Ultrasonic sensors, front  
The ultrasonic sensors for the parking assis-  
tance systems are located on the sides of  
the front and rear bumpers.  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking as-  
sistance systems are located in the front  
bumper.  
Functional requirement of the  
ultrasonic sensors  
For the ultrasonic sensors to function cor-  
rectly, the area around the ultrasonic sen-  
sors must be kept clean and free.  
Ultrasonic sensors, rear  
Additional information:  
–
–
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 386.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 387.  
System limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic  
measurements can run into physical limits,  
e.g., in the following situations:  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking as-  
sistance systems are located in the rear  
bumper.  
–
–
–
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g.,  
by stickers.  
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for  
instance due to parking damage.  
After improper paint work on the vehi-  
cle in the area of the sensors.  
–
–
For small children and animals.  
For people with specific clothing, e.g.,  
coat.  
–
–
With obstacles and persons at the edge  
of the lane.  
In case of external interference with the  
ultrasonics, for instance from passing  
37  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle  
vehicles, loud machines or other ultra-  
sonic sources.  
–
–
Under certain weather conditions, e.g.,  
high moisture, wet conditions, snowfall,  
cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.  
With tow bars and trailer hitches of  
other vehicles.  
–
–
–
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.  
With moving objects.  
For elevated, protruding objects, e.g.,  
wall ledges.  
–
–
With objects with corners, edges, and  
smooth surfaces.  
In the case objects with fine surfaces or  
structures, e.g., wire mesh fences.  
–
–
–
For objects with porous surfaces.  
With small and low objects, e.g., boxes.  
Low objects already displayed, for in-  
stance curbs, can be outside of the de-  
tection ranges of the sensors.  
–
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered  
in foam material.  
–
–
–
–
With plants and bushes.  
In automatic car washes.  
For bumps, e.g., speed bumps.  
If there are large amounts of exhaust  
gas.  
–
–
Cargo that extends beyond the perime-  
ter of the vehicle is not taken into ac-  
count by the ultrasonic sensors.  
When the trailer hitch cover is not on  
straight.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will  
be displayed when the system limits are  
reached.  
38  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
Vehicle features and options  
Idle state  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Principle  
The vehicle switches off when set to idle  
state.  
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening  
from the outside and after exiting and lock-  
ing.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Safety information  
General information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move  
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Be-  
fore leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle  
against rolling away.  
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in  
one of the three states:  
–
–
–
Idle state.  
Standby state.  
Drive-ready state.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-  
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-  
lowing:  
Overview  
–
–
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill  
slopes, turn the front wheels in the  
direction of the curb.  
–
On uphill grades or on downhill  
slopes, also secure the vehicle, for in-  
stance with a wheel chock.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the ve-  
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and  
endanger themselves and traffic, for exam-  
ple, due to the following actions:  
1
2
Start/Stop switch  
Volume button, setting idle state  
–
–
–
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or  
windows.  
39  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
–
–
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
To switch to idle state, press  
and hold the volume button  
on the switch cluster until the  
OFF indicator on the Interac-  
tion Unit disappears.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the  
vehicle key with you when exiting and  
lock the vehicle.  
Deep sleep mode  
Principle  
Establishing the sleep mode  
automatically  
The sleep mode is established automatically  
such as in the following situations:  
Deep sleep mode is activated to prevent the  
vehicle battery from discharging when the  
vehicle is stationary for several weeks.  
In deep sleep mode, the vehicle functions  
are limited to the essentials.  
–
–
–
After several minutes, if no operation  
takes place on the vehicle.  
General information  
If the charge state of the vehicle battery  
is low.  
When the vehicle is shut down for longer  
than three months, some special measures  
are necessary. For more information, con-  
tact an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Depending on settings configured via  
Interaction Unit: One or both front doors  
will open when exiting the vehicle after  
a drive.  
In some situations, the idle state is not set  
automatically, for instance during a phone  
call or when the low-beam headlights are  
switched on.  
Activating deep sleep mode  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Deep sleep mode".  
Establishing idle state when  
opening the front doors  
2. Select the desired setting.  
After a trip, the sleep mode can be estab-  
lished by opening the front doors. For this  
purpose, all passengers must exit the vehi-  
cle.  
To activate/deactivate this function, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" / "Lock/  
unlock" / "Turn off after opening door".  
To access the vehicle while it is in deep  
sleep mode, press the Open button in the  
cargo area. Deep sleep mode remains on in  
this case.  
Establishing the sleep mode  
manually  
The vehicle can be set to idle state manually  
at the end of the drive.  
40  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Deactivating deep sleep mode  
General information  
–
Turn off the function using the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
Some vehicle functions can only be used  
with the drive-ready state switched on.  
–
Driving with the vehicle.  
Safety information  
Standby state  
DANGER  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-  
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases  
can penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust  
gases contain pollutants which are color-  
less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-  
haust gases can also accumulate outside of  
the vehicle. There is a danger to life. Keep  
the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient  
ventilation.  
Principle  
When standby state is switched on, most  
functions can be used while the vehicle is  
stationary. Desired settings can be adjusted.  
The vehicle is in the standby state after the  
front doors are opened from the outside.  
Manually setting to standby  
General information  
Standby can be switched back on after the  
vehicle is automatically set to idle state.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move  
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Be-  
fore leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle  
against rolling away.  
Using the Start/Stop switch  
Turn the Start/Stop button on the  
switch cluster. The Interaction Unit  
illuminates.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-  
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-  
lowing:  
Interaction Unit view  
–
–
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill  
slopes, turn the front wheels in the  
direction of the curb.  
OFF is displayed on the Inter-  
action Unit. The drivetrain is  
switched off and standby state  
switched on.  
–
On uphill grades or on downhill  
slopes, also secure the vehicle, for in-  
stance with a wheel chock.  
Drive-ready state  
NOTICE  
Repeatedly attempting to start the engine  
or repeatedly starting the vehicle in rapid  
succession can cause the starter to over-  
heat. This also results in unburned or inad-  
equately burned fuel, and can cause the  
catalytic converter to overheat. There is  
Principle  
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to  
starting the engine.  
41  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
a risk of damage to property. Avoid re-  
peated starting of the vehicle, particularly  
repeated starting in rapid succession.  
Turning off drive-ready state  
After stopping the vehicle:  
1. Apply the brake and engage selector  
lever position P.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
General information  
2. Engage the parking brake.  
3. Turn the Start/Stop switch on the center  
console.  
Drive-ready state is turned on/off  
using the Start/Stop button on the  
switch cluster.  
The READY indicator goes out and a  
signal tone sounds.  
The drive-ready state is switched off auto-  
matically if the driver's seat belt is not  
buckled when the driver's door is opened.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2.  
Turn the Start/Stop button on the  
switch cluster.  
The ignition is activated automatically for  
a brief time and is stopped as soon as the  
engine starts.  
Most indicator lights and warning lights on  
the Interaction Unit illuminate for different  
lengths of time.  
Gasoline engine  
Depending on the motorization, the full  
drive power may not be available for ap-  
proximately 30 seconds after starting the  
engine. In this case, the vehicle will not  
accelerate as usual.  
Interaction Unit view  
When drive-ready state is on, the Interac-  
tion Unit indicates this by displaying neces-  
sary driving information or READY, depend-  
ing on vehicle equipment.  
42  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Display and operating concept  
CONTROLS  
Display and operating concept  
property damage. Only use the systems or  
devices when the traffic situation allows.  
As warranted, stop and use the systems  
and devices while the vehicle is stationary.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e.,  
mobile phones, may be thrown around the  
vehicle, e.g., in the event of an accident  
or when braking or performing evasive  
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and  
risk of damage to property. Secure loose  
objects or devices that are connected to  
the vehicle via a cable.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
MINI Interaction Unit  
Principle  
The Interaction Unit consists of a central  
round display with functions that can be  
operated by touch.  
Warning  
Depending on vehicle equipment, functions  
can also be operated via the MINI Intelli-  
gent Personal Assistant or the operating el-  
ements in the vehicle.  
Objects in the area in front of a display can  
slip and damage the display. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do  
not place objects in the area in front of a  
display.  
The Interaction Unit turns on automatically  
when it is needed to operate a certain func-  
tion or when the vehicle is unlocked.  
The Interaction Unit's main menu is divided  
into different areas, e.g., menu bar, status  
information, and widgets.  
Overview  
Position in the vehicle  
Various settings can be configured, e.g., the  
brightness of the Interaction Unit.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information sys-  
tems and communication devices while  
driving can distract from surrounding traf-  
fic. It is possible to lose control of the ve-  
hicle. There is a risk of accident, injury, or  
The Interaction Unit is located on the in-  
strument panel above the center console.  
43  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Display and operating concept  
This icon indicates the active media source.  
Display  
Apps menu  
The Apps menu provides access to all  
apps and vehicle functions. You can use a  
filter to make it easier to find a specific app.  
The last selected filter is stored. To display  
the desired app, change the filter as neces-  
sary.  
Navigation menu  
1
2
3
4
Temperature setting  
Driving informationꢀꢁ48  
Widgets  
The Navigation menu provides naviga-  
tion system functions, e.g., route guidance  
and traffic information.  
Status information  
Quick access  
If route guidance is activated, the estimated  
arrival time is displayed on the menu bar.  
5
6
Menu bar  
Apple CarPlay©  
Saved messages  
Check Control messagesꢀꢁ138  
The Apple CarPlay menu is displayed  
in the main menu depending on national-  
market version and connected function.  
Apple CarPlay makes it possible to securely  
use select functions of a compatible Apple  
iPhone via the Interaction Unit.  
Turning the Interaction Unit on/off  
The Interaction Unit turns on automatically  
when the vehicle is unlocked or when it is  
needed to operate another function.  
Android Auto©  
The Interaction Unit turns off automatically  
in certain situations, e.g., if the vehicle is  
not operated for several minutes.  
The Android Auto menu is displayed  
in the main menu, depending on national-  
market version and associated function.  
Android Auto makes it possible to se-  
curely use select functions of a compati-  
ble Android smartphone via the Interaction  
Unit.  
Menu bar  
Main menu  
The main menu can be opened from any  
menu.  
Communication menu  
The Communication menu provides call-  
ing and messaging functions and can also  
be used to pair and manage mobile devices,  
e.g., smartphones.  
Climate menu  
The Climate menu provides access to all  
climate control functions.  
Media menu  
Widgets  
The Media menu provides entertainment  
system functions, e.g., radio stations, and  
can also be used to pair external devices.  
Widgets show real-time information and dy-  
namic content such as the navigation map.  
Widgets also serve as buttons and allow  
44  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Display and operating concept  
CONTROLS  
you to jump to the respective menu or most  
important functions.  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Other status information  
Status information  
General information  
Icon  
Meaning  
Status information is displayed in the form  
of icons on the bottom middle edge of the  
Interaction Unit. Depending on the equip-  
ment and national-market version, different  
icons are available.  
Sound output deactivated.  
Activation word active.  
MINI ID or driver profile.  
Go to quick access.  
Telephone status information  
Quick access  
Certain functions and individual shortcuts  
can be opened via quick access.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Active call.  
Function  
Operation  
Microphone turned on.  
Microphone turned off.  
SIM card missing.  
Wireless charging active.  
Show  
On the Interaction Unit,  
quick link. swipe from bottom to top.  
Tap the icon on the status  
bar.  
Hide  
On the Interaction Unit,  
Entertainment status information  
quick link. swipe from top to bottom.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Input and display  
USB audio.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Letters and numbers can be selected when  
inputting destinations, for example.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Time shift.  
Satellite radio is switched on.  
Letters and numbers can be entered using  
the Interaction Unit or spoken commands.  
Status information messages  
Icon  
Function  
Change between capital and  
lower-case letters.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Notifications.  
Enter a blank space.  
Switching between languages.  
Use voice control.  
Check Control message.  
Do not disturb.  
Additional information:  
Confirm entry.  
45  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Function  
Display and operating concept  
Icon  
–
–
Using the buttons on the steering  
Shift the input area to the left or  
right.  
wheel.  
Via quick access on the Interaction  
Unit.  
Tap icon: delete a letter or a  
number.  
The following functions, for example, are  
defined as shortcuts:  
Press and hold the icon: delete  
all letters or numbers.  
–
–
–
–
Radio stations.  
Navigation destinations.  
Phone numbers.  
Entry comparison  
When entering data from a database such  
as contacts, the selection is gradually nar-  
rowed down for each character entered,  
with characters being added as necessary.  
Jumps to menus.  
Saving shortcuts  
Shortcuts can only be created with an active  
MINI ID or driver profile.  
Activating/deactivating the functions  
Some menu items are preceded by an icon.  
Selecting the menu item enables or disables  
the function.  
1. Press and hold the desired function.  
2. "Add to shortcuts"  
Shortcuts can also be saved directly via  
quick access.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Function is activated.  
Selecting shortcuts  
1. To select a shortcut, swipe up from the  
middle of the Interaction Unit, from bot-  
tom to top.  
Function is deactivated.  
Functions can be activated  
or deactivated using the but-  
ton on the Interaction Unit.  
If the button is highlighted  
in color, the function is acti-  
vated.  
2. Select the desired shortcut.  
The function will work immediately. This  
means for instance that the connection is  
established when a phone number is se-  
lected.  
Sorting shortcuts  
Shortcuts  
Principle  
Shortcuts provide quick access to functions  
such as those that are frequently used.  
Shortcuts can be created as necessary.  
1. To select a shortcut, swipe up from the  
middle of the Interaction Unit, from bot-  
tom to top.  
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut and  
move it to the desired position.  
Go to the shortcuts as follows:  
46  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Display and operating concept  
Function  
CONTROLS  
Deleting shortcuts  
Operation  
1. To select a shortcut, swipe up from the  
middle of the Interaction Unit, from bot-  
tom to top.  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate  
direction.  
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the  
map.  
2. Tap the three dots for the desired short-  
cut.  
fingers.  
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
3.  
Tap the icon for deleting the desired  
shortcut.  
Using alphabetical lists  
Contacts are listed in alphabetical order.  
Operation  
To navigate to a desired initial letter in a  
list of more than 30 entries, tap the letter on  
the letter bar and scroll up or down.  
Sorting apps  
The order of apps can be adjusted in the  
Apps menu.  
Favorites are displayed at the top of the list.  
Entries with numbers are displayed at the  
end of the list.  
1. Open the Apps menu.  
2. Press and hold the desired app icon and  
move it to the desired position.  
Limiting the information shown on the  
Interaction Unit  
The information shown on the Interaction  
Unit can be limited to relevant trip informa-  
tion.  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the menu item, a context  
menu with additional options can be dis-  
played.  
To limit the information shown on the In-  
teraction Unit, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Displays" / "Interaction Unit" / "Essential  
info only".  
To bring up the Context menu, press and  
hold the desired menu item.  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
–
"General help": The Integrated Owner's  
Manual opens.  
Tap the Interaction Unit to have more infor-  
mation displayed.  
–
"Add to shortcuts": The menu item is de-  
fined as a shortcut.  
Setting the brightness  
1. To adjust the brightness of the In-  
teraction Unit, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Displays" / "Interaction Unit" /  
"Brightness at night".  
Using the map  
The navigation map can be moved on the  
Interaction Unit.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Depending on the light conditions, the  
brightness control may not be clearly visi-  
ble.  
47  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Display and operating concept  
vehicle checked by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
Enabling/disabling audible feedback  
The Interaction Unit's audio confirmation  
can be activated or deactivated.  
1. Go to the Media menu.  
Overview  
2.  
Select the settings icon.  
3.  
"Sound"  
4. "Touchscreen"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
System limits  
When the Interaction Unit is subjected to  
very high temperatures, e.g., due to intense  
sunlight, the brightness may be reduced  
until the Interaction Unit switches off com-  
pletely. The normal functions are restored  
once the temperature decreases, e.g., with  
shade or the air conditioning system.  
1
Power gaugeꢀꢁ145  
Tachometerꢀꢁ146  
Efficiency trainerꢀꢁ325  
Speed Limit Infoꢀꢁ214  
Speed Limit Assistantꢀꢁ236  
Operating state of vehicleꢀꢁ39  
Speedometer  
2
3
Driving information  
Speedometerꢀꢁ145  
4
5
6
Driver assistance systemsꢀꢁ214  
Widgets, detailed information  
Selector lever positionꢀꢁ123  
Trip dataꢀꢁ136  
Principle  
The driving information comprises various  
digital displays, e.g., speedometer, time,  
range, and temperature, as well as indicator  
lights and warning lights.  
Gear shift indicatorꢀꢁ148  
Rangeꢀꢁ149  
Safety information  
7
8
9
Fuel gaugeꢀꢁ149  
Outside temperatureꢀꢁ151  
Timeꢀꢁ151  
Warning  
If the driving information displays on the  
instrument cluster fail, e.g., the speedom-  
eter, do not use the vehicle. There is a  
risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Immediately park the vehicle in a  
safe manner. Turning drive-ready state off  
and on again may correct the malfunction,  
allowing you to continue driving. If the  
malfunction cannot be corrected, have the  
10 Check Controlꢀꢁ138  
The layout is adapted to the respective  
drive mode.  
Some views may look different than they  
are depicted in the Owner's Manual.  
Additional information:  
48  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Display and operating concept  
Indicator lights and warning lights, refer to  
CONTROLS  
Button Function  
page 139.  
Go to the Drive Settings menu on  
the switch cluster.  
Showing detailed information  
The Interaction Unit can provide additional  
specifics for some driving information.  
Go to the Exterior Lighting menu  
on the turn signal lever.  
Select the detailed information by tapping  
the desired area, e.g., tap the speedometer  
or Speed Limit Info display.  
Go to the Interior Lighting menu  
on the headliner.  
To show selection lists, e.g., current enter-  
tainment source, press the desired button  
on the right side of the steering wheel.  
MINI Intelligent Personal As-  
sistant  
Additional information:  
–
–
–
–
Selection lists, refer to page 147  
Assisted View, refer to page 150.  
Displays, trip data, refer to page 136.  
Speedometer, refer to page 145.  
Principle  
The MINI Intelligent Personal Assistant is a  
personal assistant that operates various ve-  
hicle functions by means of natural spoken  
commands.  
Direct access buttons  
The Personal Assistant provides proactive  
suggestions to make it easier to operate the  
vehicle. The Personal Assistant is available  
depending on national-market version. The  
function scope and detection may vary de-  
pending on national-market version.  
Principle  
There are buttons for jumping directly to  
certain functions in the vehicle. These but-  
tons can be used to bring up the respective  
menu directly on the Interaction Unit. Then  
continue operation on the Interaction Unit.  
You can use supported voice assistants  
from third parties in your vehicle after pair-  
ing your smartphone.  
Overview  
You can configure various settings such  
as the suggestions from the Personal Assis-  
tant.  
The system includes special microphones  
on the driver side and the front passenger  
side.  
Using the voice activation system  
›...‹: In the Owner's Manual, commands that  
can be spoken are indicated by brackets.  
The direct jump buttons are located on the  
switch cluster, turn signal lever, and head-  
liner.  
When saying commands, note the following:  
49  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Display and operating concept  
–
–
Say the commands at a normal volume.  
Speaking directly into the microphone  
does not improve voice recognition.  
–
–
Briefly press the microphone but-  
ton on the steering wheel.  
Say the activation word.  
Say the commands fluently and with  
normal volume, emphasis, and speed.  
Microphone button on steering wheel  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for the Personal Assistant:  
1.  
To activate voice control with  
the microphone button, briefly press the  
voice control button on the steering  
wheel.  
–
–
–
To set a system language via the Inter-  
action Unit, this language must be sup-  
ported by the Personal Assistant.  
The microphone on the driver's side is  
active.  
Download the corresponding language  
package before using the Personal As-  
sistant for the first time.  
2. Say the desired command.  
Activation word  
Principle  
Commands must always be spoken in  
the selected system language.  
For the full range of functions, the following  
functions should be activated or purchased:  
›Hello‹: Saying the activation word starts  
the Personal Assistant. The microphones on  
the driver's or front passenger's side are  
active with the following voice control, de-  
pending on where the activation word was  
spoken.  
–
–
Online speech processing is enabled.  
All settings under Data privacy are ena-  
bled.  
–
–
–
–
The activation word is enabled.  
Suggestions are activated.  
Then say the command. The activation word  
and the command can be spoken without  
A MINI ID or driver profile is activated.  
Corresponding MINI Connected Services pause in one sentence.  
are purchased in the MINI Connected  
Store.  
Enabling/disabling the activation word  
Additional information:  
The activation word can be enabled and dis-  
abled.  
–
–
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 51.  
To activate/deactivate the activation word,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Personal Assistant" /  
"Settings" / "General" / "Activation with  
voice control".  
Online speech processing, refer to  
page 52.  
–
–
–
Data protection, refer to page 59.  
Activation word, refer to page 50.  
Get suggestions, refer to page 52.  
Activation word from third-party  
providers  
Activating the voice control system  
Depending on the national-market version,  
some third-party providers provide digital  
voice assistants such as Siri or Amazon  
Alexa.  
General information  
You can activate voice control as follows:  
50  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Display and operating concept  
CONTROLS  
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-  
nected via Apple CarPlay.  
–
–
›Voice commands‹: Possible example  
commands are announced.  
Supported voice assistants can be used in  
the vehicle after you have connected your  
smartphone.  
›General information on voice control‹:  
Information on how voice control oper-  
ates is announced.  
The activation word for voice assistants  
from affiliated third-party providers can be  
used in addition to the activation word from  
MINI.  
–
›Help‹: Tips and example commands for  
voice control are announced.  
Sample commands  
–
–
–
–
–
›Call John Smith‹  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Voice control" / "Other assistants".  
›Drive me to JFK airport‹  
›Increase volume‹ or ›Decrease volume‹  
›Activate the climate control‹  
›What is my remaining range‹  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Canceling voice control  
You can cancel voice control as follows:  
Menu items  
The Personal Assistant can open menu  
items directly. Say the menu items as they  
are shown on the Interaction Unit. You do  
not have to follow the order of the menu  
items when speaking them out loud.  
–
–
Press the microphone button on  
the steering wheel again.  
Say the following command: ›Cancel‹  
Possible voice commands  
Principle  
Voice commands can be used to give in-  
structions or ask questions, with the Per-  
sonal Assistant providing assistance.  
1. Activate voice control.  
2. ›Media‹  
3. ›Presets‹  
Saved stations are displayed on the In-  
teraction Unit.  
It is possible, for example, to call contacts,  
navigate to an address, change settings, or  
control vehicle functions, e.g., air condition-  
ing, by voice command.  
Settings  
Setting the system language  
You must set a system language that is  
supported by the Personal Assistant. A lan-  
guage package can be downloaded.  
In addition, voice commands can be used to  
bring up the most important features on the  
Interaction Unit, e.g., menu items or lists.  
1. To adjust the system language, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Language".  
Help for voice control  
You can say the following commands to get  
help with voice control:  
2. Select the desired setting.  
51  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Display and operating concept  
Managing language packages  
Voice control from third-party  
providers  
Depending on vehicle equipment, third-  
party voice control can be activated by  
pressing and holding the microphone button  
on the steering wheel.  
1. To manage language packages, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Personal Assistant" /  
"Settings" / "Language".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
1. To configure the settings, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "System settings" / "Voice  
control".  
Suggestions  
The Personal Assistant provides helpful, in-  
dividual suggestions. Suggestions can be  
enabled or disabled. Suggestions can be  
customized, e.g., which categories sugges-  
tions are based on or whether to emit a  
signal tone.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume button during the voice  
guidance until the desired volume is set.  
1. To configure the settings, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"All" / "Personal Assistant" / "Settings" /  
"Suggestions".  
The volume remains constant even if the  
volume of other audio sources is changed.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Using the voice activation of the  
smartphone  
Depending on the device, a smartphone  
connected to the vehicle can be used via  
voice control.  
Online speech processing  
Online speech processing improves the  
quality of the speech recognition and search  
results for points of interest. To use the  
functions, data is transmitted to a service  
provider via an encrypted connection and  
stored locally there. Online speech process-  
ing is not available in all languages.  
The device must be connected via Apple  
CarPlay or Android Auto.  
1.  
Press and hold the voice control  
button on the steering wheel for approx.  
3 seconds.  
To configure the settings, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"All" / "Personal Assistant" / "Settings" /  
"General" / "Online speech processing".  
The voice activation of the smartphone  
is activated.  
If the activation was successful, a con-  
firmation appears on the Interaction  
Unit.  
Configuring the visualization  
How the Personal Assistant is visualized  
can be set.  
1. To configure the visualization, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Personal Assistant" /  
"Settings" / "General" / "Visualization".  
2.  
Press the voice control button on  
the steering wheel to cancel the smart-  
phone voice control.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
52  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Display and operating concept  
CONTROLS  
–
Noises from the front passenger or oc-  
cupants can impair the system. Avoid  
making other noise in the vehicle while  
speaking.  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration  
Principle  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available  
depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version. Alexa is a digital as-  
sistant from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa  
Car Integration, Alexa can be used in the  
vehicle. For safety reasons, the use of some  
Alexa functions may be restricted while  
driving your vehicle.  
–
–
Major language dialects can cause prob-  
lems with the speech recognition fea-  
ture.  
A poor data connection influences the  
response time of the Personal Assistant  
and the Search.  
Functional requirements  
Connecting mobile devices to  
the vehicle  
–
–
A MINI ID or driver profile is activated.  
An active Amazon account must exist.  
Principle  
Activating Amazon Alexa Car  
Integration  
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated  
in the vehicle.  
Various connection types are available for  
using mobile devices in the vehicle. The  
connection type to select depends on the  
mobile device and the desired function.  
Follow the instructions from the Amazon  
Alexa app to set it up in the vehicle.  
General information  
Detailed information on the functions and  
connection types can be found in the fol-  
lowing media in the Owner's Manual under  
the specified keyword:  
1. To activate Amazon Alexa Car Integra-  
tion, go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "All" / "Alexa".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
–
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-  
cle.  
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the  
vehicle as follows:  
–
Printed Owner's Manual for navigation,  
communication and entertainment.  
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-  
sired command.  
The following information sources can also  
be used:  
Information about the active function is  
shown on the Interaction Unit.  
–
–
Driver’s Guide app.  
Driver’s Guide Web.  
System limits  
–
The Personal Assistant provides infor-  
mation about vehicle functions that may  
not be installed in the vehicle. This also  
applies to safety functions and systems.  
–
Certain noises can be detected and may  
lead to problems. Keep the doors and  
windows closed.  
53  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Display and operating concept  
As warranted, stop and use the systems  
Safety information  
and devices while the vehicle is stationary.  
Warning  
Overview  
Operating the integrated information sys-  
tems and communication devices while  
driving can distract from surrounding traf-  
fic. It is possible to lose control of the ve-  
hicle. There is a risk of accident, injury, or  
property damage. Only use the systems or  
devices when the traffic situation allows.  
The following overview shows possible  
functions and the suitable connection types  
for them. The functions available depend on  
the vehicle equipment and connected mo-  
bile device.  
Function  
Connection type  
Icon on Inter-  
action Unit  
Making calls via the hands-free  
system.  
Bluetooth.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Operate telephone functions via  
the Interaction Unit.  
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.  
Playing music from a mobile de-  
vice.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Keyword: audio.  
Play music from a USB stick.  
Keyword: audio.  
USB.  
Keyword: USB connection.  
USB port, refer to page 290.  
Data exchange between mobile  
device and vehicle.  
Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: vehicle WLAN.  
Operate Apple CarPlay using the  
Interaction Unit and by voice  
command.  
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection  
and vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: Apple CarPlay.  
Operate Android Auto using the  
Interaction Unit and by voice  
command.  
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection  
and vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: Android Auto.  
Charge USB device.  
USB.  
Keyword: USB connection.  
USB port, refer to page 290.  
Keyword: USB connection.  
USB port, refer to page 290.  
54  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
MINI Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
MINI Remote Software Upgrade  
–
–
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Vehicle features and options  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the  
vehicle key with you when exiting and  
lock the vehicle.  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Functional requirements  
The following requirements apply for Re-  
mote Software Upgrade:  
MINI Remote Software Up-  
grade  
–
–
Active ConnectedDrive contract.  
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle  
has been activated.  
Principle  
–
–
The vehicle has mobile network recep-  
tion.  
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to  
update the entire software of the vehicle.  
This makes new functions, functional en-  
hancements or quality improvements avail-  
able.  
Consent to send corresponding data has  
been granted in the MINI Remote Soft-  
ware Upgrade settings.  
Settings  
General information  
To bring up the Remote Software Upgrade  
settings, go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "All" / "System settings" /  
"Remote Software Upgrade" / "Settings".  
MINI recommends performing the Remote  
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes  
available.  
Additional information:  
Safety information  
Data protection, refer to page 59.  
Warning  
Search for an upgrade  
Functional requirement  
Standby must be turned on to search for a  
Remote Software Upgrade.  
Unattended children or animals in the ve-  
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and  
endanger themselves and traffic, for exam-  
ple, due to the following actions:  
–
–
–
Establishing standby.  
Automatic search  
The vehicle checks regularly for Remote  
Software Upgrades in the background.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or  
windows.  
55  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
MINI Remote Software Upgrade  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,  
Manual search  
see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-  
tainment, Communication.  
1. To search manually for a Remote Soft-  
ware Upgrade, go through the menu as  
follows: Apps menu / "All" / "System  
settings" / "Remote Software Upgrade" /  
"Search for upgrade".  
Information about the version  
General information  
The information about the version contains  
a description of the updates included in the  
Remote Software Upgrade. Information on  
the version can be shown on the Interaction  
Unit while downloading and after the instal-  
lation is complete.  
2. Follow the instructions on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
Downloading an upgrade  
Automatic download  
If available, the data for a Remote Software  
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the  
vehicle. No download consent is required.  
This information is also available in the  
ConnectedDrive customer portal.  
Displaying information  
Via the MINI app  
Information on the Remote Software Up-  
grade can be displayed in the vehicle using  
the Interaction Unit or viewed online in the  
ConnectedDrive customer portal:  
If a Remote Software Upgrade is available,  
information about the new software version  
is given in the MINI app.  
The data for the upgrade can then be down-  
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via  
an existing WLAN connection.  
1. To display information in the vehicle,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "System settings" /  
"Remote Software Upgrade".  
Data can then be sent from the mobile de-  
vice to the vehicle.  
–
Display currently installed version:  
"Installed version: "  
2.  
This transmission method accelerates the  
download of the data, for instance in areas  
with limited mobile network availability.  
–
Display new available version:  
"Version info"  
1. On the MINI app, download the upgrade  
to the smartphone.  
3. Follow the instructions on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
2. Follow the instructions in the MINI app.  
To view the information in the Connected-  
Drive customer portal, visit the website:  
3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle  
via Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.  
 
Data for the upgrade is sent from the  
mobile device to the vehicle both while  
driving and when stopped. Depending  
on the size of the upgrade, it may be  
necessary to drive your vehicle to com-  
plete the data transfer.  
Installing the upgrade  
What to know before upgrading  
Before installing an upgrade, note the fol-  
lowing:  
4. Follow the instructions on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
–
Installation of the Remote Software Up-  
grade may result in the deletion of  
Additional information:  
56  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
MINI Remote Software Upgrade  
software changes, e.g., performance in-  
CONTROLS  
Preparing the vehicle  
creases not made by the manufacturer  
of the vehicle.  
–
Park the vehicle safely away from the  
public road.  
–
The installation may be interrupted if  
there are modifications to the vehicle's  
electrical system, e.g., to control units,  
which were not made by the vehicle  
manufacturer.  
–
Make sure that the vehicle has mobile  
network reception so that a fault mes-  
sage can be sent to the vehicle manufac-  
turer, e.g., if the installation is canceled.  
–
–
–
–
Close the window.  
Close the glass sunroof.  
Close the trunk.  
–
–
The installation does not occur until the  
consent was given.  
The installation may take around 20 to  
30 minutes.  
Remove devices that consume power,  
e.g., a mobile phone.  
–
–
The installation cannot be terminated.  
–
–
Disconnect the trailer or load carrier.  
The vehicle cannot be used during the  
installation.  
The vehicle key must be located in the  
vehicle for the consent for installation.  
–
The vehicle can be exited during the in-  
stallation.  
–
–
Turn off the exterior lighting.  
Remove any devices connected to the  
diagnostic socket.  
Prerequisites for the installation  
The following requirements apply when in-  
stalling Remote Software Upgrades:  
Install the upgrade immediately  
The upgrade can be installed immediately if  
all prerequisites have been met.  
–
–
Sufficiently charged battery.  
The outside temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "System settings" /  
"Remote Software Upgrade" / "Start  
installation".  
–
–
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal po-  
sition.  
The hazard warning system is turned  
off.  
2. Follow the instructions on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
–
–
The selector lever position P is engaged.  
The engine is turned off and sufficiently  
cooled down.  
Installing an upgrade with the timer  
Once the drive is complete, the timer can be  
used to automatically install the upgrade at  
a preset time, e.g., during the night. It may  
be helpful to install the upgrade at a later  
time so that all functional requirements can  
be met, e.g., to allow the engine to cool suf-  
ficiently.  
Where applicable, note additional require-  
ments given on the Interaction Unit.  
If the requirements are not met, e.g., suf-  
ficiently charged battery, the upgrade will  
not be offered for installation.  
Pay attention to an offer for installation,  
e.g., after longer trips.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "System settings" /  
"Remote Software Upgrade".  
2. Select the desired settings.  
57  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
MINI Remote Software Upgrade  
The installation starts automatically when:  
Purchased services, e.g., Advanced Real  
Time Traffic Information or Remote Serv-  
ices, are automatically reactivated the next  
time the vehicle is driven.  
–
–
All prerequisites for the installation  
have been established correctly.  
All prerequisites continue to be met at  
the time of installation.  
If the vehicle has been stationary for some  
time, it may be necessary to recharge the  
vehicle battery by going for a long drive.  
The timer is turned off when the drive-  
ready state is turned on.  
Malfunction  
Installing via the MINI app  
If the Remote Software Upgrade malfunc-  
tions, follow the instructions on the Interac-  
tion Unit or MINI app.  
Once all preparations are done and all re-  
quirements are met, the MINI app can also  
be used to start the upgrade installation  
when the vehicle is parked. The upgrade  
installation can be started remotely.  
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, con-  
tact an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Follow the instructions on the MINI app.  
Validity of the Owner's Manual  
Production of the vehicle  
At the time of production at the plant, the  
printed Owner's Manual is the most current  
resource.  
Functional limitations  
During the upgrade, the majority of func-  
tions is temporarily unavailable, for in-  
stance:  
–
–
Hazard warning flashers.  
Central locking system and Comfort Ac-  
cess, as applicable.  
After a software update in the vehicle  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Parking light.  
After a vehicle software update, for ex-  
ample, via Remote Software Upgrade, the  
Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle  
will contain the latest information, depend-  
ing on the national-market version.  
Horn.  
Alarm system.  
Emergency call.  
Power windows.  
Glass sunroof.  
Before setting off, make sure that the  
Integrated Owner's Manual is available and  
up-to-date.  
Locking the tank flap.  
Operating the tailgate or trunk lid.  
Exit warning if needed.  
In vehicles with frameless doors, the win-  
dow may no longer close completely.  
The driver's door can be locked and  
unlocked from the outside using the  
integrated key.  
After successful upgrade  
The vehicle can be used again immediately.  
58  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
personal data can be permanently deleted  
using the Interaction Unit.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the fol-  
lowing data is deleted, for example:  
–
–
–
–
MINI IDs or driver profiles.  
Stored radio stations.  
Stored shortcuts.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Navigation, for instance stored destina-  
tions.  
Data protection  
–
–
–
–
–
Phone book.  
Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.  
Office data, for instance voice memos.  
Login accounts.  
Data transfer  
Principle  
The vehicle offers various services that  
must send data to MINI or a service pro-  
vider in order to be used.  
Digital key.  
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take  
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle  
is removed from the MINI app and MINI  
Connected customer portal so that remote  
functions can no longer be used.  
The data transfer can be deactivated for  
some services. When data transfer is deac-  
tivated, the respective service cannot be  
used.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
when deleting personal data in the vehicle:  
Settings  
The data transfer can be configured in dif-  
ferent stages or individually for separate  
services.  
–
Data can only be deleted while the vehi-  
cle is stationary.  
–
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.  
1. To configure the settings, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu / "All" /  
"Data privacy".  
Deleting personal data in the vehicle  
The personal data in the vehicle will be de-  
leted when the vehicle is reset to the fac-  
tory settings.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Personal data in the vehicle  
Principle  
Additional information:  
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 60.  
Depending on use, your vehicle stores per-  
sonal data such as saved radio stations. This  
59  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for the MINI ID:  
Reset vehicle data  
All individual settings can be reset to the  
factory settings when the drive-ready state  
is switched off. Individual settings can only  
be deleted while the vehicle is stationary.  
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.  
–
The vehicle must be stationary to create,  
change, delete, or edit a MINI ID.  
–
The vehicle must have mobile network  
reception in order to use a MINI ID to  
login into the vehicle and synchronize  
with the MINI Cloud.  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Reset vehicle data" / "Reset".  
Welcome window  
If settings synchronization has been ena-  
bled for a MINI ID in the vehicle, personal  
settings are kept in the MINI Cloud.  
The welcome window appears on the Inter-  
action Unit after the vehicle is unlocked.  
The type of welcome depends on the follow-  
ing requirements:  
MINI ID  
–
No MINI ID is saved to vehicle:  
The welcome is neutral. These profiles  
are provided to use the vehicle without  
a MINI ID. A new MINI ID can be added.  
Principle  
In MINI Connected countries, the MINI ID  
is the personal login for all relevant offers  
from the MINI brand. The MINI ID can be  
used to save personal vehicle settings to a  
profile as well as to apply these settings.  
–
The vehicle key or digital key has not  
been assigned to a MINI ID:  
The welcome is neutral. Saved profiles  
are shown for selection. A new MINI ID  
can be added.  
Seven MINI IDs can be saved to the vehicle.  
If a vehicle is used by several people, each  
person can use their own MINI ID in the  
vehicle. Additional profiles can be used to  
operate the vehicle without a MINI ID, e.g.,  
the guest profile.  
–
A MINI ID has been assigned to the ve-  
hicle key or digital key:  
The welcome is personalized, the stored  
settings are activated. Available profiles  
are shown for selection. A new MINI ID  
can be added.  
The MINI ID must be registered once. A  
MINI ID can be registered via the MINI  
app, on the MINI portal, or at an authorized  
service center.  
Adding a MINI ID  
1.  
To add a MINI ID, tap the MINI ID  
icon or profile image on the status bar.  
Automatic driver recognition can activate a  
MINI ID as soon as the vehicle is unlocked.  
To do so, a vehicle key or digital key must  
be linked to the MINI ID.  
–
The guest profile is active:  
"Guest" / "Add profile".  
The driver profile is active:  
"Log in with MINI ID".  
2.  
Many saved settings can be synchronized  
with the MINI Cloud. If the same MINI ID  
is used to log into another vehicle, these  
settings can be used there.  
–
3. Scan the displayed QR code with your  
smartphone.  
60  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Personal settings  
4. Observe the instructions on your smart-  
CONTROLS  
Primary user  
phone.  
The primary user is the person who first  
adds their MINI ID to the vehicle and the  
vehicle to their MINI app. Alternatively, the  
primary user can be specified by an author-  
ized service center.  
The MINI ID is automatically transfer-  
red to the vehicle if the MINI app is  
installed on the smartphone where the  
MINI ID is saved.  
If no MINI ID is currently available, a  
new MINI ID can be registered.  
The primary user has access to the follow-  
ing settings, for example:  
5. Change additional settings as necessary,  
e.g., automatic driver recognition.  
–
–
–
–
Removing the MINI ID saved to the ve-  
hicle.  
The vehicle is added to the user’s MINI app.  
Transferring the primary user role to an-  
other MINI ID.  
Alternatively, the authorized service center  
can register the MINI ID and add it to the  
vehicle.  
Configuring vehicle-wide data protec-  
tion settings.  
Creating the main digital key.  
Confirming a MINI ID  
Additional information:  
If the MINI ID was registered by the au-  
thorized service center and added to the ve-  
hicle, the MINI ID must be confirmed on the  
Interaction Unit in the respective vehicle.  
MINI Digital Key, refer to page 83.  
Personalized settings  
Automatic driver recognition  
Principle  
1. Select the MINI ID.  
2. Scan the QR code shown.  
3. Follow the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
Automatic driver recognition can activate a  
MINI ID as soon as the vehicle is unlocked.  
To do so, a vehicle key or digital key must  
be assigned to the MINI ID. The MINI ID  
can be changed after unlocking.  
MINI app  
If a MINI ID has been added to the vehicle,  
the vehicle is automatically added to the  
MINI app. This means that MINI app func-  
tions can be used for this vehicle. To do so,  
the MINI app must be used with the same  
MINI ID.  
If driver recognition has been configured,  
automatic activation of the MINI ID is trig-  
gered by the following:  
–
By unlocking the vehicle using the but-  
ton on the assigned vehicle key.  
Alternatively, an authorized service center  
can add a vehicle to the MINI app. In this  
case, the MINI ID must then be confirmed  
on the Interaction Unit in the correspond-  
ing vehicle.  
–
By unlocking the vehicle using a door  
handle. The assigned vehicle key or the  
assigned Digital Key must be carried  
with you.  
–
By unlocking automatically when ap-  
proaching the vehicle. The assigned ve-  
hicle key or the assigned Digital Key  
must be carried with you. Depending on  
In rare cases, the use of MINI app functions  
for this vehicle may be restricted. More in-  
formation is given on the Interaction Unit.  
61  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
the country, it may not be possible to  
recognize the Digital Key.  
Selecting a profile picture  
The profile picture can be selected from the  
predefined profile pictures.  
If multiple vehicle keys or digital keys are  
near the vehicle, MINI IDs are activated ac-  
cording to the following priority:  
1.  
To select a profile image, tap the  
MINI ID icon or profile image on the  
status bar.  
–
The key that unlocks the vehicle trig-  
gers activation of the assigned MINI ID.  
2. Select the desired MINI ID.  
3. "Settings"  
–
If a vehicle key and digital key are de-  
tected at the same time, the digital key  
triggers activation of the assigned MINI  
ID.  
4. "My MINI ID"  
5. "Picture"  
–
The MINI ID of the key last detected on  
the driver’s door is activated.  
6. Select the desired profile picture.  
The profile picture from the MINI app pro-  
file can be used for MINI IDs. To do so,  
synchronization with the MINI Cloud must  
be enabled in the settings. Once a profile  
picture is taken from the MINI app, the de-  
fault profile images can only be used if the  
profile picture on the MINI app is deleted or  
synchronization is disabled.  
If the MINI ID could not be detected when  
the vehicle was unlocked, select the MINI  
ID on the welcome window.  
Setting/adjusting automatic driver  
recognition  
1.  
To set or adjust automatic driver  
recognition, tap the MINI ID icon or  
profile image on the status bar.  
Setting synchronization  
Principle  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver recognition"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
If synchronization is on, settings from the  
following areas, for example, are synchron-  
ized:  
Transfer of the vehicle key  
–
–
The MINI ID, e.g., the profile picture.  
A vehicle key assigned to a MINI ID can be  
used to view or edit personal settings.  
Navigation, e.g., recent destinations,  
home address, or map settings.  
Before a vehicle key is transferred to  
–
–
–
–
Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-  
tions.  
other persons, any assigned driver detection  
should be canceled. Driver recognition can  
be configured in the MINI ID settings.  
The Interaction Unit, e.g., the main  
menu configuration, language or, units.  
With MINI Digital Key, a digital key can be  
given to other people so that they are able  
to use the associated vehicle.  
The Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions  
or the activation word.  
Additional information:  
Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signal-  
ing and pathway lighting.  
MINI Digital Key, refer to page 83.  
Settings from the following areas are only  
synchronized when logging in for the first  
time:  
62  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
–
–
Seat and climate comfort functions, e.g.,  
driver’s seat position or temperature  
setting.  
The MINI ID is activated and associated  
settings are loaded.  
Deleting a MINI ID  
Privacy menu.  
1.  
To delete a MINI ID, tap the MINI ID  
icon or profile image on the status bar.  
Turning synchronization on/off  
1.  
To enable/disable settings synchro-  
nization, tap the MINI ID icon or profile  
image on the status bar.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Manage profiles"  
4.  
Tap the icon to delete the desired  
MINI ID.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "My MINI ID"  
When deleting MINI IDs, note the follow-  
ing:  
4. Select the desired setting.  
The profile picture can also be set if it was  
not already adopted from the MINI app.  
–
Removing a MINI ID from the vehicle  
causes the vehicle to be removed from  
the MINI app. If the MINI ID has been  
synchronized with the MINI Cloud, data  
saved to the MINI Cloud is kept after  
the MINI ID is deleted. If the currently  
active MINI ID is removed, another pro-  
file must be selected.  
Configuring PIN protection  
Once saved, MINI IDs can be selected by  
every user of the vehicle. Set a PIN to  
prevent the MINI ID's settings from being  
changed and the MINI ID's data from being  
viewed.  
–
–
Deleting the primary user's MINI ID  
resets the vehicle to factory settings.  
The vehicle is removed from each user's  
MINI app, and all MINI IDs are removed  
from the vehicle.  
1.  
To set a PIN, tap the MINI ID icon or  
profile image on the status bar.  
2. Select the desired MINI ID.  
3. "Settings"  
Removing a vehicle from the MINI  
app removes the corresponding MINI  
ID from the vehicle. If the MINI ID  
was synchronized with the MINI Cloud,  
MINI ID data saved to the MINI Cloud is  
kept.  
4. "Lock screen"  
5. Enter the desired PIN.  
Profile management  
Editing profiles  
The profile can be changed at any time us-  
ing the Interaction Unit:  
–
If the vehicle is removed from the pri-  
mary user’s MINI app, it will also be  
removed from each user’s MINI app. The  
corresponding MINI IDs are removed  
from the vehicle.  
1.  
Tap the MINI ID icon or profile pic-  
ture on the status bar.  
Additional profiles  
Principle  
Additional profiles can be used to operate  
the vehicle without a MINI ID.  
2. "Change profile"  
3. Select the desired MINI ID or profile.  
4. If necessary, enter a PIN.  
63  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
are located outside the driver's side of  
the vehicle.  
Driver profile  
"Driver ": If no MINI ID is available, vehicle  
settings can be saved to this profile.  
–
If the vehicle was unlocked from the  
MINI app.  
This profile is subject to the following re-  
strictions, among others:  
There are technical limitations when using  
personal settings for a MINI ID in other ve-  
hicles. For example, settings may be stored  
for a system that is not available in other  
vehicles, or available in a non-compatible  
version.  
–
–
Driver cannot be detected automatically.  
The name and profile image cannot be  
changed.  
–
–
There is no synchronization with the  
MINI Cloud.  
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,  
navigation functions or saving favorites. Driver profiles  
The profile, and the settings saved to it, can  
be transferred to a MINI ID. The MINI ID is  
then displayed instead of the profile.  
Principle  
Driver profiles can be used in countries  
where MINI Connected is not available in  
order to save and enable personal settings  
in the vehicle.  
Guest profile  
"Guest": This profile can be used to operate  
the vehicle without changing the settings  
saved for other profiles.  
Your vehicle can save up to seven driver  
profiles. If a vehicle is used by several peo-  
ple, each person can use their own driver  
profile in the vehicle. The guest driver pro-  
file can be used when driving the vehicle  
without a driver profile.  
This profile is subject to the following re-  
strictions, among others:  
–
–
Changed settings are not saved.  
It is not possible to specify automatic  
driver recognition or assign a PIN.  
Automatic driver recognition can activate  
a driver profile as soon as the vehicle is  
unlocked. To do so, a vehicle key must be  
linked to the driver profile.  
–
–
–
The name and profile image cannot be  
changed.  
There is no synchronization with the  
MINI Cloud.  
Functional requirement  
The vehicle must be stationary to create,  
change, delete, or edit a driver profile.  
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,  
navigation functions or saving favorites.  
System limits  
It may not be possible to clearly identify the  
driver using the vehicle key or digital key in  
the following situations, for example:  
Welcome window  
A welcome window appears on the Interac-  
tion Unit after the vehicle is unlocked. The  
type of the welcome depends on the follow-  
ing prerequisites:  
–
The driver changes, but the vehicle is  
not locked and unlocked.  
–
No driver profile is saved to the vehicle:  
–
If one MINI ID is assigned to multiple  
vehicle keys or multiple digital keys that  
64  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
The welcome is neutral. A new driver  
profile can be added.  
Personalized settings  
Automatic driver recognition  
–
–
Vehicle key has not been assigned to a  
driver profile:  
Principle  
The welcome is neutral. Saved driver  
profiles are shown for selection. A new  
driver profile can be added.  
Automatic driver recognition can activate  
a driver profile as soon as the vehicle is  
unlocked. To do so, a vehicle key must be  
assigned to the driver profile. After unlock-  
ing, you can change the driver profile.  
A driver profile has been assigned to the  
vehicle key:  
The welcome is personalized, the stored  
settings are activated. The available  
driver profiles are shown for selection.  
A new driver profile can be added.  
If driver recognition has been configured,  
automatic activation of the driver profile is  
triggered by the following:  
–
By unlocking the vehicle using the but-  
ton on the assigned vehicle key.  
Driver profile, driver  
–
By unlocking the vehicle using a door  
handle. You must carry your assigned  
vehicle key with you.  
"Driver": A driver profile allows the driver to  
save individual vehicle settings as well as  
create a name for this profile and select a  
profile image.  
–
By automatic unlocking when approach-  
ing the vehicle. You must carry your as-  
signed vehicle key with you.  
Driver profile, guest  
If multiple vehicle keys are near the vehicle,  
driver profiles are activated according to  
the following priority:  
"Guest": This driver profile can be used to  
operate the vehicle without changing the  
settings saved for other driver profiles.  
–
The key that unlocks the vehicle trig-  
gers activation of the assigned driver  
profile.  
This profile is subject to the following re-  
strictions, among others:  
–
–
Changed settings are not saved.  
–
The driver profile of the key last de-  
tected at the driver’s door is activated.  
It is not possible to specify automatic  
driver recognition or assign a PIN.  
If the driver profile could not be detected  
when unlocking the vehicle, select the de-  
sired driver profile in the welcome window.  
–
The name and profile image cannot be  
changed.  
Adding a driver profile  
Setting/adjusting automatic driver  
recognition  
1.  
To add a driver profile, tap the driver  
profile icon or profile picture on the sta-  
tus bar.  
1.  
To set or adjust automatic driver  
recognition, tap the MINI ID icon or  
profile image on the status bar.  
2. "Add profile"  
3. Change additional settings as necessary,  
e.g., automatic driver recognition.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Driver recognition"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
65  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
Transfer of the vehicle key  
Deleting the driver profile  
A vehicle key assigned to a driver profile  
can be used to view or change saved per-  
sonal settings.  
1.  
To delete a driver profile, tap the  
driver profile icon or profile picture on  
the status bar.  
Before a vehicle key is transferred to  
other persons, any assigned driver detection  
should be canceled.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Manage profiles"  
4.  
Tap the icon to delete the desired  
driver profile.  
You can configure driver recognition in the  
driver profile settings.  
System limits  
Configuring PIN protection  
It may not be possible to clearly identify the  
driver using the vehicle key in the following  
situations, for example:  
Once saved, driver profiles can be selected  
by every user of the vehicle. If you want to  
prevent settings from being changed or data  
from being viewed for a driver profile, it is  
possible to set PIN protection.  
–
The driver changes, but the vehicle is  
not locked and unlocked.  
–
If multiple vehicle keys with assigned  
driver profiles are located on the driver's  
side of the vehicle.  
1.  
Tap the driver profile icon or profile  
picture on the status bar.  
2. Select the desired driver profile.  
3. "Settings"  
4. "Lock screen"  
5. Enter the desired PIN.  
Profile management  
Changing driver profiles  
The driver profile can be changed at any  
time using the Interaction Unit:  
1.  
Tap the driver profile icon or profile  
picture on the status bar.  
2. "Change profile"  
3. Select the desired driver profile.  
4. If necessary, enter a PIN.  
The driver profile is activated and associ-  
ated settings are loaded.  
66  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Warning  
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.  
Batteries or button cell batteries can be  
swallowed and lead to serious or fatal in-  
juries within two hours, for example due  
to internal burns or chemical burns. There  
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Keep  
the vehicle key and batteries out of reach  
of children. Immediately seek medical help  
if there is any suspicion that a battery or  
button cell battery has been swallowed or  
is located in any part of the body.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Vehicle key  
Principle  
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope  
of delivery, each containing an integrated  
key.  
Overview  
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable  
battery. If the vehicle key's battery is dis-  
charged, the vehicle key will not be de-  
tected. In this case, drive-ready state can  
be turned on by emergency detection of the  
vehicle key.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings are possi-  
ble for the button functions.  
Buttons on the vehicle key.  
A MINI ID or driver profile with personal  
settings can be assigned to a vehicle key.  
Icon  
Meaning  
To provide information on maintenance rec-  
ommendations, the service data is stored in  
the vehicle key.  
Unlock.  
Lock.  
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle  
key, take the vehicle key with you when  
exiting the vehicle.  
Stationary climate control, refer to  
page 285.  
67  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Meaning  
Opening and closing  
To replace the vehicle key battery, proceed  
Icon  
as follows:  
Open the cargo area.  
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, then  
pull the cover, arrow 2, out of the lock-  
ing mechanism from the bottom end.  
Panic mode.  
Pathway lighting, refer to  
page 159.  
Additional vehicle keys  
Additional vehicle keys are available from  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Loss of vehicle keys  
2. Pull the cover out of the upper lock-  
ing mechanism, arrow, then remove the  
cover.  
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-  
placed by an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
If a MINI ID or driver profile was assigned  
to the lost vehicle key, the association to  
this vehicle key must be deleted. A new ve-  
hicle key can then be assigned to the MINI  
ID or driver profile.  
Replacing the battery  
3. Use a coin to open the battery compart-  
ment lid, turning the coin counterclock-  
wise.  
NOTICE  
Improper batteries in a battery-operated  
device can damage the device. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Always replace  
the discharged battery with a battery with  
the same voltage, the same size and the  
same specification.  
68  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
other qualified service center or repair  
shop, or take them to a collection point.  
4. Remove the battery from the battery  
housing.  
Integrated key  
Principle  
The integrated key is built into the vehicle  
key. If the electrical system malfunctions,  
the vehicle can be unlocked and locked  
manually using the integrated key.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
the integrated key will fit in the glove com-  
partment.  
5. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the  
positive terminal facing up.  
6. Use a coin to close the battery compart-  
ment lid, turning the coin clockwise, ar-  
row 1. The lid is fully closed when the  
arrowheads, arrow 2, point toward each  
other.  
Safety information  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, un-  
locking from the inside is only possible  
with particular knowledge.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to  
extreme temperatures, there is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Do not lock the ve-  
hicle from the outside when there are peo-  
ple or animals in it. Do not leave babies,  
toddlers or animals alone in the vehicle.  
7. Insert the cover in reverse order, arrow  
1 and arrow 2. The cover must audibly  
engage at the top and bottom.  
Have old batteries disposed of by  
an authorized service center or an-  
69  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
Removing the integrated key  
Unlocking the vehicle manually  
1. Press and hold the button, arrow 1, then  
push the cover, arrow 2, downward and  
remove it.  
1. Pull and hold the driver's door handle  
outward with one hand.  
2. Unlock the door lock with the integrated  
key by turning it counterclockwise.  
2. Push the end of the key head, arrow.  
The integrated key is raised slightly.  
3. Remove the integrated key.  
3. Pull out the vehicle key and release the  
door handle.  
4. Open the driver's door.  
5. Press the central locking button to un-  
lock the other doors. With the vehicle  
de-energized: pull the door opener of the  
other doors from the inside.  
Locking the vehicle manually  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the ve-  
hicle, do not place the vehicle key in the  
vehicle.  
70  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
If vehicle is de-energized:  
CONTROLS  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close all doors.  
1. With the integrated key, close and lock  
all doors, except the driver's door, using  
the side door lock.  
2. Enter the vehicle on the front passeng-  
er's side and close the front passenger  
door.  
3. Press the central locking button to un-  
lock all doors.  
4. Exit the vehicle through the front pass-  
enger door.  
5. With the integrated key, close and lock  
the front passenger door using the side  
door lock.  
2. Pull and hold the driver's door handle  
outward with one hand.  
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they  
are locked. If necessary, repeat the proc-  
ess.  
3. Using the integrated key, lock the driv-  
er's door lock clockwise.  
4. Pull out the vehicle key and release the  
door handle.  
5. Close the driver's door.  
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they  
are locked. If necessary, repeat the proc-  
ess.  
71  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
Alarm system  
Malfunction  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the  
integrated key via the door lock, the acti-  
vated alarm system will be triggered when  
the door is opened.  
A Check Control message is displayed  
where applicable.  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may  
malfunction under the following circum-  
stances:  
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency  
detection to switch off the alarm.  
–
The battery of the vehicle key is dis-  
charged.  
If the doors are manually locked from the  
inside, the alarm system is not activated.  
–
Fault of the radio link from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high  
transmitting power.  
Emergency detection of the vehicle  
key  
–
–
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal  
objects.  
Principle  
Do not transport the vehicle key to-  
gether with metal objects.  
If the vehicle key's battery is discharged,  
the vehicle key will not be detected. In this  
case, drive-ready state can be turned on by  
emergency detection of the vehicle key.  
Fault of the radio link from mobile  
phones or other electronic devices in di-  
rect proximity to the vehicle key.  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close  
proximity to other electronic devices.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
–
–
Fault of radio transmission by a charg-  
ing process of mobile devices, for in-  
stance charging of a mobile phone.  
The vehicle key is located in direct prox-  
imity of the wireless charging tray.  
Place the vehicle key in a different loca-  
tion.  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can  
also be unlocked and locked from the out-  
side with the integrated key. Use the Emer-  
gency detection of the vehicle key to turn  
on drive-ready state.  
1. To turn on drive-ready state via emer-  
gency detection of the vehicle key, hold  
the back of the vehicle key to the mark-  
ing on the steering column. Pay atten-  
tion to the view shown on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
Access to vehicle interior  
–
If the vehicle key is detected:  
2.  
Turn on drive-ready state within  
10 seconds.  
Principle  
The vehicle can be unlocked/locked as fol-  
lows:  
–
If the vehicle key is not detected:  
Slightly change the position of the  
vehicle key and repeat the proce-  
dure.  
–
–
With the vehicle key.  
Using the door handle.  
72  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
–
–
–
With the Key Card.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the  
vehicle key with you when exiting and  
lock the vehicle.  
With the MINI Digital Key.  
Hands-free unlocking/locking  
Safety information  
Actions during unlocking  
Warning  
Depending on the settings, the following  
functions are performed when unlocking  
the vehicle:  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock  
the doors from the inside and lock them-  
selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot  
be opened from the outside. There is a risk  
of injury. Take the vehicle key with you  
so that the vehicle can be opened from the  
outside.  
–
–
–
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler  
flap will be unlocked or all access to the  
vehicle will be unlocked.  
The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-  
firmed with a light signal or a sound  
signal.  
Warning  
The welcome light can be turned on  
when the vehicle is being unlocked.  
For some national-market versions, un-  
locking from the inside is only possible  
with particular knowledge.  
In addition, the following functions are exe-  
cuted:  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to  
extreme temperatures, there is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Do not lock the ve-  
hicle from the outside when there are peo-  
ple or animals in it. Do not leave babies,  
toddlers or animals alone in the vehicle.  
–
If a MINI ID or driver profile was as-  
signed to the vehicle key, this MINI ID  
or driver profile will be enabled.  
–
–
The interior lights are switched on, un-  
less they were manually switched off.  
Depending on vehicle equipment,  
folded-in exterior mirrors are folded out.  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in  
using the button inside the vehicle, they  
will not fold out when the vehicle is un-  
locked.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the ve-  
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and  
endanger themselves and traffic, for exam-  
ple, due to the following actions:  
–
–
Anti-theft protection is switched off.  
The alarm system is switched off.  
Additional information:  
–
–
–
Establishing standby.  
–
–
–
–
Settings, refer to page 86.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Welcome lights, refer to page 158.  
MINI ID, refer to page 60.  
Opening and closing the doors or  
windows.  
–
–
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Driver profiles, refer to page 64.  
73  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
The lighting functions may depend on the  
Actions during locking  
Depending on the settings, the following  
functions are performed when locking the  
vehicle:  
ambient brightness.  
Locking the vehicle  
1. To lock the vehicle using the vehicle  
key, close the driver’s door.  
–
The locking of the vehicle can be con-  
firmed with a light signal or a sound  
signal.  
2.  
Press the lock button on the ve-  
hicle key.  
–
Depending on vehicle equipment, the  
exterior mirrors can be folded in au-  
tomatically when locking. The exterior  
mirrors are not folded in when the haz-  
ard warning flashers are switched on.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
The following functions are executed:  
The vehicle can be accessed without using  
the vehicle key.  
–
All doors, the trunk, and the fuel filler  
flap are locked.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected  
near the vehicle.  
–
Anti-theft protection is switched on.  
This prevents the doors from being un-  
locked using the lock buttons or the  
door openers.  
General information  
–
The alarm system is switched on.  
Function availability depends on vehicle  
equipment.  
If the drive-ready state is still turned on  
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn  
will honk twice. In this case, drive-ready  
state must be turned off using the Start/  
Stop switch.  
Depending on national-market version, the  
vehicle can also be unlocked and locked via  
the door handle using a compatible smart-  
phone and digital key.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 86.  
MINI Digital Key, refer to page 83.  
Functional requirements  
With the vehicle key  
Unlocking the vehicle  
To get inside the vehicle using the door  
handle, the following functional require-  
ments must be met:  
To unlock the vehicle using the vehi-  
cle key, press the unlock button on  
the vehicle key.  
–
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in  
your pants pocket.  
–
Bluetooth must be activated on the  
smartphone to unlock and lock using the  
Digital Key.  
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap  
have been unlocked due to the settings in  
place, press the button on the vehicle key  
again to unlock the other vehicle access  
points.  
–
–
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must  
be outside of the vehicle near the doors.  
After locking, approx. 2 seconds must  
elapse before unlocking is possible.  
After opening one of the front doors, the  
vehicle is ready for operation.  
74  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Unlocking the vehicle using the door  
handle  
Touchless unlocking/locking of the  
vehicle  
Principle  
The vehicle will be unlocked when an au-  
thorized vehicle key is detected in the un-  
locking zone.  
The unlocking zone is located within a ra-  
dius of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side  
and rear of the vehicle.  
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle  
key leaves the locking zone.  
To unlock the vehicle using the door handle,  
reach into the recessed grip on one of the  
front doors.  
The locking zone is located within a radius  
of approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear  
of the vehicle.  
Locking the vehicle with the door  
handle  
Automatic unlocking and locking must be  
activated in the settings.  
1. To lock the vehicle using the door han-  
dle, close the driver’s door.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Ac-  
cess.  
2. If carrying the vehicle key on your per-  
son, place a finger on the grooved sur-  
face of a closed door’s handle for approx.  
1 second without reaching into the re-  
cessed grip.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
touchless unlocking and locking is also pos-  
sible for compatible smartphones with a  
digital key. Enable Bluetooth on your smart-  
phone to do so.  
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking  
zone for an extended period of time without  
movement, the vehicle will be locked auto-  
matically.  
If someone is detected on a seat while lock-  
ing the vehicle, the following restrictions  
apply:  
–
The vehicle will be locked but not se-  
cured against theft.  
Malfunction  
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the  
locking request detection on the door han-  
dles.  
–
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
Additional information:  
MINI Digital Key, refer to page 83.  
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and  
lock the vehicle using the buttons of the  
vehicle key or use the integrated key.  
75  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
Actions during unlocking  
General information  
If the settings specify that only the driver's  
door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked,  
note the following:  
The Key Card is available with Comfort Ac-  
cess.  
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the  
Key Card  
The driver's door and fuel filler flap will only  
be unlocked when the driver approaches the  
vehicle on the driver's side.  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 86.  
Functional requirements  
To unlock/lock the vehicle hands-free, the  
following functional requirements must be  
met:  
–
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in  
your pants pocket.  
To unlock/lock the vehicle using the Key  
Card, hold the activated Key Card directly  
over the middle of the driver’s door handle.  
–
Bluetooth must be activated on the  
smartphone for contactless unlocking  
and locking using the Digital Key.  
When locking the vehicle with the Key  
Card, make sure that all doors and the trunk  
are closed.  
–
–
–
Automatic unlocking and locking must  
be activated in the settings.  
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly  
change the position of the Key Card and  
repeat the procedure.  
The drive-ready state must be turned  
off.  
If the vehicle has been in the idle  
state for several days, contactless un-  
locking/locking will only be available af-  
ter the vehicle has been driven.  
With MINI Digital Key  
Principle  
Additional information:  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, a digital key can be  
installed on a compatible smartphone and  
used to unlock and lock the vehicle.  
Settings, refer to page 86.  
With the Key Card  
Principle  
The Key Card is a chip card on which the  
digital key is installed. The Key Card can be  
used to unlock and lock the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
MINI Digital Key, refer to page 83.  
Additional information:  
Key Card, refer to page 81.  
76  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
–
–
–
–
With the vehicle key.  
In the trunk.  
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the  
MINI Digital Key  
Inside the vehicle.  
Hands-free opening/closing.  
General information  
The cargo area will be opened to the config-  
ured opening height.  
Safety information  
To unlock/lock the vehicle with the MINI  
Digital Key, hold the smartphone's NFC an-  
tenna directly over the middle of the driv-  
er’s door handle. The position of the near  
field communication antenna depends on  
the smartphone model.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the tailgate is  
clear during opening and closing.  
When locking the vehicle with the smart-  
phone, make sure that all doors and the  
trunk are closed.  
Warning  
The tailgate swings back and up when it  
opens. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the tailgate is clear during  
opening and closing.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
What precautions can be taken to be able to  
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking  
in the vehicle key?  
–
The MINI app's Remote Services include  
options for locking/unlocking a vehicle,  
among others.  
Warning  
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the  
windows and heating elements while driv-  
ing. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Cover the edges and  
ensure that pointed objects do not hit the  
windows.  
This requires an active MINI Connected  
contract and the MINI app must be in-  
stalled on a smartphone.  
–
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested  
via the MINI Connected Call Center.  
An active MINI Connected contract is  
required.  
With the vehicle key  
General information  
Access to the cargo area  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-  
cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo  
area.  
Principle  
The trunk can be opened/closed as follows:  
77  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, the following set-  
tings can be changed:  
MINI Digital Key, refer to page 83.  
Functional requirements  
–
Unlocking the cargo area with the vehi-  
cle key also unlocks the doors.  
To access the cargo area using the trunk,  
the following functional requirements must  
be met:  
–
Before unlocking the cargo area with  
the vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.  
–
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in  
your pants pocket.  
Functional requirements  
–
Bluetooth must be activated on the  
smartphone to detect the Digital Key.  
To access the trunk using the vehicle key,  
the following functional requirements must  
be met:  
Opening the cargo area  
–
–
–
To open the cargo area with the vehicle  
key, the trailer power socket must not  
be occupied.  
Selector lever position P must be en-  
gaged to open the cargo area with the  
vehicle key.  
You must enable the setting for opening  
with the vehicle key.  
Additional information:  
The trunk can be opened as follows:  
Settings, refer to page 86.  
–
Unlock the vehicle, then press the but-  
ton on the trunk.  
Opening the trunk  
–
With Comfort Access: Carry the vehicle  
key with you and press the button on  
the trunk.  
On the vehicle key, press and hold  
the trunk button for approx. 1 sec-  
ond.  
Locked doors are not unlocked.  
On the trunk  
Closing the cargo area  
The trunk can be closed as follows:  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the cargo  
area can be accessed without operating the  
vehicle key.  
The key is automatically detected near the  
vehicle.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
compatible smartphones with a digital key  
are also detected automatically. In this case,  
the cargo area can be opened with a smart-  
phone.  
Additional information:  
78  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
On the tailgate, press the button  
CONTROLS  
–
–
Interruption of the opening  
for opening/closing.  
procedure  
The opening process stops in the following  
situations:  
On the tailgate, press the lock  
button.  
–
–
When the vehicle starts moving.  
The vehicle is locked after clos-  
ing the cargo area. To do so, the driver's  
door must be closed and the vehicle key  
must be outside of the vehicle near the  
cargo area.  
By pressing the button on the outside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes  
the cargo area again.  
–
–
By pressing the button on the inside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes  
the cargo area again.  
–
Pull the tailgate down slightly. The tail-  
gate closes automatically.  
By pressing the button on the vehicle  
key.  
Inside the vehicle  
Pressing the button again continues the  
opening process.  
Functional prerequisites  
To open the cargo area using the button  
inside, the trailer power socket must not be  
occupied.  
–
By pressing or pulling the button in  
the storage compartment of the driver's  
door. Pressing again continues the open-  
ing procedure.  
The vehicle key or digital key must be lo-  
cated inside the vehicle in order to close the  
cargo area using the button in the vehicle  
interior.  
Interruption of the closing  
procedure  
When the vehicle is locked, selector lever  
position P must be engaged before the  
trunk lid can be opened using the button  
in the vehicle interior.  
The closing process stops in the following  
situations:  
–
If the vehicle drives off with a jerky  
movement.  
–
By pressing the button on the outside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens  
the cargo area again.  
Opening the trunk  
In the storage compartment on the  
driver's door, press the button for  
opening/closing the trunk.  
–
–
–
By pressing the button on the inside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens  
the cargo area again.  
Closing the cargo area  
By pressing the button on the vehicle  
key. Pressing it again opens the cargo  
area again.  
Pull and hold the button for open-  
ing/closing the trunk on the driver's  
door.  
By releasing the button in the storage  
compartment of the driver's door. Pull-  
ing again and holding continues the  
closing motion.  
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk  
is closed.  
79  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
Functional requirements  
Touchless opening and closing of  
the cargo area  
To open/close the trunk hands-free, the  
following functional requirements must be  
met:  
Principle  
–
–
–
–
–
To close the cargo area contactlessly,  
the automatic tailgate must be installed.  
Touchless opening and closing of the cargo  
area is possible when carrying the vehicle  
key on your person.  
Selector lever position P must be en-  
gaged.  
Sensors detect specific foot movements  
near the center of the trunk, and the trunk  
opens or closes.  
Contactless opening and closing of the  
trunk must be activated in the settings.  
The trailer power socket must be unoc-  
cupied.  
General information  
Function availability depends on vehicle  
equipment and national-market version.  
Bluetooth must be activated on the  
smartphone to open and close the cargo  
area contactlessly using the Digital Key.  
If the vehicle key is within the sensor  
range, the cargo area may open or close  
inadvertently if you unintentionally move  
your foot or if a foot movement is detected.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: Trailer  
power socket must be unoccupied.  
Additional information:  
The sensor has an approximate range of  
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.  
Settings, refer to page 86.  
If contactless opening is used for the cargo  
area, the locked doors will not be unlocked.  
Hands-free opening of the trunk  
1. To open the trunk hands-free, walk be-  
hind the vehicle with the vehicle key,  
holding it in the middle at the rear of the  
vehicle, approximately one arm’s length  
away.  
Depending on national-market version, con-  
tactless opening of the cargo area is also  
possible for compatible smartphones with a  
Digital Key.  
Additional information:  
2. Move one foot in the direction of travel  
under the vehicle and pull it back im-  
mediately or use one foot to swipe in  
one direction under the vehicle. During  
these movements, the leg must pass  
through the range of the sensor.  
MINI Digital Key, refer to page 83.  
Safety information  
Warning  
With hands-free opening of the trunk,  
there may be unintentional contact with  
vehicle parts, e.g., hot exhaust system.  
There is a risk of injury. When moving  
your foot, make sure you have a firm  
stance and do not touch the vehicle.  
80  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Before the cargo area opens, the hazard  
warning system flashes.  
Malfunction  
Moving a foot again will stop the opening  
proccedure. The subsequent foot movement  
will close the cargo area again.  
Warning  
With manual operation of a blocked tail-  
gate, it can release itself unexpectedly  
from the blocking. There is a risk of injury  
or risk of damage to property. Do not oper-  
ate the tailgate manually if it is blocked.  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Hands-free closing of the trunk  
To close the trunk hands-free, move your  
foot, while carrying the vehicle key on you,  
in the same way as for opening the trunk.  
The hazard warning system flashes and an  
acoustic signal sounds.  
In the event of an electrical malfunction in  
the automatic tailgate, operate the unlocked  
tailgate slowly with a smooth motion by  
hand.  
Moving a foot again will stop the closing  
process. The subsequent foot movement  
will open the cargo area again.  
System limits  
To close the tailgate fully, press down  
lightly only. Closing occurs automatically.  
The detection of the foot movement may be  
limited due to the following external condi-  
tions:  
Key Card  
–
–
–
–
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the  
vehicle.  
Principle  
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be un-  
locked and locked, as well as started.  
Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehi-  
cle.  
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g.,  
by stickers.  
A digital key that has already been paired  
with the vehicle is installed on the Key  
Card. The digital key must be activated on  
the Interaction Unit.  
After improper paint work on the vehi-  
cle in the area of the sensors.  
Movement in range of the sensors may  
cause the trunk to open or close uninten-  
tionally, e.g., when objects are lifted quickly  
in the vehicle rear or due to the moving  
brushes in a car wash. To prevent such un-  
intended opening of the cargo area in such  
cases, keep the vehicle key at a sufficient  
distance from the rear of the vehicle.  
General information  
Key Card availability depends on vehicle  
equipment and national-market version.  
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the  
Key Card or take the Key Card with you  
because the active Key Card can be used  
to start the vehicle. Always take the vehicle  
key with you to a service appointment.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: Objects  
mounted on a trailer hitch cannot be de-  
tected if the trailer power socket is not  
plugged in.  
81  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
Deactivating Key Card  
Safety information  
To deactivate the Key Card, go through the  
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Doors and windows" / "Vehicle key" / "Key  
Card" / "Deactivate Key Card".  
NOTICE  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are  
in the wireless charging tray at the same  
time, the Key Card could become damaged.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Do  
not place the Key Card in the wireless  
charging tray at the same time as a mobile  
device.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list  
of paired digital keys.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked  
with the activated Key Card.  
Additional information:  
Activating/deactivating Key Card  
in the vehicle  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to  
page 72.  
General information  
Turning on drive-ready state with  
the Key Card  
When MINI Digital Key is activated for the  
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of  
the vehicle key.  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list  
of paired digital keys.  
Functional requirement  
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle  
to activate and deactivate the Key Card.  
Activating Key Card  
1. To turn on drive-ready state using the  
Key Card, place the activated Key Card  
in the center of the tray on the center  
console and slide it down behind the  
holder.  
2. Turn the Start/Stop switch to activate  
drive-ready state.  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the  
Key Card can be removed from the tray.  
1. To activate the Key Card, place the Key  
Card in the center of the tray on the  
center console and slide it down behind  
the holder.  
Malfunction  
The vehicle may not be able to detect the  
Key Card if there are objects between the  
smartphone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a  
wallet or smartphone case.  
2. Follow the instructions on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
82  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements must  
be met for MINI Digital Key:  
MINI Digital Key  
Principle  
The MINI Digital Key makes it possible to  
unlock, lock, and start the vehicle using a  
digital key.  
–
–
–
The smartphone is compatible with  
MINI Digital Key  
The vehicle is linked with the vehicle  
owner's MINI Connected account.  
MINI Digital Key can be used with a com-  
patible smartphone or other compatible mo-  
bile device.  
The rechargeable battery of the smart-  
phone has a sufficient charge. The nec-  
essary minimum charge of the recharge-  
able battery depends on the smartphone.  
To unlock and start a vehicle with a com-  
patible smartphone, this function must be  
offered by the smartphone manufacturer.  
The MINI app is able to check whether the  
smartphone and vehicle are compatible as  
well as determine which functions are sup-  
ported.  
–
Bluetooth must be activated on the  
smartphone for contactless unlocking  
and locking using the Digital Key.  
Enabling the main digital key  
Each vehicle can be provided with a main  
digital key. Additional digital keys can be  
shared and then deleted.  
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a  
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle  
owner must prove his authorization for the  
vehicle for this purpose.  
General information  
MINI Digital Key availability and function-  
ality depend on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version.  
The MINI app can be used to provide verifi-  
cation for authorization, or the activation  
code can be used on the corresponding  
smartphone app, e.g., Wallet. Both vehicle  
keys must be in the vehicle during activa-  
tion.  
A MINI ID or driver profile with individual  
settings can be assigned to a digital key.  
Follow the instructions in the Digital Key  
menu on the MINI app or Interaction Unit.  
When using a smartphone as a digital key,  
it is helpful to carry the deactivated Key  
Card in the vehicle. In situations where the  
vehicle is to be given to another person,  
they can be given the Key Card instead of  
the smartphone. To do so, the Key Card  
must be activated via the Interaction Unit.  
Sharing digital keys  
General information  
The MINI Digital Key makes it possible to  
share digital keys with other people. This  
option is available via the smartphone that  
is enabled as main digital key. This function  
must be supported by the smartphone.  
Always take the vehicle key with you to a  
service appointment.  
Additional information:  
–
–
–
MINI ID, refer to page 60.  
Driver profiles, refer to page 64.  
Key Card, refer to page 81.  
Forwarding authorization  
To share the digital key, select the corre-  
sponding function on the smartphone, for  
instance in the Wallet app.  
The MINI website provides additional infor-  
mation under the keyword “digital key”.  
83  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
As soon as a digital key is shared with  
another person, the person will receive an  
invitation. When the invitation is accepted,  
the digital key on the recipient's smart-  
phone will be activated.  
The deletion via the smartphone using the  
main digital key will not be performed until  
the vehicle is used with a key other than the  
key to be deleted.  
Keys are deleted immediately when using  
the smartphone with shared key or the In-  
teraction Unit to do so.  
Limiting the range of functions  
Certain functions of the digital key can be  
limited before handing it over. For exam-  
ple, you can disable restrictions for driving  
stability control systems and reduce the en-  
gine power before giving your Digital Key  
to a novice driver. For more information, re-  
fer to the MINI Connected portal and MINI  
app.  
Deleting a digital key via the  
Interaction Unit  
To delete a digital key using the Interaction  
Unit, either an authorized vehicle key must  
be located in the vehicle or the main digital  
key must be located in the smartphone tray.  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and  
windows" / "Vehicle key" / "Digital Key".  
Authentication  
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone  
model, an authentication may be required  
for security and safety reasons.  
2. If necessary, select the digital key.  
3. "Delete key"  
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital  
key or another method may be used for au-  
thentication. Follow the instructions given  
on the smartphone or Interaction Unit.  
Resetting the function  
To reset the MINI Digital Key function, an  
authorized vehicle key must be located in  
the vehicle.  
Deleting digital keys  
General information  
Deleted digital keys will be removed from  
the list of enabled digital keys.  
When resetting the MINI Digital Key, all  
digital keys will be deleted, including the  
main digital key. The Key Card's digital key  
is retained and deactivated.  
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer  
be unlocked, locked or started with a digital  
key.  
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.  
Deleting the main digital key  
The main digital key can be deleted using  
the smartphone or Interaction Unit.  
The main digital key must be enabled again  
to use MINI Digital Key again.  
To reactivate the main digital key, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" / "Vehicle  
key" / "Digital Key" / "Reset function".  
The deletion of the main digital key is com-  
pleted immediately.  
Deleting a shared key  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked as  
follows:  
Shared keys can be deleted using the smart-  
phone with the main digital key, using the  
smartphone with a shared key, or using the  
Interaction Unit.  
84  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
–
–
Using the door handle.  
Sale of the smartphone  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version, the vehicle can  
be locked and unlocked with no-touch  
activation.  
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone  
prior to selling the smartphone. This en-  
sures that the smartphone can no longer be  
used for the vehicle.  
MINI Digital Key availability and func-  
tionality depend on vehicle equipment  
and national-market version.  
Changing smartphones  
To use a new smartphone as a master Dig-  
ital Key, activate the new smartphone ac-  
cording to the instructions for the master  
Digital Key. The previous master key is  
deleted when the new smartphone is acti-  
vated.  
Additional information:  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to  
page 72.  
Turning on drive-ready state with  
MINI Digital Key  
Sale of the vehicle  
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the MINI  
Digital Key function or remove the vehicle  
from the current vehicle owner's MINI Con-  
nected account.  
When the vehicle is removed from the MINI  
Connected account, all digital keys for the  
vehicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digi-  
tal key is retained and deactivated.  
1. To turn on drive-ready state with the  
MINI Digital Key, place the smartphone  
in the center of the tray on the center  
console and slide it down behind the  
holder.  
System limits  
With a digital key, the alarm system's inte-  
rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor can  
only be deactivated using the Interaction  
Unit.  
Ensure that the display is facing up.  
Additional information:  
2. Turn the Start/Stop switch to activate  
drive-ready state.  
Alarm system, refer to page 88.  
It may be necessary to open the holder  
when inserting/removing the smartphone,  
depending on its thickness.  
Malfunction  
Your Digital Key may not be detected by  
the vehicle under the following circumstan-  
ces:  
With Comfort Access, it is sufficient, de-  
pending on the country, for the smartphone  
with Bluetooth enabled to be located inside  
the vehicle. Turn the Start/Stop switch to  
activate drive-ready state.  
–
The smartphone is shielded from the  
sensors in the vehicle by a smartphone  
cover that is not suitable.  
–
There is an object, e.g., chip card or  
Key Card, between the smartphone and  
smartphone cover.  
85  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
–
–
The connection has been interrupted by  
a transmission tower or other device  
with a high transmitting power.  
Unlocking the vehicle from inside  
To unlock the vehicle from the in-  
side, press the unlock button on the  
driver’s door.  
The smartphone is shielded by a build-  
ing or metallic object.  
Opening the door  
When the vehicle is locked, doors can be  
opened as follows:  
Buttons for the central locking  
system  
–
On the front door, press the un-  
lock button to unlock the doors  
together.  
Principle  
The vehicle can be locked/unlocked from  
the inside using the buttons for the central  
locking system.  
Pull the door opener on the door to be  
opened.  
–
–
Front doors: Pull the door opener on the  
door to be opened. The other doors re-  
main locked.  
The vehicle is automatically locked when  
driving off.  
In the event of a severe accident, the vehi-  
cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard  
warning system and interior lights are illu-  
minated.  
Rear doors: Pull the door opener on the  
door to be opened twice: The first time  
unlocks the door, the second time opens  
it. The other doors remain locked.  
Overview  
Settings  
General information  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings for opening  
and closing are possible.  
Unlocking and locking  
Doors  
The central locking system buttons are lo-  
cated on the driver's door.  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors  
and windows" / "Lock" / "Doors and  
windows" / "Unlock".  
Locking the vehicle from inside  
To lock the vehicle from the inside,  
press the lock button on the driver’s  
door when the doors are closed.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
–
"Driver's door only"  
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
The vehicle is not secured against theft  
when locking.  
86  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Only the driver's door and fuel filler  
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-  
locks the entire vehicle.  
Confirmation signals from the vehicle  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and  
windows"/"Lock" / "Doors and windows".  
–
"All doors"  
The entire vehicle is unlocked.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
–
"Flash when unlocking"  
Touchless unlocking/locking  
Unlocking is confirmed by two  
flashes.  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and  
windows"/"Lock" / "Doors and windows".  
–
–
"Flash when locking"  
Locking is confirmed by one flash.  
With alarm system:  
2. Select the desired setting:  
–
–
"Unlock when approaching"  
"Lock when walking away"  
"Sound on lock/unlock"  
Unlocking is confirmed with two  
sound signals, locking is confirmed  
with one sound signal.  
Enabling this setting also activates  
automatic folding of the mirrors. Au-  
tomatic folding of the mirrors can be  
deactivated again in the correspond-  
ing menu.  
Folding mirrors in automatically  
Automatic folding of the side mirrors can be  
adjusted on the Interaction Unit.  
Automatic unlocking  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows" /  
"Lock" / "Doors and windows" / "Fold  
mirrors on lock/unlock".  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and  
windows"/"Lock" / "Doors and windows".  
2. Select the desired setting:  
–
–
"Unlock doors at end of trip"  
Cargo area  
"Doors will unlock automatically  
when in P."  
Cargo area button on vehicle key  
If locked, the vehicle unlocks automatically  
when drive-ready state is turned off or se-  
lector lever position P is engaged.  
It is possible to choose where to assign the  
cargo area button on the vehicle key.  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and  
windows" / "Tailgate" / "Vehicle key" /  
"Tailgate button".  
Automatic locking  
Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and  
windows"/"Lock" / "Doors and windows" /  
"Lock after a short time".  
2. Select the desired setting:  
–
"Tailgate"  
The vehicle locks automatically after a short  
period of time if no door is opened after  
unlocking.  
Depending on the equipment, the  
cargo area will be unlocked or  
opened.  
–
"Tailgate and door(s)"  
87  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
Depending on the equipment, the  
If this setting is enabled, the driver’s win-  
trunk will be unlocked or opened and dow opens automatically as soon as the ve-  
the doors are unlocked.  
"Tailgate"  
hicle reaches the saved location.  
–
–
The vehicle speed must be below  
6 mph/10 km/h.  
The vehicle must be unlocked before  
the cargo area can be operated with  
the vehicle key.  
Alarm system  
"Lock tailgate button"  
Operating the cargo area with the  
vehicle key is disabled.  
Principle  
The alarm system issues a visual and acous-  
tic signal when someone attempts to open  
the locked vehicle incorrectly.  
Adjusting the opening height  
You can set how far the tailgate can be  
opened.  
General information  
When the vehicle is locked, the vehi-  
cle alarm system reacts to the following  
changes:  
When adjusting the opening height, make  
sure the clearance above the tailgate is at  
least 4 in/10 cm.  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors  
and windows" / "Tailgate" / "Opening  
height".  
–
–
–
If a door, the hood, or the trunk is  
opened.  
If movement is detected inside the vehi-  
cle.  
2. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired  
opening height.  
If the vehicle has a different tilt, e.g.,  
due to an attempt to steal a wheel or  
when towing.  
Opening/closing the cargo area with  
no-touch activation  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and  
windows" / "Tailgate".  
–
–
If the battery voltage is interrupted.  
If the diagnostic socket is used improp-  
erly.  
–
If the vehicle is locked when a device is  
connected to the diagnostic socket.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
The alarm system signals these changes vis-  
ually and acoustically:  
–
–
"Open with foot movement"  
"Close with foot movement"  
–
Acoustic alarm:  
Window  
Depending on local regulations, the  
acoustic alarm may be suppressed.  
Opening windows automatically  
–
Optical alarm:  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Doors and windows".  
By flashing of the hazard warning sys-  
tem and headlights, where required.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Do not modify the system to ensure func-  
tion of the alarm system.  
88  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Turning the alarm system on/off  
The alarm system is activated or deacti-  
vated as soon as the vehicle is locked or  
unlocked.  
If the MINI app is used to lock the vehicle  
from a distance, the alarm system will not  
turn on.  
Opening the doors with the alarm  
system switched on  
The alarm system is triggered when a door  
is opened if the door was unlocked using  
the integrated key in the door lock.  
–
–
The indicator light flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
The alarm system is switched on.  
The indicator light flashes for approx.  
10 seconds, then flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
Opening the cargo area with the  
alarm system switched on  
The cargo area can be opened even when  
the alarm system is switched on.  
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm  
sensor are not activated because the  
doors, hood, or tailgate are not closed  
correctly. Correctly closed access points  
are secured.  
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area  
will be locked and monitored again. The  
hazard warning system flashes once during  
closing.  
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm  
sensor will turn on when all open access  
points are closed.  
–
–
–
The indicator light flashes even though  
all access points have been closed:  
Panic mode  
You can trigger the alarm system if you find  
yourself in a dangerous situation.  
Alarm system error.  
The indicator light goes out after un-  
locking:  
–
Press the button on the vehicle  
key and hold for at least 3 sec-  
onds.  
The vehicle has not been tampered with.  
The indicator light flashes after unlock-  
ing until drive-ready state is switched  
on, but no longer than approx. 5 mi-  
nutes:  
–
Briefly press the button on the vehicle  
key three times in succession.  
To switch off the alarm: press any button.  
The alarm has been triggered.  
Indicator light on the interior  
mirror  
The indicator light on the interior mirror  
shows the status of the alarm system:  
Tilt alarm sensor  
The tilt alarm sensor is part of the alarm  
system and monitors the vehicle's tilt.  
The alarm system responds in situations  
such as attempts to steal a wheel or when  
the vehicle is towed.  
89  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
and tilt alarm sensor appears on the In-  
Interior motion sensor  
The interior motion sensor is part of the  
alarm system and monitors the vehicle inte-  
rior.  
teraction Unit.  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion  
sensor are deactivated until the vehicle is  
locked again.  
The alarm system triggers when movement  
is detected inside the vehicle.  
Ending the alarm  
To stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle.  
The windows must be closed for the system  
to function properly.  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the  
integrated key, the drive-ready state must  
subsequently be turned on via the emer-  
gency detection of the vehicle key.  
Avoiding unintentional alarms  
General information  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion  
sensor can trigger an alarm, although no  
unauthorized action occurred.  
Window  
An unintentional alarm can be triggered in  
the following situations:  
Principle  
The windows can be operated as follows:  
–
–
–
In car washes.  
–
–
–
With the vehicle key.  
In duplex garages.  
Using the door handle.  
During transport on trains carrying ve-  
hicles, at sea or on a trailer.  
Using the switches inside the vehicle.  
–
–
With animals in the vehicle.  
Safety information  
When the vehicle is locked after start of  
refueling.  
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo-  
tion sensor can be switched off in such sit-  
uations.  
Warning  
When operating the windows, body parts  
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the travel path of the win-  
dows is clear while opening and closing.  
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and  
interior motion sensor  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion  
sensor can be turned off as follows:  
With the vehicle key  
–
As soon as the vehicle is locked,  
press the lock button on the vehi-  
cle key within 30 seconds.  
Opening windows with the vehicle key  
To open the windows with the ve-  
hicle key, unlock the vehicle, then  
press and hold the unlock button on  
the vehicle key.  
The indicator light illuminates for ap-  
prox. 2 seconds and then continues to  
flash.  
–
After standby state turns off, an option  
to deactivate the interior motion sensor  
The windows open for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
90  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Closing windows with the vehicle key  
Closing windows with the door handle  
With Comfort Access: To close the  
windows with the vehicle key, lock  
the vehicle, then press and hold the  
lock button on the vehicle key.  
The windows close for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exte-  
rior mirrors are folded in unless they were  
folded in while locking. The exterior mirrors  
are not folded in when the hazard warning  
flashers are switched on.  
To close a window using the door handle  
of a closed front door, place a finger on the  
grooved surface of the door handle and hold  
it there without reaching into the recessed  
grip.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
The windows can be closed using the door  
handle without operating the vehicle key.  
In addition to locking, the windows and  
glass sunroof with sun protection will be  
closed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exte-  
rior mirrors are folded in unless they were  
folded in during locking. The exterior mir-  
rors are not folded in when the hazard  
warning flashers are switched on.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected  
near the vehicle.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Ac-  
cess.  
Inside the vehicle  
Overview  
Depending on national-market version, the  
windows can also be closed via the door  
handle using a compatible smartphone and  
digital key.  
Additional information:  
MINI Digital Key, refer to page 83.  
Functional requirements  
To close the windows using the door handle,  
the following functional requirements must  
be met:  
–
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in  
your pants pocket.  
The power window switches are lo-  
cated on the doors.  
–
Bluetooth must be activated on the  
smartphone to close the window(s) us-  
ing the digital key.  
91  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
Functional requirements  
General information  
To close the windows inside the vehicle, the  
following functional requirements must be  
met:  
If resistance or blockage is detected while a  
window is being closed, the closing will be  
interrupted.  
–
–
Standby state is switched on.  
Safety information  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The vehicle key or digital key must be in-  
side the vehicle.  
Warning  
Accessories on the windows such as an-  
tennas can impact anti-trap mechanism.  
There is a risk of injury. Do not install  
accessories in the area of movement of the  
windows.  
Opening windows  
To open the windows, proceed as follows:  
–
On the door, press the power  
window switch to the resistance  
point.  
The window opens while the switch is  
being held.  
Closing without the anti-trap  
mechanism  
–
On the door, pull the power win-  
dow switch past the resistance  
point.  
In case of danger from the outside or if  
icing might prevent normal closing, proceed  
as follows:  
The window opens automatically. Press-  
ing the switch again stops the motion.  
1.  
On the door, pull the power win-  
dow switch past the resistance point  
and hold it.  
Closing the windows  
To close the windows, proceed as follows:  
The window closes with limited anti-  
trap mechanism. If the closing force ex-  
ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-  
terrupted.  
–
On the door, pull the power win-  
dow switch to the resistance  
point.  
The window closes while the switch is  
being held.  
2.  
On the door, pull the power win-  
dow switch past the resistance point  
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold  
it there.  
–
On the door, pull the power win-  
dow switch past the resistance  
point.  
The window closes automatically. Pull-  
ing again stops the motion.  
The window closes without the anti-trap  
mechanism.  
Anti-trap mechanism  
Principle  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects  
or body parts becoming jammed between  
the door frame and window while a window  
is being closed.  
Opening windows automatically  
If the driver’s window is frequently opened  
in the same location, the window can be set  
to open automatically. This is useful if you  
frequently use the same parking garage, for  
example.  
92  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Glass sunroof  
Settings, refer to page 86.  
Safety information  
Safety switch  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the area of movement of  
the glass sunroof is clear during opening  
and closing.  
Principle  
The safety switch can be used to pre-  
vent children, for instance, from opening  
and closing the rear windows using the  
switches in the rear.  
If an accident of a certain severity occurs,  
the safety function is switched off automati- With the vehicle key  
cally.  
Opening glass sunroof  
Overview  
To open the glass sunroof, unlock the  
vehicle, then press and hold the un-  
lock button on the vehicle key.  
The glass sunroof opens for as long as the  
button on the vehicle key is pressed.  
Closing glass sunroof  
With Comfort Access: To close the  
glass sunroof, lock the vehicle, then  
press and hold the lock button on the  
vehicle key when close to the vehicle.  
The safety switch is located on the  
driver's door.  
The glass sunroof closes for as long as the  
button on the vehicle key is pressed.  
Turning the safety functions on/off  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exte-  
rior mirrors are folded in unless they were  
folded in while locking. The exterior mirrors  
are not folded in when the hazard warning  
flashers are switched on.  
To activate/deactivate the safety  
function, press the safety switch on  
the driver’s door.  
The LED in the button illuminates when the  
safety function is turned on.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
The glass sunroof can be closed using the  
door handle without operating the vehicle  
key.  
93  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
The vehicle key is automatically detected  
near the vehicle.  
folded in while locking. The exterior mirrors  
are not folded in when the hazard warning  
flashers are switched on.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Ac-  
cess.  
Inside the vehicle  
General information  
The glass sunroof and the sun protection  
are operated using the same switch.  
Depending on the country, the glass sunroof  
can also be closed via the door handle us-  
ing compatible smartphones and your digi-  
tal key.  
Overview  
Additional information:  
MINI Digital Key, refer to page 83.  
Functional requirements  
To close the glass sunroof using the door  
handle, the following functional require-  
ments must be met:  
–
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in  
your pants pocket.  
–
Bluetooth must be activated on the  
smartphone to close the glass sunroof  
using the Digital Key.  
The glass sunroof/sun protec-  
tion switch is located in the  
headliner.  
Closing glass sunroof  
Functional requirements  
The glass sunroof can be operated when the  
following prerequisites are met:  
–
–
Standby state is switched on.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The vehicle key must be inside the vehicle.  
To close the glass sunroof using the driver’s  
door handle, touch the grooved surface on  
the driver’s door handle with your finger  
and hold it there without reaching into the  
recessed grip.  
Lifting/closing glass sunroof  
To raise/close the glass sun-  
roof, briefly press the glass  
sunroof switch in the head-  
liner upward.  
In addition to locking, the windows and  
glass sunroof will be closed.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exte-  
rior mirrors are folded in unless they were  
94  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
–
–
The closed glass sunroof tilts.  
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and  
sun protection together  
To open/close the glass sunroof and sun  
protection together, proceed as follows:  
The opened glass sunroof closes until it  
is in the tilted position.  
–
The tilted glass sunroof closes.  
–
In the headliner, push  
the glass sunroof/sun pro-  
tection switch backward  
twice, in quick succession,  
past the resistance point.  
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and  
sun protection separately  
To open/close the glass sunroof and sun  
protection separately, proceed as follows:  
The glass sunroof and sun  
protection open together.  
–
In the headliner, push the  
glass sunroof/sun protec-  
tion switch back to the re-  
sistance point and hold it.  
Pressing the switch again  
stops the motion.  
–
Briefly push the switch out and forward,  
twice in quick succession, past the re-  
sistance point.  
Holding down the switch  
opens the sun protection.  
If the sun protection is al-  
ready fully open, the glass  
sunroof opens.  
The glass sunroof and sun protection  
close together.  
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-  
tion.  
–
–
Push the switch forward to the resist-  
ance point and hold.  
The glass sunroof closes while the  
switch is being held. If the glass sunroof  
is already closed or in the tilted position,  
the sun protection closes.  
Comfort position  
On some models, there is less wind noise  
inside the vehicle when the glass sunroof  
is not fully open. In these models, the auto-  
matic function initially only opens the glass  
sunroof up to this comfort position.  
Push the switch back past the resistance  
point.  
The sun protection opens automatically.  
If the sun protection is already fully  
open, the glass sunroof opens automati-  
cally.  
Pressing the glass sunroof and sun protec-  
tion switch in the headliner opens the glass  
sunroof fully.  
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-  
tion.  
Anti-trap mechanism  
Principle  
–
Push the switch forward past the resist-  
ance point.  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects  
or body parts from becoming jammed be-  
tween the roof frame and glass sunroof  
while the glass sunroof is closing.  
The glass sunroof closes automatically.  
If the glass sunroof is already closed  
or tilted, the sun protection closes auto-  
matically.  
If resistance or a blockage is detected while  
the glass sunroof is closing, it will stop  
closing when the roof reaches the half-open  
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-  
tion.  
95  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
position or when closing from the tilted po-  
sition.  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Turn on drive-ready state or stop the  
vehicle if moving.  
Closing from the open position without  
the anti-trap mechanism  
In case of danger from the outside or if  
icing might prevent normal closing, proceed  
as follows:  
3. in the headliner, press the glass sun-  
roof switch forward, past the resistance  
point, and hold it there.  
Initializing after a power  
interruption  
General information  
After a power interruption during the open-  
ing or closing process, the glass sunroof can  
only be operated to a limited extent. Initial-  
izing the system can help in this case.  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Turn on drive-ready state or stop the  
vehicle if moving.  
The system can be initialized under the fol-  
lowing conditions:  
3. in the headliner, press the glass sun-  
roof switch forward, past the resistance  
point, and hold it there.  
–
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal po-  
sition.  
The glass sunroof closes with limited  
anti-trap mechanism. If the closing force  
exceeds a certain threshold, closing is  
stopped.  
–
The vehicle will not be moved until the  
initialization is completed.  
–
–
The drive-ready state is established.  
The outside temperature is above  
41 ℉/5 ℃.  
4. Push the switch forward again past the  
resistance point and hold, until the glass  
sunroof closes without the anti-trap  
mechanism. Make sure that the closing  
path is clear.  
During initialization, the glass sunroof  
closes without the anti-trap mechanism.  
Make sure that the closing path is clear.  
Closing from the lifted position  
without the anti-trap mechanism  
In case of danger from the outside or if  
icing might prevent normal closing, proceed  
as follows:  
Initializing the system  
To initialize the system, in the  
headliner, press the glass sun-  
roof switch upward and hold it  
until initialization is complete:  
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.  
–
If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens  
then closes again.  
–
If the glass sunroof is open, it first  
closes, then opens and closes again.  
Initialization is complete once the glass  
sunroof has opened then closed again.  
96  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
adjust the seat on the driver's side when  
the vehicle is stationary.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Warning  
With a backrest inclined too far to the  
rear, the protective effect of the seat belt  
can no longer be ensured. There is a risk  
of sliding under the seat belt in an acci-  
dent. There is a risk of injury or danger to  
life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the  
trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the  
most upright position as possible and do  
not adjust again while driving.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Sitting safely  
An ideal seat position that meets the needs  
of the occupants can make a vital contribu-  
tion to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.  
Warning  
In the event of an accident, having the cor-  
rect seat position and using the protection  
systems correctly both play an important  
role. Follow the information in the following  
chapters.  
There is a danger of jamming when mov-  
ing the seats. There is a risk of injury or  
risk of damage to property. Make sure that  
the travel path of the seat is clear prior to  
any adjustment.  
Additional information:  
–
–
–
–
Seats, refer to page 97.  
Manually adjustable seats  
Principle  
Manually adjustable seats are operated us-  
ing the levers on the seat.  
Seat belts, refer to page 102.  
Head restraints, refer to page 105.  
Airbags, refer to page 167.  
Front seats  
Safety information  
Warning  
Seat setting while driving can lead to un-  
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle  
control could be lost. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Only  
97  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Adjusting the height  
Overview  
The levers for setting the seats are located  
on the front seats.  
To adjust the height: On the side of the  
seat, push the seat height lever up or down  
as many times as necessary for the seat to  
reach the desired height.  
Setting the longitudinal direction  
Warning  
Adjusting backrest tilt  
If a seat is not locked, it may move  
unexpectedly while driving. Vehicle con-  
trol could be lost. There is a risk of ac-  
cident, injury, or property damage. After  
adjusting, move the seat forward or back  
slightly, making sure the seat engages  
properly.  
To adjust the backrest tilt, pull the backrest  
tilt lever on the side of the seat and tighten  
or loosen the backrest as required.  
Electrically adjustable seats  
Principle  
Electrically adjustable seats are operated  
using the switches on the seat.  
To adjust the longitudinal direction, pull up  
the longitudinal direction lever at the front  
of the seat and push the seat in the desired  
direction.  
The current seat position can be stored us-  
ing the memory function.  
Additional information:  
Memory function, refer to page 110.  
98  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Adjusting seat tilt  
The switches for setting the seats are lo-  
cated on the front seats.  
To adjust the seat tilt, flip the seat tilt  
switch up or down.  
Setting the longitudinal direction  
Adjusting backrest tilt  
To adjust the seat in the longitudinal direc-  
tion, press the longitudinal direction switch  
forward or backward.  
To adjust the backrest tilt, flip the backrest  
tilt switch forward or backward.  
Adjusting the seat position  
automatically  
Adjusting the height  
Principle  
The seat setting for the driver's seat is  
saved to the active MINI ID or driver pro-  
file. If the MINI ID or driver profile is reac-  
tivated later, the saved position is applied  
automatically.  
Activate/deactivate the function  
To activate/deactivate the automatic seat  
adjuster, proceed as follows:  
To adjust the seat height, press the seat  
height switch up or down.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Seat comfort" /  
99  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
"Driver" / "Automatically use seat  
position".  
Turning the seat massage on/off  
To turn the seat massage on/off, proceed as  
follows:  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Lumbar support  
Principle  
The curvature of the seat backrest can be  
adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-  
bar region of the spine. The lower back and  
the spine are supported for upright sitting  
position.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Seat comfort".  
2. Select the desired seat.  
3. "Seat massage"  
4. Select the desired setting, as necessary.  
The seat massage is stopped when the lum-  
bar support is operated.  
Calibrating the front seats  
Principle  
A Check Control message is displayed on  
the Interaction Unit when the electric seat  
adjuster is not working properly.  
Adjusting the lumbar support  
To adjust the lumbar support, proceed as  
follows:  
–
To increase or decrease the  
bulge, press the lumbar support  
button forward or backward.  
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat  
setting, the front seats must be calibrated.  
–
To move the bulge up or down, press the  
lumbar support button up or down.  
Safety information  
Functional limitation  
Warning  
The lumbar support cannot be adjusted at  
very high temperatures.  
There is a danger of jamming when mov-  
ing the seats. There is a risk of injury or  
risk of damage to property. Make sure that  
the travel path of the seat is clear prior to  
any adjustment.  
Seat massage  
Principle  
Using the seat massage helps relax the mus-  
cles and improve circulation in the lumbar  
region, which, in turn, helps prevent fati-  
gue.  
Calibrating the front seat  
1. To calibrate the front seat, press the lon-  
gitudinal direction switch on the seat  
forward for approx. 2 seconds until the  
seat stops.  
Seat massage menu  
To go directly to the Seat Massage  
menu on the Interaction Unit, press  
the seat massage button on the seat.  
2. Repeat step 1 until the seat stops then  
moves slightly forward.  
3. Press the switch forward for approx. 2  
seconds again until the seat stops.  
4. Repeat step 3 until the seat stops then  
moves slightly backward.  
100  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
As soon as the message on the Interaction  
CONTROLS  
Longitudinal direction  
Unit disappears, the calibration is complete.  
If the message remains active, repeat the  
calibration.  
Warning  
If a seat is not locked, it may move  
unexpectedly while driving. Vehicle con-  
trol could be lost. There is a risk of ac-  
cident, injury, or property damage. After  
adjusting, move the seat forward or back  
slightly, making sure the seat engages  
properly.  
If the message is still shown after repeated  
calibration, have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another quali-  
fied service center or repair shop.  
Rear seats  
Principle  
The backrest tilt and, depending on vehicle  
equipment, longitudinal direction can be ad-  
justed as needed for the second seat row.  
Safety information  
Warning  
To adjust the longitudinal direction of the  
second row seats, pull the longitudinal di-  
rection lever at the front of the seat and  
push the seat in the desired direction.  
There is a danger of jamming when mov-  
ing the seats. There is a risk of injury or  
risk of damage to property. Make sure that  
the travel path of the seat is clear prior to  
any adjustment.  
Backrest tilt  
1. Pull the loop on the side of the seat to  
unlock the backrest.  
Warning  
Seats in the second row of seats are not  
locked when they are folded down and  
they can move. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. Only fold  
the seats in the second row down while  
loading. When driving without a load, fold  
back and lock the seats in the second row  
before driving away.  
2. Apply or lift weight on the backrest as  
needed.  
After setting the backrest tilt, make sure  
that the backrest engages correctly.  
101  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Safety information  
Comfort exit  
Warning  
Principle  
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one  
person will potentially defeat the ability of  
the seat belt to serve its protective func-  
tion. There is a risk of injury or danger to  
life. Do not strap in more than one person  
per single seat belt. Infants and children  
are not allowed on an occupant's lap, and  
must be transported and secured in desig-  
nated child restraint systems.  
The comfort exit setting makes it easier to  
get in/out of the vehicle by automatically  
adjusting the seat position and moving the  
seat back.  
Activating/deactivating comfort  
exit  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Seat comfort" /  
"Comfort exit".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, in-  
cluding seat belts, can be limited or lost  
when seat belts are fastened incorrectly.  
An incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause  
additional injuries, for instance in the  
event of an accident, braking or evasive  
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or  
danger to life. Make sure that all occu-  
pants are wearing seat belts correctly.  
Seat belts  
Principle  
The vehicle is fitted with five seat belts  
to ensure occupant safety. However, they  
can only offer protection when adjusted cor-  
rectly.  
Always make sure that seat belts are being  
worn by the occupants before driving off.  
The airbags supplement the seat belts as an  
additional safety device. The airbags do not  
replace seat belts.  
Warning  
With a rear seat backrest that is not  
locked, the protective effect of the middle  
seat belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. If you are using  
the middle seat belt, lock the wider rear  
seat backrest.  
All seat belt anchorage points are designed  
to achieve the best possible protective ef-  
fect for the seat belts when used properly  
and with the correct seat settings.  
The two outer seat belt buckles of the rear  
seats are intended for the persons sitting on  
the left and right.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, in-  
cluding seat belts, may not be fully opera-  
tional or fail in the following situations:  
The center seat belt buckle of the rear seats  
is intended for the person sitting in the  
middle.  
Additional information:  
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 97.  
102  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are  
CONTROLS  
–
–
Buckling the seat belt  
damaged, soiled, or changed in any  
other way.  
1. To fasten the seat belt, guide the seat  
belt slowly over the shoulder and hip.  
Seat belt tensioners or seat belt wind-  
ers were modified.  
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat  
belt buckle. The seat belt buckle must  
engage audibly.  
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged  
in the event of an accident. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Keep clean and  
do not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles,  
seat belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and  
seat belt anchors. After an accident, have  
the seat belts checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Correct use of seat belts  
To use the seat belts correctly, note the fol-  
lowing:  
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle,  
an adjustable slider is available on the belt  
to help position the buckle when not in use.  
–
–
–
Wear the seat belt tight to your body  
over your lap and shoulders, without  
twisting it.  
Unbuckling the seat belt  
1. To open the seat belt, hold the seat belt  
firmly.  
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips  
over your lap. The seat belt must not  
press on your stomach.  
2. Press the red button on the seat belt  
buckle.  
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp  
edges, or guide it or jam it in across  
hard or fragile objects.  
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat  
belt winder.  
–
–
Avoid thick clothing.  
Middle seat belt in the rear  
Buckling the seat belt  
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently up-  
ward around your upper body area.  
103  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
–
When the seat belt on the driver's side  
or on the passenger's side is not fas-  
tened.  
1. To fasten the middle seat belt in the  
rear, pull the belt tongues out of the  
mount in the roof.  
–
–
When the seat belt is unfastened while  
driving.  
2. Insert the lower buckle tongue into the  
belt lock, arrow 1.  
When objects are lying on a seat.  
3. Insert the upper buckle tongue into the  
seat belt buckle, arrow 2.  
Interaction Unit view  
The seat belt buckles must engage audi-  
bly.  
The indicator light on the Interaction Unit  
illuminates when drive-ready state is turned  
on and when the Seat Belt Warning is on.  
Unbuckling the seat belt  
1. To open the middle seat belt in the rear,  
hold the seat belt firmly.  
A Check Control message is displayed  
where applicable. Check whether the seat  
belt has been fastened correctly.  
2. Press the red button on the seat belt  
buckle.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Seat belt on the driver's seat  
is not buckled.  
3. Open the belt lock, arrow 2, with the  
buckle tongue, arrow 1.  
Seat belt on the passenger  
seat or another seat in the  
vehicle is not buckled.  
Seat belt is buckled on the  
corresponding seat.  
Seat belt is not buckled on  
the corresponding seat.  
4. Guide the seat belt to the mount in the  
roof.  
Rear Occupant Alert  
Principle  
At the end of the drive, the Rear Occupant  
Alert informs the driver that occupants may  
be present on the rear seats.  
Seat belt reminder  
Principle  
The Seat Belt Warning warns the driver if  
the seat belts are not fastened.  
General information  
General information  
The seat belt reminder becomes active in  
the following situations:  
If a door with access to the rear seat row is  
operated within 30 minutes before starting  
a drive, a notice appears on the control dis-  
play and a signal tone sounds at the end of  
the drive.  
104  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
If the drive is continued within 30 minutes,  
CONTROLS  
the notice is displayed again after the drive  
is complete.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when moving  
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the area of movement is  
clear when moving the head restraint.  
Activating/deactivating the Rear  
Occupant Alert  
To activate or deactivate the Rear Occupant  
Alert, proceed as follows:  
Warning  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Rear Occupant  
Alert".  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the  
protective effect in the head and neck  
area. There is a risk of injury.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
–
Do not use seat or head restraint cov-  
ers.  
–
Do not hang objects, for instance  
clothes hangers, directly on the head  
restraint.  
Front head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
–
–
Only use accessories that have been  
determined to be safe for attachment  
to a head restraint.  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head  
restraints can cause injuries in the head  
and neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
Do not use any accessories, for in-  
stance pillows, while driving.  
–
Before driving, install the removed  
head restraints on the occupied seats.  
Adjusting the height  
–
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
–
–
Adjust the distance so that the head  
restraint is as close as possible to the  
back of the head. Adjust the distance  
via the backrest tilt as needed.  
For manually adjustable head re-  
straints: After adjusting, make sure  
that the head restraint is correctly  
engaged.  
–
–
To raise the height of the head restraint,  
push the head restraint upward.  
To lower the height of the head re-  
straint, press the release button on the  
backrest, arrow 1, then push the head  
restraint downward.  
105  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
John Cooper Works sport seat:  
Adjusting the height  
The height of the head restraints cannot be  
set.  
Rear head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
Adjusting the distance  
The backrest tilt is used to set the distance  
between the head restraint and the back of  
the seat occupant's head.  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head  
restraints can cause injuries in the head  
and neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
–
Before driving, install the removed  
head restraints on the occupied seats.  
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head.  
–
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
Removing/attaching head  
restraints  
Only remove the head restraint if no one  
will be sitting in the seat in question.  
–
–
Adjust the distance so that the head  
restraint is as close as possible to the  
back of the head. Adjust the distance  
via the backrest tilt as needed.  
For manually adjustable head re-  
straints: After adjusting, make sure  
that the head restraint is correctly  
engaged.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when moving  
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the area of movement is  
clear when moving the head restraint.  
1. Raise the head restraint to the resist-  
ance point.  
2. Press the release button on the backrest,  
arrow 1, then pull the head restraint  
completely out.  
Warning  
Proceed in the reverse order to install the  
head restraint.  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the  
protective effect in the head and neck  
area. There is a risk of injury.  
John Cooper Works sport seat:  
Removing head restraints  
–
Do not use seat or head restraint cov-  
ers.  
–
Do not hang objects, for instance  
clothes hangers, directly on the head  
restraint.  
The head restraints cannot be removed.  
106  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Only use accessories that have been  
determined to be safe for attachment  
to a head restraint.  
CONTROLS  
–
–
Do not use any accessories, for in-  
stance pillows, while driving.  
Folding down the center head  
restraint  
–
–
To raise the head restraint, push the  
head restraint upward.  
Principle  
To improve the view to the rear, the center  
head restraint can be folded to the rear.  
Only push the head restraint down if no one  
will be sitting in the center seat.  
To lower the head restraint, press the  
release button on the backrest, arrow 1,  
then push the head restraint downward.  
Removing/attaching head  
restraints  
Folding the head restraint  
Only remove the head restraint if no one  
will be sitting in the seat in question.  
1. Fold down the corresponding rear seat  
backrest.  
To fold down the rear seat backrest, fol-  
low the steps for enlarging the cargo  
area.  
2. Raise the head restraint to the resist-  
ance point.  
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the head  
restraint back.  
3. Press both release buttons on the back-  
rest, arrow 1, simultaneously then pull  
the head restraint completely out.  
To return the head restraint to its initial  
position, fold the head restraint forward as  
far as it will go until it engages.  
Adjusting the height  
To improve the view of the rear, the rear  
head restraints can be lowered completely.  
Set seat to the lowest position only if no one  
will be sitting in the seat.  
Additional information:  
Enlarging the cargo area, refer to page 304.  
107  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Proceed in the reverse order to install the  
head restraint.  
Overview  
Exterior mirrors  
Principle  
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is  
more curved than the driver's side mirror.  
Exterior mirror settings are saved to the  
active MINI ID or driver profile. If the  
MINI ID or driver profile is reactivated  
later, the saved position is brought up auto-  
matically.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Fold the exterior mirror in and  
out.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driv-  
er's side exterior mirror also dims automat-  
ically. Photocells in the interior mirror are  
used to control this.  
Adjust the exterior mirrors.  
Select left exterior mirror, Auto-  
matic Curb Monitor.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, both ex-  
terior mirrors are heated automatically as  
necessary and when drive-ready state is on.  
Select right exterior mirror.  
General information  
The current exterior mirror adjustment can  
be stored using the memory function.  
Selecting the exterior mirror  
–
To select the left exterior mirror,  
press the corresponding button  
on the driver’s door. The LED il-  
Safety information  
luminates.  
Warning  
–
To select the right exterior mir-  
ror, press the corresponding but-  
ton on the driver’s door. The LED  
Objects in the mirror are closer than they  
appear. The distance to the road users be-  
hind could be incorrectly estimated, for  
instance while changing lanes. There is a  
risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Estimate the distance to the traffic  
behind by looking over your shoulder.  
illuminates.  
Adjusting the exterior mirrors  
On the driver's door, press the but-  
ton for adjusting the exterior mir-  
rors.  
The selected exterior mirror moves along  
with the button movement.  
108  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
and other low-lying obstacles when parking,  
for instance.  
Malfunction  
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust  
the exterior mirror by pressing on the edges  
of the mirror glass.  
Activating the Automatic Curb  
Monitor  
Folding in/folding out the exterior  
mirrors  
1.  
To activate the Automatic Curb  
Monitor, press the exterior mirror but-  
ton on the driver’s door. The LED illumi-  
nates.  
NOTICE  
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi-  
cle can be damaged in car washes. There is  
a risk of damage to property. Before wash-  
ing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the  
button.  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
When the trailer power socket is occupied  
or trailer towing is activated, the Automatic  
Curb Monitor is deactivated.  
Deactivating the Automatic Curb  
Monitor  
To fold the exterior mirrors in/out,  
press the button for folding the ex-  
terior mirrors in/out on the driver's  
door.  
To deactivate the Automatic Curb  
Monitor, press the exterior mirror  
button on the front passenger door.  
The LED illuminates and the LED of the  
driver’s side outside mirror goes out.  
Folding is possible up to a speed of approx.  
15 mph/20 km/h.  
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is  
helpful in the following situations:  
–
–
In car washes.  
Interior mirror, manually dim-  
mable  
On narrow roads.  
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are  
folded out automatically at a speed of ap-  
prox. 25 mph/40 km/h.  
Automatic dimming  
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is  
automatically dimmed. Photocells in the in-  
terior mirror are used to control this.  
Automatic Curb Monitor  
Principle  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the mir-  
ror glass on the front passenger's side is  
tilted downward when reverse gear is en-  
gaged. This improves your view of the curb  
To reduce blinding glare from the interior  
mirror, tilt the lever forward on the man-  
ually dimming interior mirror.  
109  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Manual steering wheel adjustment  
The position of the steering wheel can be  
changed by manually adjusting the height  
and longitudinal direction.  
Interior mirror, automatic  
dimming feature  
Principle  
The interior mirror is dimmed automati-  
cally.  
Photocells in the mirror glass and on the  
rear of the mirror are used to control glare.  
Overview  
1. On the steering column, press the re-  
lease lever all the way down.  
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands  
and move the steering wheel to the pre-  
ferred height and angle to suit your seat  
position.  
3. Fold the lever back up.  
Functional requirements  
To ensure that the auto dimming interior  
mirror works properly, note the following:  
Memory function  
–
–
Keep the photocells clean.  
Principle  
The following settings can be stored and,  
if necessary, retrieved using the memory  
function:  
Do not cover the area between the inte-  
rior mirror and the windshield.  
–
–
–
Seat position.  
Steering wheel  
Safety information  
Warning  
Exterior mirror adjustment.  
Depending on the equipment: height of  
the Head-up display.  
General information  
Steering wheel adjustments while driving  
can lead to unexpected steering wheel  
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or prop-  
erty damage. Adjust the steering wheel  
while the vehicle is stationary only.  
Two memory locations with different set-  
tings can be set for each driver profile.  
The settings for the lumbar support will not  
be stored.  
110  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Storing settings  
To save settings to memory using the but-  
tons, proceed as follows:  
Warning  
Using the memory function while driving  
can lead to unexpected seat or steering  
wheel movements. Vehicle control could  
be lost. There is a risk of accident, in-  
jury, or property damage. Only retrieve the  
memory function when the vehicle is sta-  
tionary.  
1. Set the desired position.  
2.  
Press the SET button on the seat.  
The LED illuminates.  
3. Press memory button 1 or 2 while the  
LED is illuminated. A successful save is  
indicated by a signal tone.  
To save settings to memory using the Inter-  
action Unit, proceed as follows:  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when mov-  
ing the seats. There is a risk of injury or  
risk of damage to property. Make sure that  
the travel path of the seat is clear prior to  
any adjustment.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Seat comfort".  
2. Select the desired seat.  
3. "Save seat position"  
Calling up settings  
To access settings saved to memory using  
the buttons, proceed as follows:  
Overview  
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.  
The stored position is called up.  
The procedure stops when a seat setting  
switch or one of the memory buttons is  
pressed again.  
The adjustment of the seat position on the  
driver's side is interrupted after a short time  
while driving.  
The memory buttons are located on the  
front seats.  
To access settings from memory using the  
Interaction Unit, proceed as follows:  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Seat comfort".  
2. Select the desired seat.  
3. Select the desired seat position.  
111  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Seat climate control  
Various climate control functions are availa-  
ble for the seats.  
Additional information:  
Climate control, refer to page 276.  
112  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Transporting children safely  
Transporting children safely  
Vehicle features and options  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
A hot vehicle may result in death to per-  
sons, especially children, or animals. There  
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do  
not leave people, especially children, or an-  
imals unattended in the vehicle.  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Warning  
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause  
child restraint systems and their compo-  
nents to become very hot. Persons may  
sustain burn injuries when touching the  
hot components. There is a risk of injury.  
Do not expose the child restraint system to  
direct sunlight or cover where necessary.  
If necessary, let the child restraint system  
cool down before transporting a child. Do  
not leave children unattended in the vehi-  
cle.  
The right place for children  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the ve-  
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and  
endanger themselves and traffic, for exam-  
ple, due to the following actions:  
–
–
–
Establishing standby.  
Children in the rear seat  
General information  
Accident research shows that the safest  
place for children is in the rear seat.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or  
windows.  
–
–
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Children younger than 13 years of age or  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be trans-  
ported in the rear seat in suitable child re-  
straint systems designed for the age, weight  
and size of the child. Children 13 years of  
age or older must wear a seat belt as soon  
as a suitable child restraint system can no  
longer be used due to their age, weight, or  
size.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the  
vehicle key with you when exiting and  
lock the vehicle.  
113  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
Safety information  
Warning  
Installing child restraint sys-  
tems  
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly  
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm with-  
out suitable additional child restraint sys-  
tems. The protective effect of safety gear,  
including seat belts, can be limited or lost  
when seat belts are fastened incorrectly.  
An incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause  
additional injuries, for instance in the  
event of an accident, braking or evasive  
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or  
danger to life. Secure children shorter than  
5 ft/150 cm using suitable child restraint  
systems.  
General information  
When selecting, installing, and using child  
restraint systems, pay close attention to the  
operating and safety instructions provided  
by the child restraint system manufacturer.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The protective effect of child restraint sys-  
tems and their fastening systems which  
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-  
dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot  
be properly restrained in the event of an  
accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Children on the front passenger  
seat  
Do not use child restraint systems which  
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-  
dent.  
General information  
When using a child restraint system on the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the  
front passenger airbag is deactivated.  
If attachment systems have been damaged  
or strained by an accident, have them  
checked and replaced by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbag, refer to page 169.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system  
is limited or compromised with incorrect  
seat setting or improper installation of the  
child seat. There is a risk of injury or  
danger to life. Make sure that the child  
restraint system fits securely against the  
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest  
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly  
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats  
and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust  
Active front passenger airbags can injure  
a child in a child restraint system when  
the airbags are deployed. There is a risk  
of injury. Make sure that the front pass-  
enger airbags are deactivated and that the  
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light  
illuminates.  
114  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
the height of the head restraints or remove  
them.  
If the upper attachment point of the seat  
belt is located in front of the seat belt guide  
of the child seat, move the front passenger  
seat carefully forward until the best possi-  
ble seat belt guide position is reached.  
Before installation  
Before installing child restraint systems, en-  
sure that the rear seat backrests are locked.  
Backrest width  
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing  
a child restraint system on the front pass-  
enger seat, open the backrest width com-  
pletely. Do not change the backrest width  
again and do not call up a memory position.  
Move the rear seats into the rearmost po-  
sition to facilitate installation of the child  
restraint system.  
On the front passenger seat  
Deactivating the airbag  
Child seat security  
Warning  
Active front passenger airbags can injure  
a child in a child restraint system when  
the airbags are deployed. There is a risk  
of injury. Make sure that the front pass-  
enger airbags are deactivated and that the  
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light  
illuminates.  
The seat belts in the rear and the front pass-  
enger seat belt can be permanently locked  
to fasten child restraint systems.  
After mounting a child restraint system on  
the front passenger seat, make sure that the  
front passenger airbag is deactivated.  
Additional information:  
Locking the seat belt  
Automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbag, refer to page 169.  
1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.  
2. Secure the child restraint system with  
the seat belt.  
Seat position and height  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled  
in, then pull it tight against the child re-  
straint system. The seat belt is disabled.  
After installing a child restraint system,  
move the front passenger seat as far back as  
it will go and, if possible, to the highest po-  
sition. This seat position and height ensure  
the best possible position for the belt and  
offers optimal protection in the event of an  
accident.  
Unlocking the seat belt  
1. Open the seat belt buckle.  
2. Remove the child restraint system.  
After mounting a universal child restraint  
system, adjust the backrest tilt so that the  
seat belt sits properly.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
completely.  
115  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
LATCH child restraint system  
Warning  
The mounts for the lower anchors and  
attachment points of the child restraint  
system are intended for attaching child re-  
straint systems only. If other objects are  
attached, the mounts or attachment points  
can be damaged. There is a risk of injury  
or risk of damage to property. Only attach  
child restraint systems at the correspond-  
ing mounts for the lower anchors or at-  
tachment points.  
Principle  
LATCH child restraint systems establish a  
secure connection to the vehicle in combi-  
nation with LATCH anchors.  
General information  
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-  
dren.  
When selecting, installing, and using  
LATCH child restraint systems, pay close at-  
tention to the operating and safety instruc-  
tions provided by the child restraint system  
manufacturer.  
Position  
Icon  
Meaning  
The corresponding icon  
shows the mounts for the  
lower LATCH anchors.  
Mounts for lower anchors  
General information  
Seats equipped with lower  
anchors are marked with a  
pair (2) of LATCH icons.  
The lower anchors may be used to attach  
the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com-  
bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg  
when the child is restrained by the internal  
harnesses.  
For vehicles equipped with  
a middle seat:  
It is not recommended to  
use the inner lower anchors  
of standard outer LATCH  
positions to fasten a child  
restraint system on the mid-  
dle seat. Use the vehicle  
seat belt instead for the  
middle seat.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the lower anchors on child restraint sys-  
tem are not engaged correctly, the child  
restraint system will not be able to pro-  
vide suitable protection. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Make sure that  
the lower anchors are correctly engaged  
and that the child restraint system fits se-  
curely against the backrest.  
Before attaching child restraint  
systems  
Before installing a child restraint system,  
pull the seat belt away from the child seat  
mountings.  
116  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that  
the rear seat backrests are locked.  
Installing child restraint systems  
To install the child restraint system in the  
vehicle, proceed as follows:  
1. Mount the child restraint system in ac-  
cordance with the instructions from the  
child seat manufacturer.  
Warning  
The mounts for the lower anchors and  
attachment points of the child restraint  
system are intended for attaching child re-  
straint systems only. If other objects are  
attached, the mounts or attachment points  
can be damaged. There is a risk of injury  
or risk of damage to property. Only attach  
child restraint systems at the correspond-  
ing mounts for the lower anchors or at-  
tachment points.  
2. Make sure that the child restraint sys-  
tem anchors engage correctly on both  
sides in the lower seat mounts.  
Child restraint systems with  
tether strap  
General information  
Attachment points for upper  
retaining strap  
When attaching child restraint systems to  
the upper attachment points, observe the  
specifications and the operating and safety  
information of the child restraint system  
manufacturer.  
Icon  
Meaning  
The respective icon shows  
the attachment point for the  
upper retaining strap. Seats  
with an upper top tether are  
marked with this icon. It  
is located on the rear seat  
backrest, the rear shelf or  
the rear seat.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly  
used for the child restraint system, the  
protective effect is reduced. There is a risk  
of injury. Ensure that the upper retaining  
strap is guided to the upper attachment  
point without twisting and not over sharp  
edges.  
Warning  
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the  
protective effect of the child restraint sys-  
tem is limited or nonexistant. In certain  
situations, for instance braking maneuvers  
or in case of an accident, the rear seat  
backrest can fold forward. There is a risk  
117  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
Routing the retaining strap  
Rear seat  
Locking the doors and win-  
dows in the rear  
Principle  
To prevent the rear doors and windows  
from being opened from the inside, there  
is a switch on the corresponding rear door  
frame as well as a safety switch on the driv-  
er’s door armrest.  
General information  
In certain situations it may be advisable to  
secure the rear doors and windows, for in-  
stance when transporting children.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Driving direction  
Head restraint  
Hook for upper retaining strap  
Attachment point  
Seat backrest  
Doors  
Upper retaining strap  
Attaching the upper retaining strap  
to the attachment point  
Rear seat  
To attach the upper strap to the attachment  
point, proceed as follows:  
To secure the rear doors, release/lock the  
safety switch on the rear door using the  
integrated key.  
1. Raise the head restraint as needed.  
2. Guide the upper strap between or along  
both sides of the head restraint mounts  
to the attachment point.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Child safety lock.  
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it be-  
tween the backrest and the cargo cover.  
4. Attach the strap's hook to the attach-  
ment point.  
Apply the child safety lock.  
5. Tighten the strap.  
The door can now be opened from the out-  
side only.  
After locking, make sure that the door can-  
not be opened from the inside.  
118  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety switch for the rear  
The safety switch for the rear is lo-  
cated on the driver's door.  
Various functions are locked and  
cannot be operated in the rear such as the  
power windows.  
To lock rear functions, press the  
safety switch in the driver’s door.  
The LED is illuminated when the  
safety function is turned on.  
Various functions are locked and cannot be  
operated in the rear such as the power win-  
dows.  
119  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
Driving  
–
–
Drive-ready state, refer to page 41.  
Standby state, refer to page 41.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Driving off  
1. To turn drive-ready state on and drive  
off, turn the Start/Stop switch while also  
pressing the brake pedal.  
Additional information:  
2. Apply gear position.  
3. Driving off.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
When stopping  
Start/Stop switch  
Selector lever position D, S, L, or R  
Principle  
The Start/Stop switch can be used to turn  
vehicle operating states on/off.  
On inclines, the system prevents rolling  
back against the set driving direction and  
provides drive-off support.  
Driving off  
Overview  
To drive off after stopping while drive-ready  
state is on, press the accelerator pedal.  
The parking brake is released automatically.  
Depending on the load and driving situation  
or when a trailer is used, the vehicle may  
roll back slightly.  
Auto Start/Stop function  
The Start/Stop switch is labeled EN-  
GINE and located on the switch clus-  
ter.  
Principle  
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save  
fuel. The system switches off the engine  
during a stop, for instance in traffic jam or  
at traffic lights. Drive-ready state remains  
on even if the engine stops. The engine  
starts automatically for driving off.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
Drive-ready state turns on when the Start/  
Stop switch is pushed while depressing the  
brake pedal. Pressing the Start/Stop switch  
again turns drive-ready state back off, and  
turns standby back on.  
The Auto Start/Stop function switches to  
standby whenever the engine is started us-  
ing the Start/Stop button.  
Additional information:  
120  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The function is activated at low speeds.  
Engine stop  
–
–
In case of a steep downhill grade.  
The brake pedal was not depressed hard  
enough.  
–
When the ambient temperature is  
high and automatic climate control is  
switched on.  
Functional requirements  
The engine is switched off automatically  
when stopping under the following condi-  
tions:  
–
–
The vehicle interior has not yet been  
heated or cooled as desired.  
–
Selector lever is in selector lever posi-  
tion D.  
When window condensation is possi-  
ble and automatic climate control is  
switched on.  
–
The brake pedal remains depressed  
while the vehicle is at a standstill, or the  
vehicle is held by Automatic Hold.  
–
Engine or other parts are not at operat-  
ing temperature.  
–
The driver's seat belt is buckled, or the  
driver's door is closed.  
–
–
Engine cooling is required.  
Without Mild Hybrid technology: The  
wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer-  
ing wheel is being turned.  
Manual engine stop  
If the engine was not switched off automati-  
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine  
can be switched off manually:  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.  
At higher elevations.  
Hood is unlocked.  
–
Depress the brake pedal forcefully again  
from the current pedal position.  
For stop-and-go traffic.  
Selector lever position is S, L, or R.  
After reversing.  
–
Engage selector lever position P.  
When all functional preconditions are fulfil-  
led, the engine switches off.  
Starting the engine  
Automatic climate control with engine  
switched off  
Functional requirements  
The air flow from the air conditioning sys-  
tem is reduced when the engine is switched  
off.  
The engine starts automatically under the  
following preconditions:  
–
–
By releasing the brake pedal.  
When Automatic Hold is activated: step  
on the accelerator pedal.  
Interaction Unit view  
The READY indicator on the  
Interaction Unit shows that  
the Auto Start/Stop function  
is ready to start the engine au-  
tomatically.  
Driving off with the Auto Start/Stop  
function  
To drive off, accelerate normally after start-  
ing the engine.  
Functional limitations  
The engine is not switched off automatically  
in the following situations:  
121  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
If this function is deactivated while the en-  
gine is being stopped automatically, the en-  
gine will start.  
Safety mode  
After the engine switches off automatically,  
it will not start again automatically if any  
one of the following conditions are met:  
Via the selector lever position or  
driving mode  
The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated  
by the following:  
–
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled, or  
the driver's door is open.  
–
The hood has been unlocked.  
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied  
length of time.  
–
When Go Kart Mode is selected using  
the MINI Modes switch.  
The engine can only be started using the  
Start/Stop switch.  
–
When the selector lever is used to select  
either LOW mode L or sport program S.  
This setting option depends on vehicle  
equipment.  
System limits  
Even if driving off was not intended, the  
deactivated engine starts up automatically  
in the following situations:  
Depending on vehicle equipment: Via  
Interaction Unit  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Auto  
Start/Stop function can be deactivated on  
the Interaction Unit.  
–
–
–
With excessive warming of the interior  
when cooling is turned on.  
With excessive cooling of the interior  
when heating is turned on.  
1. To do so, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Drivetrain and chassis" /  
"Activate Auto Start/Stop".  
When window condensation is possi-  
ble and automatic climate control is  
switched on.  
–
Without mild hybrid technology:  
In case of a steering operation.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
–
–
–
When changing the selector lever posi-  
tion from D or P to R.  
Switching off the vehicle during an  
automatic engine stop  
If the engine stops automatically, the vehi-  
cle can be parked safely, for example to  
leave it.  
If the vehicle battery is deeply dis-  
charged.  
When starting an oil level measurement.  
1. Turn the Start/Stop switch.  
Deactivating Auto Start/Stop  
manually  
–
–
–
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
Standby state is switched on.  
Principle  
Selector lever position P is engaged  
automatically.  
In certain driving situations, e.g., traffic  
jams, it may be helpful to deactivate Auto  
Start/Stop manually. The engine will then  
no longer switch off automatically.  
2. Set the parking brake.  
Automatic deactivation  
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop  
function is deactivated automatically for  
122  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
safety reasons, for instance if no driver is  
detected.  
The vehicle drives off slowly when the  
brake pedal is released.  
R reverse gear  
Malfunction  
To reverse, engage selector lever position R.  
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle  
is stationary.  
Auto Start/Stop no longer switches off the  
combustion engine automatically in the  
event of a malfunction. A Check Control  
message appears on the Interaction Unit.  
You may continue driving. Have the vehicle  
checked by an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
The vehicle drives off slowly when the  
brake pedal is released.  
N Neutral  
To push the vehicle or have it coast with-  
out using the drive system, engage selector  
lever position N, e.g., in car washes.  
Steptronic transmission  
Parking brake P  
Principle  
The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle's  
automatic transmission. Shift paddles allow  
you to shift manually as necessary.  
General information  
In position P, the drive is blocked by the  
transmission, e.g., to park the vehicle.  
Only press parking brake button P when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Safety information  
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure to  
engage the parking brake. Otherwise, the  
vehicle may begin to move.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move  
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Be-  
fore leaving your vehicle, secure it against  
rolling away, e.g., by applying the parking  
brake.  
P is engaged automatically  
The transmission lock engages automati-  
cally in situations like the following:  
–
After drive-ready state is turned off, if  
selector lever position R, M, or D/S is  
engaged.  
Selector lever positions  
Display  
The engaged selector lever position is  
shown on the Interaction Unit and next to  
the selector lever, e.g., P.  
–
–
After standby state is switched off, if  
selector lever position N is engaged.  
If the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and  
the driver's door is opened while the  
vehicle is stationary and selector lever  
position R, M, or D/S is engaged.  
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure to  
engage the parking brake. Otherwise, the  
vehicle may begin to move.  
Gear position D  
In selector lever position D, all gears for  
forward travel are shifted automatically.  
Additional information:  
123  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
Parking brake, refer to page 131.  
Without shift paddles: To switch be-  
tween selector lever position D and L,  
tap the selector lever toward D/L.  
Engaging selector lever positions  
General information  
To prevent the vehicle from moving when  
a gear is engaged or when reversing, press  
and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle  
drives off.  
Functional requirements  
To engage a selector lever position, the  
following functional requirements must be  
met:  
Engaging selector lever position P  
Only push the parking brake button when  
the vehicle is stationary.  
–
To switch from selector lever position P  
to another selector lever position, drive-  
ready state must be on and the brake  
pedal must be pressed.  
–
Selection lever position P cannot be dis-  
engaged until all technical prerequisites  
are met.  
Engaging a selector lever position  
To engage selector lever positions, proceed  
as follows:  
To engage selector lever position  
P and the parking brake, press the  
parking brake button on the switch  
cluster.  
1. Fasten the driver’s seat belt.  
2. Push the selector lever in the desired di-  
rection, past the resistance point if nec-  
essary. The selector lever automatically  
returns to the center position when re-  
leased.  
The parking brake is applied and the trans-  
mission lock is engaged.  
With shift paddles: To switch between  
selector lever position D and S, tap the  
selector lever toward D/S.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
General information  
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed  
to roll without its own drive for a short  
distance, for instance in a car wash or to be  
pushed.  
124  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Engaging selector lever position N  
NOTICE  
Without shift paddles: LOW mode  
Principle  
LOW mode is recommended when the en-  
gine braking effect needs to be increased,  
for instance on steep downhill gradients.  
Selector lever position P is automatically  
engaged when standby state is switched  
off. The wheels are blocked. There is a risk  
of damage to property. Do not switch off  
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast,  
e.g., in a car wash.  
General information  
In LOW mode, the transmission contin-  
ues shifting automatically, but generally  
in lower gears than in selector lever posi-  
tion D.  
To engage selector lever position N, proceed  
as follows:  
LOW mode can therefore also be used to  
accelerate faster.  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Switch on drive-ready state.  
3. Engage selector lever position N.  
4. Switch off drive-ready state.  
Enabling LOW mode  
To activate LOW mode, tap the selector  
lever from selector lever position D to D/L.  
In this way, standby state remains  
switched on, and a Check Control mes-  
sage is displayed.  
The transmission's LOW mode is enabled.  
Exiting LOW mode  
The vehicle can roll.  
To activate LOW mode, pull the selector  
lever to D/L.  
The parking brake is engaged automatically  
after approx. 35 minutes.  
D is shown on the Interaction Unit.  
With shift paddles: S program  
Principle  
If the system is not operational, you may  
not be able to change the selector lever po-  
sition.  
If necessary, release the transmission lock  
electronically.  
The shifting points and shifting times in  
the Sport program are designed for sport-  
ier handling. The transmission, for instance  
shifts up later and the shifting times are  
shorter.  
Additional information:  
Electronic unlocking of the transmission  
lock, refer to page 126.  
Kickdown  
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driv-  
ing performance.  
Activating the Sport program  
To activate the Sport program, tap the selec-  
tor lever toward selector lever position D/S.  
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the  
resistance point at the full throttle position.  
The sport program of the transmission is  
activated.  
125  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
Ending the Sport program  
To stop the Sport program, tap the selector  
lever toward selector lever position D/S.  
General information  
Shifting  
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and  
road speeds.  
The engaged selector lever position is  
shown on the Interaction Unit.  
Even in manual mode, the transmis-  
sion shifts automatically in certain situa-  
tions, e.g., when speed limits are reached.  
Electronic unlocking of the  
transmission lock  
Temporary manual mode  
General information  
In selector lever position D, pulling a shift  
paddle switches into manual mode tempora-  
rily.  
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-  
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of  
a hazardous area in the event of a malfunc-  
tion.  
In manual mode, if the vehicle is driven  
with a restrained style for a certain period  
of time, does not accelerate, and is not  
shifted with the shift paddles, the transmis-  
sion switches back to automatic mode.  
Before unlocking the transmission lock, se-  
cure the vehicle against rolling away, for  
instance with a wheel chock.  
Engaging selector lever position N  
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:  
To engage selector lever position N, proceed  
as follows:  
–
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until  
D is shown on the Interaction Unit.  
–
In addition to the pulled right shift pad-  
dle, pull the left shift paddle.  
1. Quickly turn the Start/Stop switch three  
times without pressing the brake.  
2. Depress the brake pedal.  
Continuous manual mode  
In Sport program S, pulling a shift paddle  
switches to manual mode M.  
3. Within 30 seconds, press the selector  
lever to position N until position N ap-  
pears on the selector lever.  
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
–
–
–
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until  
S is shown on the Interaction Unit.  
4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazard-  
ous area and secure it against rolling  
away.  
In addition to pulling the right shift pad-  
dle, tap the left shift paddle.  
Pull the selector lever to D/S.  
When M2 is set manually while the vehicle  
is stationary, the transmission will no lon-  
ger shift back to M1. This shift behavior is  
maintained until M1 is engaged manually or  
manual mode M is exited.  
Shift paddles  
Principle  
The shift paddles on the steering wheel are  
used to change gears manually.  
126  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Shifting  
Launch Control  
Principle  
Under dry ambient conditions, Launch Con-  
trol ensures optimal acceleration on roads  
with good traction.  
General information  
Using Launch Control causes premature  
component wear since this function repre-  
sents a very heavy load for the vehicle.  
–
–
To upshift, pull the right shift paddle.  
To downshift, pull the left shift paddle.  
Do not turn the steering wheel when driv-  
ing off with Launch Control.  
The selected gear is shown briefly on the  
Interaction Unit, then the current gear is  
shown again.  
Do not use Launch Control when breaking  
in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Advanced mode  
Break-in, refer to page 308.  
General information  
Functional requirement  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Step-  
tronic transmission offers an advanced  
mode with adapted shift characteristics.  
Launch Control can be used when the en-  
gine is at operating temperature. The en-  
gine is at operating temperature after an  
uninterrupted trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.  
–
Automatic downshift to lowest possible  
gear.  
Driving off with Launch Control  
To drive off with Launch Control, proceed  
as follows:  
If the left shift paddle is pulled and  
held, the Steptronic transmission auto-  
matically shifts down to the lowest pos-  
sible gear.  
1. Switch on drive-ready state.  
2. Activate Go Kart Mode.  
–
–
Avoid automatic upshifting in manual  
mode.  
In manual mode, the Steptronic trans-  
mission does not shift up automatically  
when speed limits are reached.  
3. Enable the driving dynamics setting:  
"SPORT PLUS".  
4. With the left foot, press down forcefully  
on the brake.  
There is no downshifting for kickdown.  
5. Engage forward gear.  
Enabling advanced mode  
Advanced mode activates in situations like  
the following:  
6. Press the accelerator pedal all the way  
down and hold.  
Launch Control information is shown on  
the Interaction Unit.  
–
–
Transmission in manual mode.  
"SPORT PLUS": Settings under Drive in  
Go Kart Mode in MINI Modes.  
7. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait  
briefly until the engine speed is con-  
127  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
stant. Keep the accelerator pedal in this  
position.  
Overview  
8. Release the brake within a few seconds  
of the Launch Control information illu-  
minating.  
The vehicle accelerates.  
Upshifting is performed automatically.  
Launch Control stays on as long as the  
Launch Control information is displayed  
and the accelerator pedal is not released.  
The shift paddles are located on the steering  
wheel.  
Repeated use during a trip  
After Launch Control has been used, the  
transmission must cool down for a short  
time before Launch Control can be used  
again. Launch Control adjusts to the sur-  
rounding conditions when used again.  
Using the function  
1. To activate the Sport Boost function,  
pull and hold the left shift paddle.  
–
–
The function is active.  
A countdown is shown on the Inter-  
action Unit.  
After using Launch Control  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dy-  
namic Stability Control as soon as possible.  
2. Before the countdown has finished, de-  
press the accelerator pedal.  
System limits  
–
The vehicle accelerates.  
An experienced driver may be able to ach-  
ieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF  
without Launch Control mode.  
Sport Boost function  
Principle  
The SPORT BOOST function can be used for  
upcoming acceleration, for example.  
BOOST is shown on the Interaction Unit.  
This function is operated with the shift pad-  
dles on the steering wheel.  
The countdown can be restarted, for exam-  
ple if the function cannot be used immedi-  
ately.  
The system prepares the vehicle.  
To restart the countdown, pull and hold the  
left shift paddle again until the countdown  
is reset.  
128  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The MINI Modes switch is located  
on the switch cluster and labeled EX-  
PERIENCE.  
Stopping the function  
The function is automatically interrupted if  
the countdown has finished or if the func-  
tion was used in the acceleration process.  
Display  
Deactivating the function  
The selected mode is shown by specific col-  
ors and indicators on the Interaction Unit  
and Head-up display, depending on vehicle  
equipment.  
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until the  
BOOST indicator disappears.  
MINI Modes in detail  
General information  
MINI Modes are used to adjust vehicle han-  
dling. They are also referred to as driving  
modes.  
MINI Modes  
Principle  
MINI Modes are used to adjust vehicle han-  
dling and customize the overall experience  
in the interior.  
Various MINI Experience Modes can be  
used, depending on vehicle equipment.  
The various modes are used to adapt the  
vehicle to the respective situation.  
Core Mode  
Core Mode is a drive mode that provides for  
comfort-related settings.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
systems are affected, for instance:  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Drive system.  
Go Kart Mode  
Go Kart Mode is a driving mode that pro-  
vides increased vehicle agility.  
Steering.  
Suspension.  
Display on the Interaction Unit.  
Comfort functions in vehicle interior.  
MINI Sound.  
Individual settings, e.g., for driving dynam-  
ics, chassis, and drive system, can be con-  
figured as needed.  
"SPORT PLUS": Under Driving Dynamics,  
this setting deactivates Dynamic Stability  
Control, thus limiting driving stability.  
Lighting effects in vehicle interior.  
Overview  
Additional information:  
–
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 209.  
–
Setting for increased driving dynamics,  
refer to page 211.  
Green Mode  
Green Mode is a drive mode that provides  
consumption-optimized tuning and antici-  
129  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
patory display. The interior lighting is also  
reduced here, for example.  
Configuring modes  
Some modes can be configured individually.  
To configure the desired mode, proceed as  
follows:  
MINI Experience Modes in detail  
In addition to MINI Modes, there are also  
MINI Experience Modes. MINI Experience  
Modes are not used to adjust vehicle han-  
dling, but rather to customize the lighting  
effects in the interior, for example.  
1.  
2.  
Press the MINI Modes button on  
the switch cluster.  
Tap the Settings icon on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
–
Balance Mode  
3. Select the desired settings.  
Balance Mode is a driving mode that en-  
sures a pleasant ambiance and a relaxed  
drive.  
Changing the start mode  
–
Personal Mode  
Some modes can be set as the start mode.  
The set start mode activates when drive-  
ready state is turned on.  
Personal Mode is a mode that offers spe-  
cial customization options. A personal-  
ized background image, for example, can  
be chosen for the Interaction Unit.  
To configured the desired start mode, pro-  
ceed as follows:  
–
–
Timeless Mode  
Timeless Mode is used when driving  
with the MINI retro design.  
1.  
2.  
Press the MINI Modes button on  
the switch cluster.  
Tap the Settings icon on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
Vivid Mode  
Vivid Mode is a mode that ensures a  
vibrant audio experience and impressive  
ambient lighting effects in the vehicle  
interior.  
3. Select the desired start mode.  
Experience View  
–
Trail Mode  
When a mode is activated, specific views  
are displayed on the Interaction Unit. These  
specific views can be unselected in the set-  
tings as follows:  
Trail Mode is a mode that provides spe-  
cial views for driving off-road.  
Additional information:  
Driving on poor roads, refer to page 313.  
1.  
2.  
Press the MINI Modes button on  
the switch cluster.  
Tap the Settings icon on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
Selecting a mode  
To select the desired mode, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
3. "Experience View"  
1.  
Press the MINI Modes button on  
the switch cluster.  
4. Select the desired setting.  
2. Select the desired mode by pressing the  
switch again.  
130  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the  
vehicle key with you when exiting and  
lock the vehicle.  
Parking brake  
Principle  
The parking brake is used to prevent the  
vehicle from rolling away when it is parked.  
Overview  
Safety information  
Button in the vehicle  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move  
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Be-  
fore leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle  
against rolling away.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-  
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-  
lowing:  
–
–
Set the parking brake.  
The parking brake button is located  
on the switch cluster.  
On uphill grades or on downhill  
slopes, turn the front wheels in the  
direction of the curb.  
Setting the parking brake  
With a stationary vehicle  
–
On uphill grades or on downhill  
slopes, also secure the vehicle, for in-  
stance with a wheel chock.  
To engage the parking brake, press  
the parking brake button on the  
switch cluster.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the ve-  
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and  
endanger themselves and traffic, for exam-  
ple, due to the following actions:  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
The indicator light on the Interaction  
Unit illuminates red.  
–
–
–
Establishing standby.  
The parking brake is engaged and  
transmission lock is engaged.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or  
windows.  
While driving  
Using the parking brake while driving  
serves as emergency braking.  
–
–
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
To brake the vehicle, press and hold  
the parking brake button on the  
131  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
switch cluster. The vehicle brakes hard for  
as long as the button is pressed.  
Releasing the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is released automatically  
when you drive off.  
The indicator light on the Interaction  
Unit illuminates red, a signal sounds,  
and the brake lights illuminate.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Malfunction  
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions,  
secure the vehicle so that it does not roll  
away before you exit.  
The parking brake is engaged and the trans-  
mission lock is set when the vehicle is sta-  
tionary.  
A Check Control message appears on the  
Interaction Unit.  
Engaging the parking brake  
automatically  
In some situations, the parking brake is  
engaged automatically, e.g., through Auto-  
matic Hold.  
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for  
instance with a wheel chock, after getting  
out of the vehicle.  
Additionally, the system can be set to auto-  
matically engaging the parking brake when  
the drive-ready state is turned off.  
After a power interruption  
To reestablish parking brake operability af-  
ter a power interruption, an initialization  
may be required.  
To do so, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Drivetrain and chassis" / "Apply  
automatically".  
1. Turn on standby state.  
In selector lever position N, the parking  
brake will not be engaged automatically.  
2.  
3.  
Press the parking brake button.  
Press the parking brake button  
Releasing the parking brake  
again after 2 seconds.  
The Check Control messages for the  
parking brake go out.  
Releasing the parking brake manually  
Follow these steps to manually release the  
parking brake:  
Possible function-related noises are nor-  
mal.  
1. Switch on drive-ready state.  
The red indicator light shows that  
the parking brake is ready again.  
2.  
On the switch cluster, press the  
parking brake button with the brake  
applied or selector lever position P en-  
gaged.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
The parking brake is released.  
132  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
–
–
Set the parking brake.  
Automatic Hold  
On uphill grades or on downhill  
slopes, turn the front wheels in the  
direction of the curb.  
Principle  
Automatic Hold assists the driver by auto-  
matically setting and releasing the brake  
such as when moving in stop-and-go traffic.  
–
On uphill grades or on downhill  
slopes, also secure the vehicle, for in-  
stance with a wheel chock.  
When a gear position is engaged, the vehi-  
cle is automatically held in place when it is  
stationary.  
Warning  
On uphill grades the system prevents the  
vehicle from rolling back when driving off.  
Unattended children or animals in the ve-  
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and  
endanger themselves and traffic, for exam-  
ple, due to the following actions:  
General information  
The parking brake is applied automatically  
by Automatic Hold under the following sit-  
uations:  
–
–
–
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or  
windows.  
–
–
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
The driver’s door is open for more than  
one second and no pedal is pressed dur-  
ing this time.  
–
–
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or prop-  
erty damage. Do not leave children or ani-  
mals unattended in the vehicle. Take the  
vehicle key with you when exiting and  
lock the vehicle.  
–
The moving vehicle is brought to a  
standstill using the parking brake.  
In selector lever position N, Automatic Hold  
is temporarily deactivated.  
There are two ways to activate and deacti-  
vate Automatic Hold:  
Activating Automatic Hold via the  
menu  
–
–
Via the Interaction Unit.  
Using the brake pedal.  
To activate Automatic Hold via the menu,  
proceed as follows:  
Safety information  
1. Drive-ready state is on and the vehicle  
is stationary.  
Warning  
2. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Drivetrain and chassis".  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move  
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Be-  
fore leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle  
against rolling away.  
3. Select “Automatic Hold”.  
When driving, the gray indicator  
light indicates that Automatic Hold  
is ready.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-  
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-  
lowing:  
133  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
When stationary, the indicator light  
illuminates green to indicate that  
Automatic Hold is on.  
vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold or  
if the vehicle is exited.  
The indicator light changes from  
green to red.  
Activating Automatic Hold using  
the brake pedal  
To activate Automatic Hold using the brake  
pedal, the vehicle must be at a standstill.  
Proceed as follows to activate:  
The parking brake is not set automatically if  
the drive-ready state was switched off while  
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is  
temporarily deactivated in this case.  
Deactivating Automatic Hold via  
the menu  
1. To activate/deactivate Automatic Hold,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Drivetrain and chassis".  
1. Switch on drive-ready state.  
2. Depress the brake pedal until some re-  
sistance is perceptible. Then depress the  
brake pedal firmly.  
As soon as Automatic Hold turns  
on, the indicator light illuminates  
green and a Check Control message  
appears.  
2. Select “Automatic Hold”.  
The indicator light goes out.  
Automatic Hold is switched off.  
When driving, the indicator light  
changes from green to gray to show  
that Automatic Hold is ready.  
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic  
Hold, also press on the brake pedal when  
switching off.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s  
door is closed.  
Deactivating Automatic Hold using  
the brake pedal  
To deactivate Automatic Hold using the  
brake pedal, the vehicle must be at a stand-  
still:  
After stopping, the vehicle is au-  
tomatically secured against rolling  
away as soon as the indicator light  
illuminates green.  
1. Depress the brake pedal until some re-  
sistance is perceptible.  
2. Then depress the brake pedal firmly.  
Driving off  
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.  
The indicator light goes out and a Check  
Control message appears.  
The brake is released automatically and the  
indicator light of the parking brake is no  
longer illuminated.  
Automatic Hold is deactivated.  
Automatic Hold in the driver  
profile  
The current status of Automatic Hold is  
saved to the driver profile currently being  
used. If the driver profile is changed, the  
saved settings are applied. If the driver pro-  
Automatic parking brake  
application  
The parking brake is automatically set if  
drive-ready state is switched off while the  
134  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driving  
CONTROLS  
file is changed while drive-ready state is on,  
Automatic Hold can only be activated.  
Automatic Hold is only deactivated when  
drive-ready state is turned off.  
135  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
Displays  
–
–
–
–
–
Configured interval for displaying trip  
data.  
Vehicle features and options  
Average fuel consumption depending  
on the configured interval.  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Travel time depending on the config-  
ured interval.  
Distance traveled depending on the  
configured interval.  
Additional information:  
Distance traveled in Coasting mode.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Current consumption  
Trip data  
The current fuel consumption display al-  
lows you to check the current fuel consump-  
tion, e.g., to drive economically and in an  
environmentally-friendly manner.  
Principle  
The trip data display provides various in-  
formation about the trip, e.g., average con-  
sumption or trip distance.  
Average consumption  
The average fuel consumption is displayed  
depending on how the interval for display-  
ing trip data is configured.  
The values can be displayed and reset de-  
pending on different intervals.  
Viewing trip data  
The Interaction Unit can be used to view  
the trip data. There are several ways to view  
trip data:  
Adjusting the display of the trip  
data  
The intervals for displaying trip data can be  
configured.  
–
–
–
Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Trip data".  
1. To go to the Trip Data menu: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Trip data".  
Tap the range value on the Interaction  
Unit.  
2. Tap the interval button.  
3. Select the desired setting:  
On the Interaction Unit, tap the odome-  
ter reading in the speedometer.  
–
"for this trip": the values are auto-  
matically reset approx. four hours af-  
ter the vehicle has come to a stand-  
still.  
Additional information:  
Speedometer, refer to page 145.  
Display  
The following trip data is displayed:  
–
"since last refuel": the values are au-  
tomatically reset after refueling with  
a larger quantity of fuel.  
136  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
–
–
"since factory": the values since the  
time of the factory delivery are dis-  
played.  
Safety information  
Warning  
"since Individual": the values since  
the last manual reset are displayed.  
The values can be reset at any time.  
When extending and retracting the projec-  
tion screen of the Head-up display, body  
parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in-  
jury. Make sure that the area of movement  
of the projection screen is clear when ex-  
tending and retracting.  
Resetting average values manually  
The average trip data values can be reset  
manually. The following interval is activated  
and the average values are reset: "since  
Individual".  
NOTICE  
Via the Interaction Unit:  
The Head-up display consists of sensitive  
components that can easily be scraped or  
damaged. There is a risk of damage to  
property. Do not place any objects on the  
Head-up display, attach to system compo-  
nents or plug into the system. Do not move  
the moving parts manually.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Trip data".  
2.  
Tap the button for resetting trip  
data.  
MINI Head-up display  
Overview  
Principle  
The Head-up display projects important in-  
formation in the driver's field of view, for  
instance the speed. Information can be re-  
corded without you having to look away  
from the road.  
The Head-up display can be configured as  
necessary, e.g., adjust the brightness.  
The Head-up display is switched on.  
General information  
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-  
up display in the Vehicle Care chapter.  
Displayable information  
The following information is displayed on  
the Head-up display:  
Additional information:  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 389.  
–
–
–
–
Speed.  
Navigation instructions.  
Check Control messages.  
Shift lights.  
137  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
–
Depending on vehicle equipment: Sport  
Boost function.  
–
–
Wet road.  
Unfavorable light conditions.  
–
–
Lists and messages.  
The driver assistance systems.  
Check Control  
Some of this information is only displayed  
briefly as needed.  
Principle  
The Check Control system monitors func-  
tions in the vehicle and notifies you of  
faults in the monitored systems.  
Turning the Head-up display on/off  
When switching on, the projection screen  
of the Head-up display is extended. When  
switching off, the projection screen of the  
Head-up display is retracted again.  
A Check Control message, combining indi-  
cator lights or warning lights and text, ap-  
pears on the Interaction Unit and Head-up  
display, where applicable. In addition, an  
acoustic signal may sound.  
To turn the Head-up display on/off, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Displays" / "Head-up display" /  
"Head-up display".  
Some Check Control messages are hidden  
automatically after approx. 20 seconds, but  
they will be stored. Stored Check Control  
messages can be displayed on the Interac-  
tion Unit. Urgent Check Control messages  
are permanently displayed but may be hid-  
den temporarily.  
Settings  
Individual settings can be entered for the  
Head-up display such as for the height,  
brightness or illustration. You can also set  
up specific views on the Head-up display  
separately, e.g., for Driver Assistance infor-  
mation.  
Hiding Check Control messages  
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-  
sages can be hidden temporarily. These  
messages are automatically displayed again  
after approx. 8 seconds.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Displays" / "Head-up  
display".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
The close icon next to the Check Control  
message indicates whether the Check Con-  
trol message can be hidden.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the height  
of the Head-up display can be stored using  
the memory function.  
Displaying stored Check Control  
messages  
Saved Check Control messages and addi-  
tional information such as the cause of a  
fault or the required action can be called up  
via Check Control.  
Visibility of the display  
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up  
display is influenced by the following fac-  
tors:  
–
–
Seat position.  
Dust or dirt on the projection screen of  
the Head-up display.  
–
Sunglasses with certain polarization fil-  
ters.  
138  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the Check Control message,  
further help can be selected.  
Red lights  
Seat belt reminder  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Vehicle status" /  
"Check Control".  
The seat belt on the driver's seat is  
not engaged.  
Additional information:  
2. Select the desired text message.  
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 104.  
Display  
A Check Control message, consisting of text  
and an icon, is displayed. Additional instruc-  
tions can be viewed by tapping on the text.  
Airbag system  
Warning light illuminates briefly: In-  
dicates that the entire airbag system  
and seat belt tensioners are opera-  
tional when drive-ready state is switched  
on.  
If several faults occur at once, the messages  
are displayed consecutively.  
Certain messages displayed while driving  
are displayed again after drive-ready state is  
switched off.  
Warning light does not illuminate or illumi-  
nates continuously: The airbag system or  
seat belt tensioners may not be operational.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Icons next to the menu bar indicate  
whether a Check Control message is  
active or saved.  
Additional information:  
Airbags, refer to page 167.  
Parking brake  
The parking brake is set.  
Additional information:  
Parking brake, refer to page 131.  
Indicator lights and warning lights  
Principle  
Brake system  
The indicator lights and warning lights  
show the status of some vehicle functions  
or indicate when there is a fault in moni-  
tored systems.  
The brake pads are worn or there is  
another issue with the brake system.  
The braking assistance may not be  
operational. A higher pedal force  
may be required for the braking  
process.  
Indicator lights and warning lights can illu-  
minate in a variety of combinations and col-  
ors.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Some indicator lights are checked for  
proper functioning and illuminate tempora-  
rily when drive-ready state is turned on.  
139  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
Emergency Stop Assistant  
Warning function in rear-end collision sit-  
uations, refer to page 176.  
The Emergency Stop Assistant is  
triggered.  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the right  
Additional information:  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to  
page 198.  
The warning light illuminates: risk  
of collision with a vehicle crossing  
from the right detected. Increased  
awareness is required.  
Risk of collision  
The warning light illuminates or  
flashes in conjunction with an acous-  
tic signal if there is a risk of immi-  
nent collision.  
The warning light flashes and a signal  
sounds: risk of imminent collision with a  
crossing vehicle detected. Immediately ini-  
tiate braking or an evasive maneuver.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to  
page 173.  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 180.  
Pedestrian Warning  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the left  
The warning light illuminates: risk of  
collision with a person, e.g., a pedes-  
trian or a cyclist detected. Increased  
awareness is required.  
The warning light illuminates: risk  
of collision with a vehicle crossing  
from the left detected. Increased  
awareness is required.  
The warning light flashes and a signal  
sounds: risk of imminent collision with a  
person, e.g., a pedestrian or a cyclist de-  
tected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
The warning light flashes and a signal  
sounds: risk of imminent collision with a  
crossing vehicle detected. Immediately ini-  
tiate braking or an evasive maneuver.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Warning function for pedestrians, refer to  
page 179.  
Warning function at intersections, refer to  
page 180.  
Forward Collision Warning  
Distance control  
The warning light illuminates: risk  
of collision, e.g., with a vehicle de-  
tected. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
Warning light flashes and acoustic  
signal sounds: Brake and evade as  
necessary.  
Additional information:  
The warning light flashes and a signal  
sounds: risk of imminent collision with a ve-  
hicle detected. Immediately initiate braking  
or an evasive maneuver.  
Distance Control, refer to page 221.  
Additional information:  
140  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Warning light flashes and signal  
The system may not be operational.  
The Antilock Braking System is not  
available.  
sounds: The system is switched off  
or will be interrupted very soon.  
The ability to steer may be restricted during  
full braking.  
Warning light illuminates and signal  
sounds: The driver is not looking at the  
surrounding traffic. System interruption is  
imminent. The system reduces the speed to  
a standstill if applicable. It is possible that  
the system will not execute any supporting  
steering movements.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 209.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 227.  
Warning light illuminates and acous-  
tic signal sounds: A system interrup-  
tion is imminent.  
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not on  
steering wheel  
Warning light flashes: A lane boundary has  
been crossed.  
Warning light illuminates and acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
Additional information:  
The hands are not on the steering  
wheel or, depending on the vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market version, the driv-  
er's line of sight is not directed at the  
surrounding traffic. System interruption is  
imminent.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 227.  
Assisted Driving Mode: Hands are not on  
steering wheel  
Steering wheel icon illuminates yel-  
low: Do not grip the steering wheel  
with your hands. The system is still  
active.  
The system reduces the speed to a standstill  
if applicable.  
It is possible that the system will not exe-  
cute any supporting steering movements.  
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.  
Additional information:  
Immediately grasp the steering wheel with  
your hands and pay attention to the sur-  
rounding traffic.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 227.  
Additional information:  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 227.  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control is regulating the driv-  
ing and brake power. The vehicle is  
stabilized. Reduce the vehicle speed and  
adjust your driving style to the road condi-  
tions.  
Yellow lights  
Antilock Braking System  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control has malfunctioned or is initializ-  
141  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
ing. Driving stabilization is restricted or has Tire pressure monitor  
failed.  
Warning light illuminates: Tire Pres-  
If the warning light illuminates continu-  
ously, have the vehicle checked immedi-  
ately by an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
sure Monitor is indicating a flat tire  
or tire pressure loss. Follow the in-  
formation in the Check Control message.  
Warning light flashes then illuminates con-  
tinuously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses  
cannot be detected.  
Additional information:  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 209.  
–
–
–
–
Fault caused by systems or devices with  
the same radio frequency: after leaving  
the area of the interference, the system  
automatically becomes active again.  
Dynamic Stability Control deactivated, or  
increased driving dynamics activated  
In the case of tires with special appro-  
val: the tire pressure monitor was un-  
able to complete the reset. Reset the  
system again.  
Dynamic Stability Control is deacti-  
vated or enhanced driving dynamics  
is activated.  
Wheel without wheel electronics instal-  
led: Have it checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified serv-  
ice center or repair shop as needed.  
Additional information:  
–
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 209.  
–
Setting for increased driving dynamics,  
refer to page 211.  
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked  
by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Drive-off support  
Drive-off support is activated.  
Additional information:  
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 345.  
Additional information:  
Drive-off support, refer to page 212.  
Steering system  
The steering system may not be op-  
erational.  
Flat tire monitor  
Warning light illuminates: Flat Tire  
Monitor is indicating a flat tire or  
tire pressure loss.  
Have the vehicle checked by an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.  
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-  
vers.  
Exhaust emissions  
Additional information:  
–
The warning light illuminates:  
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 352.  
The exhaust gas quality is declin-  
ing, e.g., because the fuel filler  
cap is fitted incorrectly. Have the  
142  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
vehicle checked as soon as possi-  
ble.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
Low-beam headlights are on and Au-  
tomatic High Beam Assistant is ena-  
bled.  
–
The warning light flashes under certain  
circumstances:  
This indicates that there is excessive  
misfiring in the engine.  
The high-beam headlights are turned on and  
off automatically depending on the traffic.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the  
vehicle checked immediately; otherwise,  
serious engine misfiring within a brief  
period can seriously damage emission  
control components, in particular the  
catalytic converter.  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 154.  
Lane departure warning  
Additional information:  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version:  
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer  
to page 371.  
Indicator light flashes: System is per-  
forming a steering intervention.  
Additional information:  
Green lights  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 184.  
Turn signal  
The turn signal is turned on.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
If the indicator light is flashing un-  
usually fast, this indicates that a turn  
signal bulb has failed.  
After stopping, the vehicle is au-  
tomatically secured against rolling  
away as soon as the indicator light  
illuminates green.  
Additional information:  
Turn signal, refer to page 153.  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 133.  
Parking lights  
Cruise Control  
The parking lights are turned on.  
Additional information:  
The system is active.  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 157.  
Additional information:  
Cruise control, refer to page 218.  
Low-beam headlights  
Distance control  
The low-beam headlights are turned  
on.  
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle  
has been detected ahead of you. The  
vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle  
has been detected ahead of you.  
Additional information:  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights, refer to  
page 157.  
Indicator light flashes: Preceding vehicle  
has driven off.  
Additional information:  
143  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
Distance Control, refer to page 221.  
Blue lights  
High-beam headlights  
Speed Limit Assistant  
High-beam headlights have been  
turned on.  
The detected speed limit can be ap-  
plied with the SET button. As soon  
as the speed limit has been applied, a  
green checkmark is displayed.  
Additional information:  
High-beam headlights, refer to page 153.  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 236.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
High-beam headlights have been  
turned on by the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
The system supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 154.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 227.  
Gray lights  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in  
progress  
Seat belt reminder  
Arrow icon for lane change green:  
the system carries out a lane change.  
Seat belt on the passenger seat or  
another seat in the vehicle is not  
buckled.  
Additional information:  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 232.  
Additional information:  
Seat belts, refer to page 102.  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change not  
possible  
Distance control  
Gray line for lane boundary on corre-  
sponding side: System has detected  
a lane change request. Lane change  
not currently possible.  
Indicator light flashes: The require-  
ments to operate the system have  
not been met. The system was de-  
activated but applies the brakes until you  
actively resume control by pressing on the  
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.  
Additional information:  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 232.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
Distance Control, refer to page 221.  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold on standby  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 233.  
When driving, the indicator light  
shows that Automatic Hold is ready.  
Additional information:  
144  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 133.  
Overview  
Assisted Driving Mode  
The system is on standby and does  
not manipulate steering movements.  
System activates automatically as  
soon as all function conditions are fulfilled.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 227.  
1
Tachometerꢀꢁ146  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
Power gaugeꢀꢁ145  
Vehicle speed  
The system is interrupted and will  
activate automatically as soon as all  
functional requirements are met.  
2
3
4
5
Odometer readingꢀꢁ136  
Engine temperatureꢀꢁ147  
Fuel gaugeꢀꢁ149  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 233.  
Displaying the speedometer  
To display the speedometer, tap the speed  
value at the top of the Interaction Unit.  
White lights  
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
No Distance Control because acceler-  
ator pedal is being pressed.  
Power gauge  
Additional information:  
Principle  
Distance Control, refer to page 221.  
The power gauge indicates the currently  
drawn drive power as a percentage.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
Enabling/disabling the power  
gauge  
The system can be activated.  
Additional information:  
The power gauge or tachometer is dis-  
played, depending on the drive mode se-  
lected.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 233.  
Speedometer  
Principle  
The speedometer provides detailed driving  
information next to the speed, e.g., mileage.  
145  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
Display  
Tachometer  
General information  
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field.  
In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to  
protect the engine.  
Activating/deactivating the  
tachometer  
The tachometer or power gauge is displayed  
depending on the drive mode selected.  
Needle near arrow 1: indicator for energy  
recovery, e.g., while decelerating.  
Needle near arrow 2: Drive power in per-  
cent.  
Reduced rotational speed range  
The available rotational speed range may  
be reduced due certain factors such as a  
cold drive system. The tachometer display  
is automatically adjusted depending on the  
available rotational speed range.  
Reduced drive power  
The available drive power may be reduced  
due to certain factors. The power gauge is  
automatically adjusted accordingly.  
In addition, the icons on the power gauge  
and tachometer indicate reduced drive  
power.  
Standby state and drive-ready  
state  
Icon  
Description  
If OFF appears on the Interac-  
tion Unit, drive-ready state is  
turned off and standby state is  
turned on.  
Blue icon: cold drivetrain.  
White icon: increased drive  
system temperature, for in-  
stance due to sustained or  
high power demand when  
driving on mountain roads.  
If READY appears on the In-  
teraction Unit, the Auto Start/  
Stop function is ready to start  
the engine automatically.  
Depending on vehicle  
equipment and national-  
market version:  
Drive power restriction de-  
termined by MINI Digital  
Key.  
Additional information:  
–
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to  
page 39.  
System-related functional  
limitation.  
–
Auto Start/Stop function, refer to  
page 120.  
A Check Control message is  
displayed in addition where  
applicable.  
146  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Engine temperature  
Selection lists  
Principle  
Principle  
The engine temperature is displayed on the  
speedometer.  
The Interaction Unit or Head-up display  
provide lists of certain functions, which can  
be operated as necessary:  
Additional information:  
–
–
–
–
Entertainment source.  
Current audio source.  
List of recent calls.  
Shortcuts list.  
Speedometer, refer to page 145.  
Coolant, refer to page 367.  
Display  
If necessary, the corresponding menu will  
open.  
Displaying and using the list  
The selection lists can be displayed and op-  
erated using the operating elements on the  
steering wheel.  
Operating Function  
elements  
–
If the engine is cold, the needle is in  
the blue temperature range, close to  
the limit position of the temperature dis-  
play.  
Change the entertainment  
source.  
Pressing the button again  
will close the currently dis-  
played list.  
Drive at moderate RPM and vehicle  
speeds.  
–
–
At normal operating temperature, the  
needle is in the middle or in the left half  
of the temperature display.  
Show list of most recent tele-  
phone calls.  
Displaying the list of short-  
cuts.  
If the engine is hot, the needle is in  
the red temperature range. In addition, a  
Check Control message is displayed.  
Turn the knurled wheel: dis-  
play the list for currently se-  
lected entertainment source  
or scroll up or down in the  
list.  
Indicator light  
A red indicator light is displayed.  
Tilt knurled wheel in corre-  
sponding direction: Move se-  
lection to left or right.  
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
147  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
Additional information:  
3. Turn the knurled wheel to select a radio  
station.  
Shortcuts, refer to page 46.  
4. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the  
selected radio station.  
Display  
Gear shift indicator  
Principle  
The shift point indicator recommends the  
gear that best suits the current driving sit-  
uation. Using the optimal gear supports an  
efficient driving style.  
Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources,  
are shown on the Head-up display and Inter-  
action Unit.  
General information  
The gear shift indicator is active in manual  
mode M depending on vehicle equipment  
and national-market version.  
Example: changing the entertainment  
source  
Displays  
Information on upshifting/downshifting or  
the engaged gear is displayed on the Inter-  
action Unit.  
1.  
To select an entertainment  
source, press the entertainment source  
button on the right of the steering  
wheel.  
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator,  
the engaged gear is displayed.  
Example Description  
2.  
To select an entertainment  
source, turn the knurled wheel.  
In continuous manual mode M:  
Optimal gear is engaged.  
3. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the  
selected entertainment source.  
With shift paddles: temporary  
manual mode.  
Example: selecting a radio station  
With shift paddles: Sport pro-  
gram.  
1.  
To select a radio station, press  
the entertainment source button on the  
right of the steering wheel.  
Shift information.  
2.  
To switch to the radio stations  
list, tilt the knurled wheel to the right.  
Additional information:  
Shift paddles, refer to page 126.  
148  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
With a low remaining range, a Check Con-  
trol message is briefly displayed. A low re-  
maining range means that engine functions  
cannot always be ensured for sporty driv-  
ing, e.g., when cornering at speed.  
Shift lights  
Principle  
Shift lights are temporarily displayed on the  
Head-up display and indicate the correct  
time to upshift in order to achieve rapid  
acceleration.  
The Check Control message appears con-  
tinuously below a range of approx.  
30 miles/50 km.  
Functional requirement  
Manual mode M must be activated for the  
shift lights to appear.  
Safety information  
NOTICE  
With a range below 30 miles/50 km,  
the engine may no longer have sufficient  
fuel. Engine functions are not ensured  
anymore. There is a risk of damage to  
property. Refuel promptly.  
Display  
Display  
The current range is displayed  
as a numerical value next to  
the fuel gauge.  
Successive fields illuminating yellow indi-  
cate an upcoming shift point.  
–
–
Shift before the red lights illuminate.  
When the maximum rotational speed is  
reached, the entire display flashes red  
and the fuel supply is interrupted in or-  
der to protect the engine.  
Fuel gauge  
Principle  
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-  
played.  
Range  
General information  
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to  
vary.  
Principle  
The range indicates the distance that can  
still be covered with the current tank of  
fuel.  
Additional information:  
Refueling, refer to page 328.  
General information  
The estimated range with remaining fuel is  
displayed on the Interaction Unit.  
149  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
Display  
Overview  
Icon  
Description  
"Flat Tire Monitor": Status  
of the flat tire monitor, refer  
to page 352.  
"Tire Pressure Monitor": sta-  
tus of the Tire Pressure  
Monitor, refer to page 345.  
"Engine oil level": electronic  
oil measurement, refer to  
page 365.  
Under the fuel gauge, an arrow next to the  
fuel pump symbol indicates which side of  
the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.  
"Check Control": displaying  
stored Check Control mes-  
sages, refer to page 138.  
The current range is displayed as numerical  
value.  
"Service": display of the  
service notifications, refer  
to page 152.  
Indicator light  
The yellow indicator light illumi-  
nates, once the fuel reserve is  
reached.  
Assisted View  
Vehicle status  
Principle  
With Assisted View, information on driver  
assistance systems can be shown with the  
help of a vehicle animation.  
General information  
The status can be displayed and actions  
performed for several systems such as for  
Check Control.  
Safety information  
Displaying vehicle status  
To display the vehicle status, go through the  
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Vehicle status".  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
150  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Displays  
CONTROLS  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Display  
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃  
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance  
on bridges or shady sections of the road.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or prop-  
erty damage. Modify your driving style  
to the weather conditions at low tempera-  
tures.  
Date and time  
An example of active Driver Assistance:  
Indicator lights and warning lights for Dis-  
tance Control and Assisted Driving Mode  
are displayed. At the same time, the Dis-  
tance Control is animated in Assisted View.  
Various settings can be configured for dis-  
playing the date and time.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, the time zone can  
be set manually or automatically. Automatic  
time zone adjustment automatically updates  
the time, date, and time zone as necessary.  
Assisted View can also be activated  
for the Head-up display via Settings.  
The date is set automatically based on the  
time zone.  
System limits  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Time".  
Only objects that are detected by the sys-  
tem are taken into account.  
Additional information:  
2. Select the desired settings.  
–
–
Cameras, refer to page 34.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 35.  
Setting the units of measure-  
ment  
Outside temperature  
Depending on the national-market version,  
you can set the units of measurement for  
some values, for instance consumption, dis-  
tances, and temperature.  
General information  
If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or  
lower, a signal sounds.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Units".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
151  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
Service  
Principle  
The service notifications indicate recom-  
mended maintenance work.  
General information  
After switching on the vehicle, the Interac-  
tion Unit briefly shows the next service ap-  
pointment or the distance remaining until  
the next required maintenance.  
A service advisor can read out the mainte-  
nance work from the vehicle key.  
Display  
More detailed information can be displayed.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Vehicle status" /  
"Service".  
Maintenance measures as well as legally  
mandated inspections are displayed.  
2. Select the desired entry to bring up  
more information.  
Entering appointment dates  
The dates for mandatory vehicle inspections  
can be entered.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time  
are set correctly.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Vehicle status" /  
"Service" / "Vehicle inspection".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
152  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
Flashing  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
To flash the turn signal, push the turn signal  
lever up or down past the resistance point.  
Turn signal  
One-touch signaling  
Principle  
For one-touch signaling: Lightly tap the  
turn signal lever up or down.  
The turn signal indicates the change in your  
direction of travel. To indicate a turn, the  
following functions can be used:  
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-  
justed.  
–
–
–
Flashing.  
One-touch signaling.  
Brief flashing.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
or "Settings" / "One-touch turn signal".  
Turn signal in exterior mirror  
2. Select the desired setting.  
To ensure that the turn signal lamps on the  
exterior mirror are clearly visible, do not  
fold in the exterior mirrors while driving  
and while using the turn signals or hazard  
warning system.  
Brief flashing  
To flash the turn signal briefly: Push the  
turn signal lever to the resistance point and  
hold it there for as long as you wish to  
indicate a turn.  
High-beam headlights, head-  
light flasher  
Principle  
The high-beam headlights illuminate the  
road, also at great distances. The headlight  
flasher is used to emit a brief light signal  
153  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
by actuating the high-beam headlights. The  
high-beam headlights can be switched on  
and off manually at any time.  
vate or activate the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant, e.g., after turning your high-beam  
headlights on/off manually.  
High-beam headlights, turning  
headlight flasher on/off  
General information  
In the low speed range, the high-beam head-  
lights are not switched on by the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
to the Automatic High Beam Assistant:  
–
The automatic lights function is acti-  
vated.  
–
The low-beam headlights are turned on.  
To turn on the high-beam headlights, push  
the turn signal lever forward, arrow 1. The  
high-beam headlights illuminate when the  
low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Activating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant can be  
activated using the Interaction Unit.  
To turn off the high-beam headlights or op-  
erate the headlight flasher, pull the turn sig-  
nal lever backward, arrow 2.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Headlights".  
The blue indicator light on the In-  
teraction Unit illuminates when the  
high-beam headlights or headlight  
flasher are turned on.  
2. Tap the Automatic High Beam Assistant  
button.  
The headlights are automatically changed  
between low-beam headlights and high-  
beam headlights.  
Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant  
The green indicator light on the In-  
teraction Unit illuminates when the  
low-beam headlights are turned on.  
Principle  
The blue indicator light on the In-  
teraction Unit illuminates when the  
system turns on the high-beam head-  
lights.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant  
promptly detects other road users as well  
as the ambient lighting, e.g., in towns, and  
automatically switches the high-beam head-  
lights on or off depending on the traffic sit-  
uation.  
If the Automatic High Beam Assistant is on  
and you continue driving after an interrup-  
tion, the Automatic High Beam Assistant  
will remain on.  
It may be necessary to activate the Auto-  
matic High Beam Assistant via the Interac-  
tion Unit before it can be used. You can use  
the turn signal lever to temporarily deacti-  
154  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is  
deactivated when manually switching the  
high-beam headlights on and off.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If adjustments have been made or the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traf-  
fic may be momentarily blinded. There is  
a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. If adjustments have been made and  
the sensitivity has been modified, make  
sure that oncoming traffic is not momen-  
tarily blinded. Switch off the high-beam  
headlights manually if required.  
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam As-  
sistant, press the turn signal lever up, ar-  
row 1.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
when adjusting the sensitivity of the Auto-  
matic High Beam Assistant:  
Deactivating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
–
Adjustment is possible only while your  
vehicle is stationary.  
–
–
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The light is switched off.  
Increasing sensitivity  
To increase the sensitivity of the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant, push the turn signal  
lever forward for approx. 10 seconds.  
A Check Control message is displayed. The  
system responds more sensitively.  
Press the turn signal lever forward, arrow 1,  
or pull the turn signal lever backward when  
the high-beam headlights are on, arrow 2.  
Resetting the sensitivity  
When the Automatic High Beam Assistant  
is deactivated via the Interaction Unit, the  
high-beam headlights cannot be operated  
using the turn signal lever.  
To reset the sensitivity of the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant, push the turn signal  
lever forward again for approx. 10 seconds  
or switch off drive-ready state.  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.  
Sensitivity of the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant  
System limits  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant can-  
not replace the driver's personal judgment  
of when to use the high-beam headlights.  
General information  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant can be adjusted.  
155  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
Therefore, when appropriate, turn off the  
high-beam headlights manually.  
Overview  
Buttons in the vehicle  
The system may not be fully operational  
in the following situations, and driver inter-  
vention may be necessary:  
–
In very unfavorable weather conditions  
such as fog or heavy precipitation.  
–
When detecting poorly-lit road users  
such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback  
riders and wagons; when driving close  
to train or ship traffic; or at animal  
crossings.  
–
In tight curves, on hilltops or in de-  
pressions, in crossing traffic or half-ob-  
scured oncoming traffic on highways.  
The exterior lighting switch and buttons are  
located on the turn signal lever, to the left  
of the steering wheel.  
–
–
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the  
presence of highly reflective signs.  
Icon  
Function  
When the windshield in the area in  
front of the interior mirror is fogged up,  
dirty or covered with stickers, etc.  
Exterior lighting menu.  
Low-beam headlights.  
Automatic headlight control.  
Exterior lighting off.  
Exterior lighting  
Principle  
The exterior lighting comprises all lighting  
elements on the outside of the vehicle. The  
exterior lighting, or individual functions of  
it, can be operated using the buttons in the  
vehicle or on the vehicle key, or via the  
Interactive Unit.  
Functions via the Interaction Unit  
Icon  
Function  
If the driver's door is opened when the  
drive-ready state is switched off, the exte-  
rior lighting is automatically switched off  
after a period of time.  
Automatic headlight control.  
Low-beam headlights.  
Exterior lighting off.  
156  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Activate automatic headlight  
control  
Icon  
Function  
Automatic High Beam Assistant.  
To activate the automatic lights, turn  
the outer switch on the turn signal  
lever downward.  
Parking lights.  
The LED under the automatic lights icon  
illuminates.  
Left roadside parking light.  
Right roadside parking light.  
The green indicator light on the In-  
teraction Unit illuminates when the  
low-beam headlights are turned on.  
System limits  
The automatic headlight control cannot re-  
place your personal judgment of lighting  
conditions.  
Buttons on the vehicle key  
Icon  
Function  
For example, the sensors are unable to de-  
tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa-  
tions, turn the lights on manually.  
Interior lighting.  
Parts of the exterior lighting.  
Pathway lighting.  
Low-beam headlights, parking  
light, and roadside parking  
light  
Driving lights automatic  
Principle  
Principle  
The low-beam headlights are used to illu-  
minate the road without dazzling oncom-  
ing traffic. The parking lights and roadside  
parking lights are used to illuminate the ve-  
hicle when stationary. These functions can  
be operated using the buttons in the vehicle  
or via the Interaction Unit.  
The automatic lights function switches the  
low-beam headlights on or off automatically  
depending on the ambient brightness, e.g.,  
in tunnels, at dusk, or with precipitation.  
General information  
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon  
can cause the lights to be turned on.  
Low-beam headlights  
The automatic lights function is deactivated  
if you turn on the low-beam headlights man-  
ually.  
Turning on low-beam headlights  
To turn on the low-beam headlights,  
turn the outer switch on the turn  
signal lever upward.  
157  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
The low-beam headlights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
Turning off parking lights  
The following options are available to turn  
off the parking lights:  
The green indicator light on the In-  
teraction Unit illuminates when the  
low-beam headlights are turned on.  
–
–
–
Press the OFF button on the turn  
signal lever.  
To turn on the low-beam headlights even  
when standby state is switched on, turn  
the outer switch on the turn signal lever  
upward again.  
Turn off the light via the Interaction  
Unit.  
Switch on drive-ready state.  
When drive-ready state is turned on, the  
automatic driving lights activate.  
Turning off low-beam headlights  
Depending on the national-market version,  
the low-beam headlights can be turned off  
in the low speed range:  
Roadside parking lights  
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided  
roadside parking light can be switched on.  
–
–
Press the OFF button on the turn  
signal lever.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Parking lights".  
Turn off the light via the Interaction  
Unit.  
2. Tap the roadside parking light button for  
the desired side of the vehicle.  
Parking lights  
General information  
The parking lights can only be turned on at  
low speeds.  
Welcome lights  
Principle  
Turning on parking lights  
The welcome light turns on automatically  
for a limited period of time when approach-  
ing or unlocking the vehicle.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Parking lights".  
Depending on the equipment, the exterior  
lighting of the vehicle can be set individu-  
ally.  
2. Tap the parking light button.  
The green indicator light on the In-  
teraction Unit illuminates when the  
parking light is turned on.  
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.  
Do not use the parking lights for extended  
periods; otherwise, they might drain the ve-  
hicle battery and it would then be impossi-  
ble to switch on drive-ready state.  
158  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
–
–
After switching off the drive-ready  
state, briefly push the turn signal lever  
forward.  
Activating/deactivating welcome  
light  
The welcome light can be activated or deac-  
tivated.  
On the vehicle key, press and  
hold the panic alarm button for ap-  
prox. 1 second.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Settings".  
2. Select the desired setting, depending on  
vehicle equipment:  
Setting the duration  
You can configure the duration of pathway  
lighting.  
–
"Welcome and goodbye"  
When unlocking the vehicle, individ-  
ual lighting functions are turned on.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Settings" / "Pathway lighting".  
Turning on the welcome light  
You can turn on the welcome light as fol-  
lows:  
2. Select the desired setting.  
–
–
Automatic activation when approaching.  
Activation when unlocking vehicle.  
Daytime driving lights  
Principle  
–
With the vehicle locked, press  
The daytime driving lights are used to en-  
sure that the vehicle is more visible, e.g.,  
in areas with sharply changing light condi-  
tions.  
the lock button on the vehicle key.  
Depending on the settings, the interior  
lighting and parts of the exterior light-  
ing will be turned on.  
The daytime driving lights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
The function is not available for the first  
10 seconds after locking.  
Activating/deactivating daytime  
driving lights  
In some countries, daytime driving lights  
are mandatory, so it may not be possible  
to deactivate the daytime driving lights in  
front.  
Pathway lighting  
Principle  
For the pathway lighting, the exterior light-  
ing that illuminates the vehicle's surround-  
ings turns on for a certain period of time  
after leaving the vehicle.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Settings".  
2. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-  
tional-market version, select the desired  
setting:  
Switching pathway lighting on  
You can turn on the pathway lighting as  
follows:  
–
–
"Daytime driving lights"  
"Rear daytime driving lights"  
159  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
Adaptive lighting functions  
Adaptive headlight range con-  
trol  
Principle  
The Adaptive Headlight Range Control com-  
pensates for vehicle acceleration, braking,  
and load conditions to prevent your head-  
lights from dazzling oncoming traffic.  
The adaptive lighting functions provide dy-  
namic illumination of the road.  
The adaptive lighting functions may consist  
of one system or multiple systems, depend-  
ing on the equipment version:  
–
Cornering light.  
Automatic lights mode  
Activating the adaptive lighting  
functions  
Principle  
With automatic lights mode, the appearance  
of the front and rear lights can be custom-  
ized via the Interaction Unit.  
To activate the adaptive lighting  
functions, turn the outer switch on  
the turn signal lever downward.  
Selecting automatic lights mode  
The LED on the turn signal lever illumi-  
nates.  
1. To select automatic lights mode, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Exterior lighting" /  
"Settings" / "Driving light mode".  
The adaptive lighting functions are active  
when the drive-ready state is switched on.  
2. Select the desired mode.  
Cornering light  
In tight curves, for instance on mountain-  
ous roads or when turning, an additional  
cornering light is switched on that illumi-  
nates the inside of the curve when the vehi-  
cle is moving below a certain speed.  
Instrument lighting  
Principle  
The instrument lighting illuminates  
switches and buttons with the individually  
set brightness.  
The cornering light is automatically  
switched on depending on the steering-  
wheel angle or, where applicable, the use  
of turn signals. When driving in reverse,  
the cornering lights may be automatically  
switched on regardless of the steering-  
wheel angle.  
The brightness of the instrument lighting  
can only be adjusted in darkness and when  
the parking lights or low-beam headlights  
are turned on.  
160  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Press the interior light button in the  
headliner.  
Setting the brightness  
The brightness of the instrument lighting  
can be adjusted.  
To turn off the interior light permanently,  
press and hold the button for approx. 3 sec-  
onds.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Cockpit brightness".  
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle  
can be switched on and off independently.  
The button is located in the rear headliner.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
The interior lights can be turned on/off us-  
ing the Interaction Unit.  
Interior lighting  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Reading light".  
Principle  
The interior lighting comprises all lighting  
elements inside the vehicle. Depending on  
vehicle equipment, the interior lights, foot-  
well lights, entry lights, and ambient lights  
are controlled automatically.  
2.  
Select the interior lights icon.  
Turning reading lights on/off  
The reading lights can be turned on/off us-  
ing the button in the headliner.  
Overview  
In the headliner, press the desired  
reading light button.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
reading lights are located next to the inte-  
rior lights in the front and rear.  
The reading lights can also be turned on/off  
using the Interaction Unit.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Reading light".  
The interior lighting menu button is  
located in the headliner.  
2.  
Select the icon for the desired seat  
reading light.  
The buttons for reading lights are  
located in the headliner.  
The brightness of the reading lights can be  
adjusted when they are turned on.  
The interior light button is located in  
the headliner.  
Turning interior lights on/off  
The interior lights can be turned on/off us-  
ing the button in the headliner.  
161  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
Changing settings  
Selecting the color  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the  
brightness can be individually adjusted for  
specific seats.  
You can choose the color of the ambient  
light in Personal Mode.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Reading light".  
1.  
2.  
On the switch cluster, select  
Personal Mode using the MINI Modes  
switch.  
2. Tap the desired seat.  
Tap the Settings icon on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
3. Select the desired settings.  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Ambient light  
Setting the brightness  
The brightness of the ambient light can be  
adjusted.  
Principle  
The ambient light comprises several light  
elements that provide diffuse light in the  
vehicle interior. Depending on the vehicle  
equipment, the Interaction Unit can be used  
to adjust the lighting level for some lights.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Ambient lighting".  
2. "Background light" or "Light projection"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Activating/deactivating ambient  
light  
The light graphic is turned off in Green  
Mode.  
To activate/deactivate the ambient light, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" / "Ambient  
lighting" / "Ambient lighting".  
Dynamic light  
With Dynamic Light, certain things, e.g.,  
obstacles detected when opening doors, are  
indicated by light effects. If the ambient  
light is disabled, the light effects are still  
displayed.  
Turning ambient light on/off  
The ambient light is switched on when the  
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when  
the vehicle is locked.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" /  
"Ambient lighting" / "Lighting effects".  
If the ambient light was disabled using the  
Interaction Unit, it will not turn on when  
the vehicle is unlocked.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Reduced lighting when driving at  
night  
Some lights of the interior lighting are re-  
duced when the vehicle is driven in the  
dark.  
To activate/deactivate this function, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
162  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
"Vehicle" / "Interior lighting" / "Ambient  
lighting" / "Reduced for night driving".  
Turning on window wiper system  
Window wiper system  
Principle  
The wiper system makes sure that you have  
a clear view, e.g., in the rain. It is operated  
using the wiper lever on the steering wheel.  
To turn on the wiper system, push the wiper  
lever upward to the desired position.  
Safety information  
Position  
Function  
Warning  
Position 0.  
Position 1.  
Position 2.  
Position 3.  
Rest position of wipers.  
Rain sensor mode.  
Normal wiper speed.  
Fast wiper speed.  
If the wipers start moving in the folded  
away state, body parts can be jammed or  
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Make sure that the vehicle  
is switched off when the wipers are in  
the folded-away state and the wipers are  
folded in when switching on.  
When you continue driving after stopping  
with the window wiper system on, the wip-  
ers will operate at the previous setting.  
Turning off the window wiper  
system and flick wipe  
NOTICE  
The wiper blades can wear out or become  
damaged prematurely when wiping on a  
dry window for a longer period of time.  
The wiper motor can overheat. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Do not use the  
wipers when the window is dry.  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching  
on. There is a risk of damage to property.  
Defrost the windshield prior to switching  
the wipers on.  
To turn off the wipers or to activate flick  
wiping, proceed as follows:  
–
To turn off: Push the wiper lever down-  
ward, arrow 1, until position 0 is  
reached.  
–
To flick wipe: Push the wiper lever  
downward from position 0, arrow 1, and  
163  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
push the wiper lever forward to position  
0 or position 1, arrow 2.  
Deactivating rain sensor  
To deactivate the rain sensor: Push the  
wiper lever back to position 0.  
The wiper lever returns to its initial po-  
sition when released.  
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity  
Rain sensor  
Principle  
The rain sensor automatically controls the  
wiper operation depending on the intensity  
of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the  
windshield, directly in front of the interior  
mirror.  
Safety information  
To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor,  
turn the knurled wheel on the wiper lever  
as follows:  
NOTICE  
–
To set the rain sensor sensitivity to  
high, turn the knurled wheel up.  
If the rain sensor is activated, the wip-  
ers can accidentally start moving in car  
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in car  
washes.  
–
To set the rain sensor sensitivity to low,  
turn the knurled wheel down.  
Window washer system  
Safety information  
Activating rain sensor  
Warning  
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-  
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the  
view. There is a risk of accident. Only  
use the window washer system when the  
washer fluid will not freeze. Use washer  
fluid with antifreeze, if needed.  
To activate the rain sensor: Push the wiper  
lever upward from position 0, arrow 1, once.  
NOTICE  
Wiping operation is started.  
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,  
the washer pump cannot work as intended.  
There is a risk of damage to property.  
Do not use the washer system when the  
washer fluid reservoir is empty.  
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.  
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may  
not start.  
164  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Cleaning the windshield  
Switch posi- Function  
tion  
Position 0.  
Position 1.  
Rest position of the wiper.  
Intermittent operation.  
When reverse gear is  
engaged, the system  
switches to continuous op-  
eration.  
Clean the rear window  
To clean the rear window, turn the outer  
switch on the wiper lever as follows:  
To clean the windshield, pull the wiper lever  
back.  
The washer fluid is sprayed on the wind-  
shield, and the wipers are turned on briefly.  
–
In rest position: Turn the switch down-  
ward, arrow 3. The switch returns to its  
rest position when released.  
Windshield washer nozzles  
–
In intermittent operation: Turn the  
switch further, arrow 2. The switch au-  
tomatically returns to its interval posi-  
tion when released.  
The windshield washer nozzles are auto-  
matically heated while standby state is  
switched on.  
The function is deactivated if the washer  
fluid reservoir fill level is low.  
Rear wiper  
Switching on the rear wiper  
Fold-out position of the wipers  
Principle  
In the fold-out position, the wipers can  
be folded out from the windshield, which  
is important, for instance, when changing  
the wiper blades or for folding away under  
frosty conditions.  
Safety information  
To turn on the rear wiper, rotate the outer  
switch on the wiper lever upward.  
Warning  
If the wipers start moving in the folded  
away state, body parts can be jammed or  
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Make sure that the vehicle  
is switched off when the wipers are in  
165  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
the folded-away state and the wipers are  
folded in when switching on.  
Folding in the wipers  
To fold in the wipers, proceed as follows:  
1. Fold the wipers back in toward the  
windshield.  
NOTICE  
2. Turn on standby state, then press the  
wiper lever down or forward again and  
hold it.  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching  
on. There is a risk of damage to property.  
Defrost the windshield prior to switching  
the wipers on.  
The wipers return to their rest position  
and are ready for operation.  
Folding out the wipers  
To fold the wipers away from the wind-  
shield, proceed as follows:  
1. Activate standby state.  
2. Push the wiper lever down or forward  
and hold it until the wipers stop in an  
approximately vertical position.  
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the  
windshield.  
166  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
Vehicle features and options  
Airbags  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Principle  
The airbag system provides additional pro-  
tection in the event of an accident, espe-  
cially if the seat belt is worn correctly.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
1
2
3
Front airbag, driver  
Front airbag, front passenger  
Head airbag  
4
5
Side airbag  
Knee airbag  
Front airbags  
Side airbag  
The front airbag helps protect the driver  
and front passenger in the event of a frontal  
impact in which the seat belts alone would  
not provide adequate protection.  
In the event of a side collision, the side  
airbag protects the side of the body in the  
chest and lap area.  
Depending on national-market version: In  
the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
167  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
in the rear protects the side chest and pel-  
vic area of occupants in the outer rear seats.  
–
–
–
Keep a distance from the airbags.  
Fasten seat belts correctly.  
Always grasp the steering wheel on the  
steering wheel rim. Hold hands at the  
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep  
the risk of injuring hands or arms as low  
as possible when the airbag deploys.  
Head airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the head  
airbag protects the head.  
Ejection Mitigation  
–
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that  
hands can cross over the steering wheel.  
Select the settings so that the shoulder  
rests against the backrest when cross-  
ing the hands and the upper body is as  
far back as possible while still maintain-  
ing a comfortable grip on the steering  
wheel.  
The head airbag system is designed as  
an ejection mitigation countermeasure to  
reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehi-  
cle occupants through side windows during  
rollovers or side collision events.  
Knee airbag  
Depending on national-market version, the  
knee airbag protects occupants’ legs in the  
event of a frontal collision.  
–
Make sure that the front passenger is  
sitting correctly, i.e., with their feet and  
legs in the footwell, not resting on the  
dashboard.  
–
–
Make sure that occupants keep their  
heads away from the side airbag.  
Protective effect  
General information  
Airbags are not deployed in every impact  
situation, e.g., in less severe accidents.  
There should be no additional persons,  
animals or objects between an airbag  
and a person.  
–
–
Keep the dashboard and windshield on  
the passenger's side clear, i.e., do not  
cover with adhesive film or other coat-  
ing, and do not attach mounts for, e.g.,  
navigation devices or mobile phones.  
Information on optimum protective  
effect of the airbags  
Warning  
Do not bond the airbag cover panels  
with adhesive, do not cover them, and  
do not modify them in any way.  
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly or the de-  
ployment area of the airbags is impaired,  
the airbag system cannot provide protec-  
tion as intended and may cause additional  
injuries due to deployment. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Follow the infor-  
mation on achieving the optimum protec-  
tive effect of the airbag system.  
–
–
Do not use the front passenger's side  
airbag cover for storage.  
Keep storage compartments near the  
airbags closed, e.g., glove compartment  
or center armrest.  
–
–
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions,  
or other objects on the front seats un-  
less they are specifically designed for  
seats with integrated airbags.  
To ensure that the airbag system has the  
optimal protective effect, note the follow-  
ing:  
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as  
jackets over the backrests.  
168  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
–
–
Do not modify individual components  
or wiring. This also applies to the dash-  
board, steering wheel covers, and seats.  
Interaction Unit view  
The airbag system warning light  
on the Interaction Unit illuminates  
briefly when drive-ready state is  
turned on, thus indicating the operational  
readiness of the entire airbag system and  
seat belt tensioners.  
Do not disassemble the airbag system.  
Even when you follow all instructions very  
closely, injury from contact with the airbags  
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-  
tions.  
The ignition and inflation noise may lead  
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary  
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.  
Malfunction  
–
The airbag system warning light  
on the Interaction Unit does not  
illuminate when drive-ready state  
is turned on.  
Vehicle modifications for a person with dis-  
abilities may affect the air bag system; con-  
tact MINI Customer Relations for further  
information.  
–
The airbag system warning light on  
the Interaction Unit illuminates continu-  
ously.  
Warnings and information on the airbags  
are also found on the sun visors.  
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-  
ers may not be operational. Have the vehi-  
cle checked immediately by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Operational readiness of the airbag  
system  
Safety information  
Setting the front seat positions  
The power that deploys the driver's/front  
passenger airbags depends on the position  
of the driver's/front passenger seat.  
Warning  
Individual components can be hot after de-  
ployment of the airbag system. There is  
a risk of injury. Do not touch individual  
components.  
To maintain the accuracy of this function,  
calibrate the electrical front seats as soon  
as the respective message appears on the  
Interaction Unit.  
Warning  
Additional information:  
Seats, refer to page 97.  
Improperly executed work can lead to fail-  
ure, malfunction or unintentional deploy-  
ment of the airbag system. In the case of  
a malfunction, the airbag system might not  
deploy as intended despite the accident  
severity. There is a risk of injury or danger  
to life. Have the airbag system checked,  
repaired, disassembled, and scrapped by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Deactivating the front pass-  
enger airbag automatically  
Principle  
The automatic front passenger airbag deac-  
tivation system can detect if the front pass-  
enger seat is occupied.  
169  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
The front passenger airbag is activated or  
deactivated accordingly.  
–
–
Move the head restraint up or remove it  
to ensure that the child restraint system  
rests as flat as possible against the rear  
seat backrest.  
Safety information  
Observe the maximum size of the child  
restraint system, for example to avoid  
possible touching the roof.  
Warning  
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-  
tion, the system must be able to detect  
whether a person is sitting in the front  
passenger seat. The entire seat surface  
must be used for this purpose. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure  
that the front passenger keeps his or her  
feet in the footwell.  
Before transporting a child on the front  
passenger seat, refer to the safety informa-  
tion and instructions for children on the  
front passenger seat, see Children.  
Additional information:  
Install child restraint systems, refer to  
page 114.  
Indicator light, front passenger  
airbag  
The front passenger airbag indicator light in  
the headliner indicates the operating state  
of the front passenger airbag.  
Functional requirements  
To ensure that occupants on the front pass-  
enger seat are detected properly, the follow-  
ing functional requirements apply:  
–
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats  
or other items to the front passenger  
seat unless they are specifically deter-  
mined to be safe for use on the front  
passenger seat.  
The indicator light shows whether the air-  
bag is activated or deactivated.  
After drive-ready state is turned on, the  
indicator light illuminates briefly and then  
shows whether the airbag is activated or  
deactivated.  
–
–
–
Do not place objects under the seat that  
can press against the seat from below.  
Sit upright in the seat with the back  
against the backrest.  
Sit down with your feet touching the  
floor.  
Installing child restraint systems  
To ensure that occupants on the front pass-  
enger seat are detected properly, note the  
following:  
–
–
Pay attention to the specifications and  
the operating and safety information of  
the child restraint system manufacturer  
when using child restraint systems.  
Make sure that the seat surface of the  
child restraint system rests as flat as  
possible on the seat surface.  
170  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Function  
Collision warning systems  
The indicator light is con-  
tinuously illuminated when  
the seat is not occupied or  
when a child is detected  
on the seat in a provided  
child restraint system as in-  
tended. The airbag on the  
front passenger's side is not  
activated.  
Principle  
The Intelligent Safety systems can help pre-  
vent an impending collision. To do so, the  
area around the vehicle is monitored by var-  
ious sensors.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, various  
safety and warning systems are available:  
–
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake  
intervention, refer to page 173.  
The indicator light does  
not illuminate when, for in-  
stance, a correctly seated  
person of sufficient size  
is detected on the seat.  
The airbag on the front pas-  
senger's side is activated.  
–
–
The exit warning, refer to page 182.  
The Lane Departure Warning, refer to  
page 184.  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
The Lane Change Warning, refer to  
page 188.  
The side collision warning, refer to  
page 191.  
When the front passenger seat is occupied,  
check the indicator light in the headliner  
before and while driving.  
The rear-cCollision warning, refer to  
page 193.  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning, re-  
fer to page 194.  
Fault of the automatic deactivation  
system  
For adolescents and adults, the front pass-  
enger airbag may deactivate in certain seat  
positions. In this case, the indicator light  
for the front passenger airbag illuminates in  
the headliner.  
The wrong way warning, refer to  
page 196.  
No Turn on Red function, refer to  
page 197.  
The Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to  
page 198.  
In this case, change the seat position so  
that the front passenger airbag activates  
and the indicator light goes out.  
The Intelligent Safety systems can be ac-  
tivated or deactivated on the Interaction  
Unit. Some functions, e.g., warning times,  
can be configured.  
If it is not possible to activate the airbags,  
have the person sit in the rear seat.  
Safety information  
Occupancy detection  
The occupant detection system satisfies the  
legal requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and deactivates  
the front passenger airbag under certain  
conditions.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
171  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on national-market version,  
some Intelligent Safety Systems are auto-  
matically activated whenever you start driv-  
ing.  
Resetting the settings  
The settings of the collision warning sys-  
tems can be reset to the default settings at  
vehicle outbound delivery.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as  
a substitute for the driver’s personal judg-  
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not  
issue warnings or responses, or these may  
be issued late or in a manner that is not  
consistent with their normal use. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate  
Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Reset".  
System limits  
Safety information  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too  
late, incorrectly, or without cause. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Actively intervene as warranted.  
Refer to the information in this Owner’s  
Manual regarding the scope of the sys-  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
Sensors  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Intel-  
ligent Safety systems are controlled by the  
following sensors:  
–
–
–
–
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Side radar sensors, rear.  
Detection capability  
The detection capability of the collision  
warning systems is limited.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 34.  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of  
the installed sensors and are detected by  
the system.  
Activating/deactivating/adjusting  
Intelligent Safety systems  
1. To activate/deactivate Intelligent Safety  
systems or configure settings, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings".  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
area is monitored by cameras or radar sen-  
sors. Thus, a system response might not  
come or might come late.  
2. Select the desired settings.  
172  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Unit. You can also configure the warning  
time. Various indicator lights and warning  
lights are displayed on the Interaction Unit  
depending on the collision risk detected.  
System limits of the sensors  
The Intelligent Safety systems may be re-  
stricted by the system limits of the sensors.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 34.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Forward Collision Mitigation  
with brake intervention  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
Principle  
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-  
tervention can help to prevent accidents  
within a certain speed range. To do so, the  
area around the vehicle is monitored by var-  
ious sensors.  
If an accident cannot be avoided, the sys-  
tem can help reduce the severity of the ac-  
cident. The system can issue a warning of  
a possible risk of collision and activate the  
brakes independently, if needed. You can  
cancel automatic brake intervention man-  
ually, e.g., by actively moving the steering  
wheel.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as  
a substitute for the driver’s personal judg-  
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not  
issue warnings or responses, or these may  
be issued late or in a manner that is not  
consistent with their normal use. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the For-  
ward Collision Mitigation system includes  
the following functions:  
–
–
–
–
–
–
The Rear-end collision warning func-  
tion, refer to page 176.  
The oncoming traffic warning function,  
refer to page 177.  
The oncoming traffic warning function  
when turning, refer to page 178.  
Sensors  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the For-  
ward Collision Mitigation system is control-  
led by the following sensors:  
The pedestrian warning function, refer  
to page 179.  
The intersection warning function, refer  
to page 180.  
–
–
–
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
The Evasion Assistant, refer to  
page 181.  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Forward Collision Mitigation can be acti-  
vated or deactivated using the Interaction  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 34.  
173  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
Speed range  
The Forward Collision Mitigation system is-  
sues a warning for a possible risk of colli-  
sion at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Setting the warning time for  
Forward Collision Mitigation  
You can configure the warning time at  
which Forward Collision Mitigation should  
issue a warning.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deacti-  
vated temporarily.  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety  
and warnings" / "Forward Collision  
Mitigation".  
Some functions are deactivated earlier.  
The system is enabled as soon as the speed  
drops below this value again.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Activating/deactivating the  
Forward Collision Mitigation  
The more sensitive the warning time is set  
to be, the more warnings will be displayed.  
The system can therefore also issue more  
early or unfounded warnings and reactions.  
Automatic activation of system  
Depending on national-market version, the  
Forward Collision Mitigation is automati-  
cally activated whenever you start driving.  
The system checks for visual impairments.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Driver  
Attention Camera on the instrument panel  
monitors where the driver is looking. Visi-  
bility and gaze behavior also affect the tim-  
ing of warnings.  
Activating the system manually  
The Forward Collision Mitigation is acti-  
vated by setting the warning time.  
Interaction Unit view  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation is shown on  
the Interaction Unit and, depending on ve-  
hicle equipment, Head-up display by the fol-  
lowing indicator lights and warning lights:  
Set the warning time for Forward Collision  
Mitigation, refer to page 174.  
Deactivating the system manually  
Icon  
Meaning  
Depending on national-market version, you  
must significantly reduce your vehicle's  
speed or stop your vehicle in order to de-  
activate the Forward Collision Mitigation  
manually. Forward Collision Mitigation is  
deactivated on the Interaction Unit.  
Risk of collision with a person,  
e.g., a pedestrian.  
Risk of collision, for instance with  
an oncoming or a vehicle driving  
ahead.  
It may be necessary to successively confirm  
this deactivation on the Interaction Unit.  
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehi-  
cle crossing from the right.  
Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Forward Collision Mitigation" /  
"Off".  
174  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Automatic brake intervention  
Icon  
Meaning  
If there is a risk of collision, the Forward  
Collision Mitigation system can assist with  
an automatic brake intervention, if neces-  
sary.  
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehi-  
cle crossing from the left.  
General risk of collision.  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low  
speed, the vehicle may come to a complete  
stop.  
Indicator lights and warning lights may be  
displayed differently since the system has  
detected multiple objects.  
A brake intervention can be canceled by  
depressing the accelerator pedal with suffi-  
cient force, releasing the brake pedal, or by  
actively steering.  
Warning function  
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on  
different warning levels, depending on the  
respective hazardous situation.  
Depending on the equipment and situation,  
the brake intervention can occur up to ap-  
prox. 155 mph/250 km/h.  
At speeds above approx.  
130 mph/210 km/h, only a brief brake in-  
tervention will occur.  
In the event of a prewarning, a warning  
light illuminates red. In the event of an  
acute warning, a warning light flashes red  
and a warning tone sounds.  
System limits  
In the event of a system warning, the driver  
must intervene immediately and in accord-  
ance with the situation.  
Safety information  
–
–
–
–
Red warning light illuminates:  
Warning  
A hazardous situation has been de-  
tected. Increased awareness is required.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too  
late, incorrectly, or without cause. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Actively intervene as warranted.  
Refer to the information in this Owner’s  
Manual regarding the scope of the sys-  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
Red warning light flashes:  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene  
immediately.  
A warning signal sounds:  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene  
immediately.  
Automatic brake intervention:  
Detection capability  
The detection capability of the Forward Col-  
lision Mitigation is restricted.  
Depending on the equipment and situa-  
tion in case of risk of imminent colli-  
sion, the system can also intervene with  
an automatic brake intervention and  
automatically decelerate the vehicle, if  
necessary, to a complete stop.  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of  
the installed sensors and are detected by  
the system.  
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly  
and hard, the maximum brake power of the  
vehicle is used.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
area is monitored by cameras or radar sen-  
175  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
sors. Thus, a system response might not  
come or might come late.  
System limits of the sensors  
Forward Collision Mitigation may be re-  
stricted by the system limits of the sensors.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 34.  
The sensors detect the traffic situation in  
their detection range.  
Functional limitations  
The Forward Collision Mitigation system  
may be limited in the following situations:  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter  
“Forward Collision Mitigation”.  
–
–
In tight curves.  
With limitation of the driving stability  
control systems.  
–
Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state  
is turned on via the Start/Stop switch.  
Speed range  
The rear-end collision warning function  
is activated when your vehicle speed is  
greater than approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Also, do not use Forward Collision Mitiga-  
tion when towing.  
Interaction Unit view  
Warning function in rear-end  
collision situations  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the In-  
teraction Unit and Head-up display, depend-  
ing on vehicle equipment.  
Principle  
To warn the driver of a possible risk of col-  
lision, the Rear Collision Warning function  
displays a warning light on the Interaction  
Unit and brakes automatically when neces-  
sary. You can cancel automatic brake inter-  
vention manually, e.g., by actively moving  
the steering wheel.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Forward Collision Warning with a  
detected vehicle.  
General risk of collision.  
In the event of an accident, the system  
helps by reducing impact speed.  
Warning function  
The time of warnings may vary depending  
on the current driving situation.  
The rear-end collision warning function is-  
sues warnings on different levels, depend-  
ing on the respective hazard situation. This  
system prompts the driver to intervene  
manually.  
The system considers the driver’s vehicle  
handling when responding. If an active driv-  
ing style is detected, warnings and brake  
interventions occur less frequently.  
Additional information:  
176  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to  
page 173.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
The sensors detect the traffic situation in  
their detection range.  
Detection range  
With the rear-end collision warning func-  
tion, the following may not be detected or  
may be detected only with a delay in the  
detection range of the sensors, e.g.:  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter  
“Forward Collision Mitigation”.  
–
–
–
Preceding vehicle driving slowly and be-  
ing approached at high speed.  
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front  
of you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Speed range  
The oncoming traffic warning is activated  
when your vehicle speed is greater than ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Warning function for oncom-  
ing traffic  
Interaction Unit view  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the In-  
teraction Unit and Head-up display, depend-  
ing on vehicle equipment.  
Principle  
To warn the driver of a possible risk of col-  
lision with oncoming traffic, the Oncoming  
Traffic Warning function displays a warn-  
ing light on the Interaction Unit and brakes  
automatically when necessary. You can can-  
cel automatic brake intervention manually,  
e.g., by actively moving the steering wheel.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Oncoming traffic warning when a  
vehicle is detected.  
General risk of collision.  
In the event of an accident, the system  
helps by reducing impact speed.  
Warning function  
The time of warnings may vary depending  
on the current driving situation.  
The oncoming traffic warning function is-  
sues warnings on different levels, depend-  
ing on the respective hazard situation. This  
system prompts the driver to intervene  
manually.  
In case of a possible risk of collision, a  
brake intervention is triggered.  
177  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to  
page 173.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
The sensors detect the traffic situation in  
their detection range.  
Detection range  
With the oncoming traffic warning func-  
tion, the following may not be detected or  
may be detected only with a delay in the  
detection range of the sensors, e.g.:  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter  
“Forward Collision Mitigation”.  
–
–
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.  
Vehicles with an unusual front view.  
Speed range  
The warning function for turning is acti-  
vated when your vehicle speed is greater  
than approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Warning function for turning  
with oncoming traffic  
This system reacts when your vehicle speed  
is less than approx. 15 mph/25 km/h.  
Principle  
Interaction Unit view  
To warn the driver of a possible risk of  
collision with oncoming traffic when turn-  
ing, the Oncoming Traffic Warning function  
displays a warning light on the Interaction  
Unit and brakes automatically when neces-  
sary. You can cancel automatic brake inter-  
vention manually, e.g., by actively moving  
the steering wheel.  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the In-  
teraction Unit and Head-up display, depend-  
ing on vehicle equipment.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Oncoming traffic warning when a  
vehicle is detected.  
In the event of an accident, the system  
helps by reducing impact speed.  
General risk of collision.  
The time of warnings may vary depending  
on the current driving situation.  
Warning function  
The warning function for turning with on-  
coming traffic issues warnings on different  
levels, depending on the respective hazard.  
This system prompts the driver to intervene  
manually.  
178  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to  
page 173.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
The sensors detect the traffic situation in  
their detection range on a straight road.  
Detection range  
With the warning function for turning with  
oncoming traffic, the following may not be  
detected or may be detected only with a  
delay in the detection range of the sensors,  
e.g.:  
–
–
Oncoming vehicles at a very high speed.  
Vehicles that are hidden by other vehi-  
cles.  
–
Vehicles with an unusual front view.  
In addition, the sensors detect the traffic  
situation in their detection range when  
turning.  
Warning function for pedes-  
trians  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter  
“Forward Collision Mitigation”.  
Principle  
To warn the driver of a possible risk of  
collision with a pedestrian, the Pedestrian  
Warning function displays a warning light  
on the Interaction Unit and brakes automat-  
ically when necessary. You can cancel auto-  
matic brake intervention manually, e.g., by  
actively moving the steering wheel.  
Speed range  
The Pedestrian Warning function is acti-  
vated when your vehicle speed is greater  
than approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, this sys-  
tem reacts when your vehicle speed is less  
than approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.  
The system issues warnings for speeds that  
are common in towns and cities.  
In the event of an accident, the system  
helps by reducing impact speed.  
Interaction Unit view  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
pedestrian or cyclist, a warning light is  
shown on the Interaction Unit and Head-up  
display, depending on vehicle equipment.  
179  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Meaning  
Safety  
–
–
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
Icon  
Pedestrians that are not detected as  
such because of their contour or pos-  
ture.  
Risk of collision with a person,  
e.g., a pedestrian.  
–
Pedestrians who are too small for the  
sensors to detect.  
General risk of collision.  
Warning function at intersec-  
tions  
Warning function  
The Pedestrian Warning system issues  
warnings on different levels, depending on  
the respective hazard situation. This system  
prompts the driver to intervene manually.  
Principle  
To warn the driver of a possible risk of colli-  
sion with crossing traffic, the Intersection  
Warning function displays a warning light  
on the Interaction Unit and brakes automat-  
ically when necessary. You can cancel auto-  
matic brake intervention manually, e.g., by  
actively moving the steering wheel.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to  
page 173.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
At intersections and junctions, this system  
issues warnings for speeds that are common  
in towns and cities.  
In the event of an accident, the system  
helps by reducing impact speed.  
Detection range  
The time of warnings may vary depending  
on the current driving situation.  
With the Pedestrian Warning, the sensor  
detection range consists of the following:  
–
–
From area in front of vehicle, arrow 1.  
The sensors detect the traffic situation in  
their detection range.  
If vehicle is equipped with front, side  
radar sensors, side areas, arrow 2.  
Vehicles crossing your driving direction can  
be detected by the system as soon as these  
vehicles enter into detection range of the  
sensors.  
The following situations may not be de-  
tected, for instance:  
180  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Detection range  
Safety information  
With the Intersection Warning function,  
the following may not be detected or may  
be detected only with a delay in the detec-  
tion range of the sensors, e.g.:  
Follow the safety information in Chapter  
“Forward Collision Mitigation”.  
Speed range  
The Intersection Warning is activated when  
your vehicle speed is greater than approx.  
3 mph/5 km/h.  
–
Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,  
e.g. by buildings.  
–
–
Vehicles with an unusual side view.  
The system responds to crossing vehicles  
when the vehicle speed is below approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
Vehicles in highly dynamic driving sit-  
uations.  
Interaction Unit view  
Evasion Assistant  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is shown on the In-  
teraction Unit and Head-up display, depend-  
ing on vehicle equipment.  
Principle  
The Evasion Assistant can help the driver  
perform evasive maneuvers in certain situa-  
tions, e.g., when obstacles or pedestrians  
appear suddenly. This system intervenes ac-  
tively to assist the driver if it is possible to  
make an evasive maneuver to the side.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Risk of collision with vehicle  
crossing from the right.  
If the system detects sufficient free space  
alongside the vehicle, it helps the driver  
perform an evasive maneuver safely.  
Risk of collision with vehicle  
crossing from the left.  
General risk of collision.  
This system warns the driver of a possible  
risk of collision by displaying various warn-  
ing lights on the Interaction Unit.  
Warning function  
The Intersection Warning system issues  
warnings on different levels, depending on  
the respective hazard. This system prompts  
the driver to intervene manually.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to  
page 173.  
The sensors monitor and detect the clear-  
ance in front of the vehicle. Depending on  
the vehicle equipment, the areas next to the  
vehicle are also monitored.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
181  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
The system is designed to provide assis-  
tance during evasive maneuvers when there  
is a risk of collision.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter  
“Forward Collision Mitigation”.  
The Evasion Assistant is signaled by a mes-  
sage on the Interaction Unit and Head-up  
display, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for the Evasion Assistant:  
System limits  
–
–
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.  
Sensors have detected sufficient clear-  
ance around the vehicle.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Speed range  
Detection range  
The Evasion Assistant helps the driver  
when the vehicle speed is between approx.  
19 mph/30 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.  
With the Evasion Assistant, the following  
may not be detected in the sensor detection  
range, e.g.:  
Interaction Unit view  
–
Preceding vehicle driving slowly and be-  
ing approached at high speed.  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle or person, e.g., a pedestrian, a warn-  
ing light is shown on the Interaction Unit  
and Head-up display, depending on vehicle  
equipment.  
–
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front  
of you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
–
–
–
–
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Warning when a vehicle is de-  
tected.  
Pedestrians that are not detected as  
such because of their contour or pos-  
ture.  
Risk of collision with a pedes-  
trian.  
–
Pedestrians who are too small for the  
sensors to detect.  
Risk of collision with unknown  
obstacle.  
Functional limitation  
This system is deactivated when the trailer  
power socket is occupied or trailer towing  
is activated, e.g., when using a trailer or  
rear bicycle rack.  
Warning function with evasion  
support  
If the vehicle approaches another object at  
a high differential speed, a warning is dis-  
played if there is an immediate risk of colli-  
sion.  
Exit warning  
Principle  
Intervene in case of a warning.  
The exit warning helps to avoid accidents.  
182  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The system monitors the vehicle's surround-  
ings for a limited time after you get in  
or park. When opening doors, vehicle occu-  
pants are then warned if a risk of collision  
with an approaching object is detected.  
Activating/deactivating the exit  
warning  
Automatic activation of system  
The exit warning activates automatically  
whenever you start driving if this function  
was switched on when you completed your  
last trip.  
A possible risk of collision is indicated by  
various warnings, e.g., warning light on the  
exterior mirror and a warning tone.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror  
gives warnings at different levels.  
Deactivating the system manually  
To deactivate the Exit Warning, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Exit  
warning" / "Off".  
Configuring the exit warning  
1. To configure the Exit Warning, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Exit warning".  
The sensors monitor the area behind the  
vehicle.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
area around the vehicle in front of the vehi-  
cle is monitored as well.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Turning the warning signal on/off  
The exit warning can be activated or deacti-  
vated on the Interaction Unit. This warning  
function can also be configured.  
To turn the Exit Warning tone on/off, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" / "Exit  
warning" / "Warning tone".  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "For-  
ward Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Sensors  
The Exit Warning is controlled by the fol-  
lowing sensors:  
–
–
Side radar sensors, rear.  
Depending on whether vehicle is equip-  
ped with side front radar sensors.  
183  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
Displays  
System limits  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision  
warning systems" chapter.  
Detection range  
With the Exit Warning, the following may  
not be identified in the sensor detection  
range, e.g.:  
–
–
–
Fully or partially hidden objects.  
Stationary or very slow objects.  
Pedestrians.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror  
warns of a possible collision with a detected  
vehicle.  
Functional limitations  
The exit warning system may be restricted  
in the following situations:  
Ambient light  
Depending on the equipment, warnings are  
also indicated by the ambient light in the  
interior.  
–
The speed of an approaching vehicle is  
too fast or too slow.  
–
–
In curves.  
In case of fully or partially hidden ob-  
jects.  
Warning function  
Prewarning  
In the event of a prewarning for the Exit  
Warning, the warning light on the exterior  
mirror illuminates. Depending on the equip-  
ment, the ambient light also flashes.  
Lane Departure Warning with  
active return  
An object was detected in the opening  
area of the doors. Increased awareness is  
required.  
Principle  
The Lane Departure Warning system with  
active return alerts the driver when their  
vehicle is about to leave the road or lane.  
Acute warning  
An automatic steering intervention helps to  
keep the vehicle in its lane.  
In the event of an acute Exit Warning, the  
warning light on the exterior mirror flashes,  
as does the ambient light, depending on ve-  
hicle equipment. In addition, a warning tone  
sounds.  
There is a risk of collision when opening the  
doors.  
184  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate  
Functional requirement  
For the Lane Departure Warning to acti-  
vate, the camera must detect the lane boun-  
dary.  
Speed range  
The sensors detect the traffic situation in  
their detection range.  
The Lane Departure Warning is activated  
when your vehicle exceeds a given mini-  
mum speed. The minimum speed is coun-  
try-specific and displayed on the Interaction  
Unit.  
The Lane Departure Warning can be acti-  
vated, deactivated, and configured on the  
Interaction Unit.  
Warnings are displayed on the Interaction  
Unit. In addition, the steering wheel vi-  
brates at the set intensity.  
Sensors  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Lane  
Departure Warning system is controlled by  
the following sensors:  
If you set your turn signal for the corre-  
sponding direction before leaving your lane,  
no warnings are displayed.  
–
–
–
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Safety information  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Warning  
Activating/deactivating the Lane  
Departure Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing road and traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to  
traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traf-  
fic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate Do not jerk the steering wheel  
in response to a warning.  
Automatic activation of system  
Depending on national-market version, the  
system is automatically activated whenever  
you start driving.  
Activating the system manually  
The Lane Departure Warning is activated  
by setting the warning time.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as  
a substitute for the driver’s personal judg-  
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not  
issue warnings or responses, or these may  
be issued late or in a manner that is not  
consistent with their normal use. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
Additional information:  
Configuring the Lane Departure Warning,  
refer to page 186.  
Deactivating the system manually  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, deactivation of the  
185  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
Lane Departure Warning must be con-  
firmed successively on the Interaction Unit.  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Feedback via steering wheel" /  
"Vibration intensity".  
Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Lane Departure Warning" /  
"Off".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is applied to all collision warn-  
ing systems.  
Setting Lane Departure Warning  
The Lane Departure Warning menu can be  
used to configure this function and specify  
when it should issue warnings.  
Depending on national-market  
version: activate/deactivate  
steering intervention  
Depending on national-market version, the  
Lane Departure Warning steering interven-  
tion can be activated or deactivated.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Lane Departure Warning" /  
"Steering intervention".  
warnings" / "Lane Departure Warning".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
–
"Enhanced"  
If the system detects that your vehi-  
cle is about to leave your lane or  
cross a lane marking, a warning is  
issued. The system performs a steer-  
ing intervention.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
the steering intervention is automatically  
active after every driving off.  
Interaction Unit view  
–
"In dangerous situations"  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, different warnings  
for the Lane Departure Warning are dis-  
played on the Interaction Unit.  
A warning is issued if the system  
detects that the vehicle is about to  
inadvertently cross a lane marking,  
or if the sensors detect an oncoming  
vehicle. A steering intervention is  
performed.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Indicator light flashes green: Sys-  
tem is performing a steering in-  
tervention.  
Depending on national-market ver-  
sion, with continuous lane markings:  
If the system detects that your vehi-  
cle is about to inadvertently leave  
your lane or cross a lane marking,  
a warning is issued. A steering inter-  
vention is performed.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, information for the  
system is shown in Assisted View on the  
Interaction Unit.  
Additional information:  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
Assisted View, refer to page 150.  
1. To adjust the steering wheel vibra-  
tion intensity, go through the menu  
186  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Warning signal  
Warning function  
If you leave the lane  
If you leave the lane and if a lane boun-  
dary has been detected, the steering wheel  
vibrates in accordance with the steering  
wheel vibration setting.  
Depending on national-market version: An  
acoustic warning will sound if the Lane  
Departure Warning system performs mul-  
tiple active steering interventions within  
3 minutes and the driver does not operate  
the steering wheel themselves during the  
steering intervention(s). A short warning  
signal will sound at the second steering in-  
tervention. Beginning with the third steer-  
ing intervention, a continuous warning will  
sound.  
In addition, the indicator light  
flashes green.  
When the turn signal is switched on in  
the corresponding direction before chang-  
ing the lane, a warning is not issued.  
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
The warning tone and Check Control mes-  
sage advise the driver to pay closer atten-  
tion to their lane.  
Steering intervention  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version: The Lane Departure  
Warning system may intervene with an  
active steering intervention in addition to  
vibration if you cross a lane marking at  
speeds up to 130 mph/210 km/h. The sys-  
tem supports the driver in keeping the ve-  
hicle within the lane. The steering interven-  
tion can be noticed on the steering wheel  
and can be manually overridden at any time.  
The extended warning tone stops when the  
steering wheel is moved manually.  
With trailer towing  
When the Lane Departure Warning is acti-  
vated, no steering intervention is performed  
if the trailer power socket is occupied or  
trailer towing is activated, e.g., when using  
a trailer.  
When steering intervention is ac-  
tive, the indicator light flashes  
green.  
When using a rear carrier, e.g., a rear bicy-  
cle rack, on the trailer hitch, this restriction  
does not apply when trailer towing is acti-  
vated on the Interaction Unit.  
For instance, the steering intervention will  
be suppressed in the following situations:  
Additional information:  
–
–
–
With hard accelerating or braking.  
When flashing.  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 316.  
With hazard warning system switched  
on.  
End of warning  
–
–
–
–
In driving situation with high driving  
dynamics.  
The warning or active steering intervention  
will be canceled in the following situations,  
for example:  
While Dynamic Stability Control regu-  
lates driving stability.  
–
–
–
Automatically after a few seconds.  
When returning to your own lane.  
With hard accelerating or braking.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is lim-  
ited.  
Immediately following a steering inter-  
vention by the vehicle systems.  
187  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
–
With hazard warning system switched  
on.  
ing light also illuminates, depending on na-  
tional-market version.  
–
–
When flashing.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regu-  
lates driving stability.  
Active Blind Spot Detection  
with active return  
–
Immediately following a steering inter-  
vention by the vehicle systems.  
Principle  
–
–
With manual steering intervention.  
When another driver assistance system  
is activated, if applicable.  
The Lane Change Warning system with ac-  
tive return detects vehicles in your blind  
spot or vehicles approaching from behind in  
the adjacent lane.  
–
–
When no lane markings are detected.  
When the system limits are reached.  
An automatic steering intervention helps to  
keep the vehicle in its lane.  
System limits  
A possible risk of collision is indicated by  
various warnings, e.g., signaled by warning  
light on the exterior mirror.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision  
warning systems" chapter.  
Functional limitations  
The Lane Departure Warning system may  
be restricted in the following situations:  
–
In the event of missing, worn, poorly  
visible, merging, diverging, or multiple  
lane boundaries such as in construction  
areas.  
The sensors monitor the area behind and  
next to the vehicle.  
–
With lane boundaries that are covered  
in snow, ice, dirt or water.  
The system indicates whether there are ve-  
hicles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or ap-  
proaching from behind in an adjacent lane,  
arrow 2. The warning light in the exterior  
mirror illuminates dimly.  
–
–
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
With lane boundaries that are covered  
by objects.  
–
–
–
–
When driving very close to the vehicle  
in front of you.  
The system will warn in the previously  
named situations prior to a lane change. The  
warning light on the exterior mirror flashes  
and the steering wheel vibrates at the set  
intensity.  
Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state  
is turned on via the Start/Stop switch.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regu-  
lates driving stability.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is lim-  
ited.  
Active Blind Spot Detection can be acti-  
vated, deactivated, and configured on the  
Interaction Unit.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited. A yellow warn-  
188  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "For-  
ward Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot  
Detection  
1. To configure Active Blind Spot De-  
tection, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety  
and warnings" / "Active Blind Spot  
Detection".  
Speed range  
Active Blind Spot Detection is activated  
when your vehicle exceeds a given mini-  
mum speed. The minimum speed is country-  
specific and displayed in the Active Blind  
Spot Detection menu.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
You can configure how many warnings will  
be shown. However, there may also be an  
excess of unwarranted warnings of critical  
situations.  
When turning at a speed of up to approx.  
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will  
not vibrate.  
This system is temporarily deacti-  
vated at speeds greater than approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reacti-  
vated.  
1. To adjust the steering wheel vibra-  
tion intensity, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Feedback via steering wheel" /  
"Vibration intensity".  
Sensors  
Active Blind Spot Detection is controlled by  
the following sensors:  
2. Select the desired setting.  
–
–
–
Camera behind the windshield.  
Side radar sensors, rear.  
The setting is applied to all collision warn-  
ing systems.  
Depending on whether vehicle is equip-  
ped with side front radar sensors.  
Depending on national-market  
version: activate/deactivate  
steering intervention  
Depending on national-market version, the  
Lane Change Warning steering intervention  
can be activated or deactivated.  
Activating/deactivating the Lane  
Change Warning  
1. To activate/deactivate Active Blind Spot  
Detection, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety  
and warnings" / "Active Blind Spot  
Detection".  
Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety and  
warnings" / "Active Blind Spot Detection" /  
"Steering intervention".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, Active Blind Spot De-  
tection activates automatically whenever  
you start driving.  
189  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
may perform an active steering inter-  
vention when there is no response to  
the steering wheel vibration and a lane  
marking is crossed at speeds of up to  
130 mph/210 km/h. The steering interven-  
tion helps return the vehicle into the lane.  
The steering intervention can be noticed  
on the steering wheel and can be manually  
overridden at any time.  
Warning function  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
The steering intervention is carried out  
from a minimum speed. This minimum  
speed is displayed on the Interaction Unit.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror  
warns of a possible collision with a detected  
vehicle.  
With trailer towing  
No steering intervention is performed when  
the trailer power socket is occupied or  
trailer towing is activated. Active Blind Spot  
Detection does not issue a pre-warning.  
Prewarning  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, an acute warning will  
continue to be issued if there is a risk of  
collision.  
In the event of a prewarning for Active  
Blind Spot Detection, the dimmed warning  
light on the exterior mirror indicates when  
vehicles are in your blind spot or approach-  
ing from the rear.  
The warning function may be restricted.  
Warnings can be displayed late or not at all,  
e.g., if the speed of the approaching vehicle  
is much higher than your own speed. An  
increased number of unwarranted warnings  
may occur. A Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
Acute warning  
When an acute warning is issued by Active  
Blind Spot Detection, the steering wheel vi-  
brates briefly. The warning light in the exte-  
rior mirror flashes brightly.  
An acute warning is issued if the following  
conditions are met:  
Warning light flashing  
As a self-test of Active Blind Spot Detec-  
tion, the warning light on the exterior mir-  
ror flashes briefly when the vehicle is un-  
locked.  
–
–
–
Another vehicle is located in the critical  
area.  
Your own vehicle is approaching the  
other lane.  
Depending on the system setting when  
the turn signal is turned on.  
System limits  
The warning stops when the other vehicle  
has left the critical area.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision  
warning systems" chapter.  
Steering intervention  
Depending on national-market version:  
The Active Blind Spot Detection system  
190  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
If, for example, another vehicle is detected  
next to your vehicle and there is a risk of  
collision with this vehicle, the system helps  
avoid a collision. To do so, the system issues  
a warning by flashing the warning light on  
the exterior mirror, issuing a Check Control  
message, and vibrating the steering wheel.  
Functional limitations  
The Lane Change Warning system may be  
restricted in the following situations:  
–
When a vehicle is approaching at a  
speed much faster than your own.  
–
–
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,  
for instance by stickers.  
If necessary, an active steering intervention  
is performed by the system.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
the steering intervention e.g. in the follow-  
ing situations:  
–
In the event of missing, worn, poorly  
visible, merging, diverging, or multiple  
lane boundaries such as in construction  
areas.  
–
With lane boundaries that are covered  
in snow, ice, dirt or water.  
The sensors monitor the space next to the  
vehicle.  
–
–
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
With lane boundaries that are covered  
by objects.  
The Side Collision Warning can be acti-  
vated/deactivated on the Interaction Unit.  
The severity of the steering wheel vibration  
can be adjusted.  
–
When driving very close to the vehicle  
in front of you.  
–
–
If the camera is impaired.  
Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state  
is turned on via the Start/Stop switch.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "For-  
ward Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited. A yellow warn-  
ing light also illuminates, depending on na-  
tional-market version.  
Functional requirement  
The camera behind the windshield deter-  
mines the lane boundary positions.  
This system may be restricted or deacti-  
vated when the trailer power socket is oc-  
cupied or trailer towing is activated, e.g.,  
when using a trailer or rear bicycle rack. A  
Check Control message is displayed.  
For the side-collision warning with steering  
intervention to activate, the camera must  
detect the lane boundary.  
Speed range  
Side collision mitigation  
The side-collision warning function is acti-  
vated when your vehicle exceeds a given  
minimum speed. The minimum speed is  
country-specific and displayed on the Inter-  
action Unit.  
Principle  
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an  
impending side collision.  
191  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
This system responds when your ve-  
hicle speed is less than approx.  
130 mph/210 km/h.  
Warning function  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
Sensors  
The side-collision warning is controlled by  
the following sensors:  
–
–
–
Camera behind the windshield.  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Side radar sensors, rear.  
Activating/deactivating the side-  
collision warning  
1. To activate/deactivate the Side Collision  
Warning, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety  
and warnings" / "Side collision warning".  
The warning light in the exterior mirror  
warns of a possible collision with a detected  
vehicle.  
Acute warning  
In the event of an acute side-collision warn-  
ing, the warning light on the exterior mirror  
flashes and the steering wheel begins to  
vibrate if there is a risk of collision.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
A Check Control message is displayed at the  
same time.  
1. To adjust the steering wheel vibra-  
tion intensity, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Feedback via steering wheel" /  
"Vibration intensity".  
Steering intervention  
Depending on the national-market version,  
if necessary, the system engages the active  
steering intervention to prevent a collision  
and maintain the vehicle within its own  
lane. The steering intervention can be no-  
ticed on the steering wheel and can be man-  
ually overridden at any time.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is applied to all collision warn-  
ing systems.  
Interaction Unit view  
System limits  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, Side Collision Warn-  
ing information is shown in Assisted View  
on the Interaction Unit.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision  
warning systems" chapter.  
Additional information:  
Functional limitations  
Assisted View, refer to page 150.  
The side-collision warning system may be  
restricted in the following situations:  
192  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
–
–
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
In the event of missing, worn, poorly  
visible, merging, diverging, or multiple  
lane boundaries such as in construction  
areas.  
–
With lane boundaries that are covered  
in snow, ice, dirt or water.  
–
–
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
With lane boundaries that are covered  
by objects.  
The sensors monitor the area behind the  
vehicle.  
–
–
When driving very close to the vehicle  
in front of you.  
The rear-end collision preparation function  
is activated automatically when you start  
driving and is deactivated automatically in  
certain situations.  
Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state  
is turned on via the Start/Stop switch.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "For-  
ward Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
This system is deactivated when the trailer  
power socket is occupied or trailer towing  
is activated, e.g., when using a trailer or  
rear bicycle rack. A Check Control message  
is displayed.  
Sensors  
The rear-end collision preparation function  
is controlled by the side, rear radar sensors.  
Rear-end collision preparation  
Activating/deactivating the rear-  
collision warning  
The rear-collision warning is automatically  
activated whenever you start driving.  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the rear-end collision prep-  
aration can react to vehicles approaching  
from behind.  
The system is deactivated in the following  
situations:  
–
–
When reversing.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
the hazard warning flashers are switched on  
and PreCrash functions are triggered where  
applicable if a vehicle approaching at a cer-  
tain speed is detected.  
When the trailer power socket is occu-  
pied or trailer towing is activated, e.g.,  
when using a trailer or rear bicycle rack.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision  
warning systems" chapter.  
193  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
Functional limitations  
Functional requirement  
The rear-collision warning may be re-  
stricted if the speed of the approaching ve-  
hicle is much higher or similar to your own  
speed.  
The right-of-way situation ahead of the ve-  
hicle must be clearly controlled by traffic  
signs or light signal systems.  
Various traffic signs are taken into account  
for the Traffic Light And Sign Warning:  
Sign  
Meaning  
Traffic Light And Sign Warn-  
ing  
Give way signs:  
A pre-warning is issued for these  
road signs.  
Principle  
Stop signs:  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning pro-  
vides support in situations in which the  
right-of-way needs to be yielded based on  
road signs or traffic lights.  
A pre-warning is issued for these  
road signs.  
When traffic lights are red, a pre-  
warning and an acute warning  
will be issued.  
This system uses a camera to analyze traffic  
signs and traffic lights. The navigation sys-  
tem directs information on the road layout  
to the system.  
Speed range  
For warning purposes, the respective traffic  
situation is shown on the Interaction Unit.  
An acoustic signal also sounds in acute  
warning situations.  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning system  
issues a warning as from a variable mini-  
mum speed and at speeds up to approx.  
60 mph/100 km/h.  
A warning is given if the right of way is  
about to be violated, e.g., in the following  
traffic situations:  
Sensors  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning is  
controlled by the camera behind the wind-  
shield.  
–
–
–
–
–
At an intersection.  
At a road entrance.  
On a highway entrance ramp.  
At a roundabout.  
Activating/deactivating the Traffic  
Light And Sign Warning  
With a red traffic light.  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning can be  
activated or deactivated on the Interaction  
Unit. You can also configure the warning  
time.  
1. To activate/deactivate the Traffic Light  
And Sign Warning, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Safety and warnings" / "Traffic Light  
and Sign Warning".  
Safety information  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Follow the safety information in the "For-  
ward Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
194  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Setting the warning time for the  
Traffic Light And Sign Warning  
Icon  
Meaning  
Give way.  
1. To configure the warning time for  
the Traffic Light And Sign Warning,  
go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety  
and warnings" / "Traffic Light and Sign  
Warning".  
Stop.  
Red traffic light.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
The selected setting is saved and adopted  
for the next journey.  
When a prewarning is issued, intervene as  
appropriate for the situation; for example,  
by braking.  
Warning function  
General information  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning system  
issues warnings in two levels.  
Acute warning  
If an acute warning is issued for the Traffic  
Light And Sign Warning because there is a  
risk that a vehicle is not yielding the right-  
of-way, a signal tone sounds and an icon is  
displayed on the Interaction Unit:  
If a prewarning is issued, the system indi-  
cates this by the icon on the Interaction  
Unit.  
Icon  
Meaning  
If an acute warning is issued, the system  
indicates this by the icon on the Interaction  
Unit and the signal tone.  
Red traffic light.  
The timing of the warning varies with the  
actual driving situation and the warning  
time setting.  
When an acute warning is issued, intervene  
as appropriate for the situation; for example,  
by braking.  
Prewarning  
Display in the Head-up display  
If a prewarning is issued for the Traffic  
Light And Sign Warning because there is a  
risk that a vehicle is not yielding the right-  
of-way, an icon is displayed on the Interac-  
tion Unit:  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Traf-  
fic Light And Sign Warning is displayed  
simultaneously on the Head-up display and  
Interaction Unit.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision  
warning systems" chapter.  
195  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
No warning  
Wrong way warning  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning does  
not issue a warning in the following situa-  
tions, for example:  
Principle  
The wrong way warning warns the driver of  
an upcoming wrong entry onto roads, for  
instance onto freeways, roundabouts and  
one-way streets.  
–
In right-of-way situations without right-  
of-way signs, stop signs, or red light sig-  
nal systems.  
–
With intersections with relevant traffic  
lights that are illuminated yellow or  
green.  
The system uses sensors and, depending on  
vehicle equipment, navigation data and traf-  
fic signs to monitor the traffic situation.  
For warning purposes, the corresponding  
traffic sign is displayed on the Interaction  
Unit and an acoustic signal sounds.  
Functional limitations  
The Traffic Light And Sign Warning system  
may be limited in the following situations:  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
If road signs or light signal systems are  
unclear.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "For-  
ward Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems  
are fully or partially concealed or soiled.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems  
are difficult to read or rotated.  
Functional requirement  
The road layout ahead must be controlled  
clearly with traffic signs.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems  
are too small or too large.  
The Wrong Way Warning system recog-  
nizes the following traffic signs, for exam-  
ple:  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to  
the standard.  
When traffic signs are detected that ap-  
ply to a junction or parallel street.  
–
–
–
No entrance.  
Roundabout.  
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
Direction arrows for required passing  
maneuver.  
With intersections with flashing light  
signal systems.  
Sensors  
Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state  
is turned on via the Start/Stop switch.  
The Wrong Way Warning function is con-  
trolled by the camera behind the wind-  
shield.  
In the case of navigation data that is  
invalid, outdated or not available.  
Activating/deactivating the wrong  
way warning  
In some regions, the system may not be  
available or only partially available.  
Depending on national-market version, the  
wrong way warning is automatically acti-  
vated whenever you start driving.  
196  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
–
–
In the case of navigation data that is  
invalid, outdated or not available.  
Warning function  
The Wrong Way Warning is dis-  
It may not be possible to use the system  
in all regions.  
played and an acoustic signal sounds  
when your vehicle is traveling in the  
wrong direction on a highway, roundabout,  
or one-way street, for example.  
No Turn on Red function  
Warnings are displayed on the Interaction  
Unit and Head-up display, depending on ve-  
hicle equipment.  
Principle  
The No Turn on Red function assists the  
driver by indicating at which traffic lights  
turning on red is prohibited.  
System limits  
To do so, this function analyzes traffic  
lights and traffic signs using the camera  
behind the windshield. In addition, the navi-  
gation system data is used.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision  
warning systems" chapter.  
No warning  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "For-  
ward Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
For example, the wrong way warning sys-  
tem does not issue warnings for roadways  
without traffic signs.  
Functional requirements  
Functional limitations  
The following functional requirements apply  
to the No Turn on Red function:  
The wrong way warning system may be re-  
stricted in the following situations, for ex-  
ample, and will either output an incorrect  
wrong way warning or no warning at all:  
–
The system detects the right-of-way sit-  
uation ahead by analyzing traffic lights  
and traffic signs.  
–
–
When the signage is not clear.  
–
–
Vehicle is less than approx. 164 ft/50 m  
from the traffic lights.  
If the traffic signs are fully or partially  
concealed or soiled.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the  
Traffic Light And Sign Warning is acti-  
vated.  
–
–
–
–
–
–
If the traffic signs are poorly legible or  
rotated.  
If the traffic signs are too small or too  
large.  
Sensors  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to  
the standard.  
The No Turn on Red function is controlled  
by the camera behind the windshield.  
When traffic signs are detected that ap-  
ply to a junction or parallel street.  
Interaction Unit view  
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
If the driver approaches a red traffic  
light with a traffic sign that prohib-  
its turning on red, an indicator light  
is displayed on the Interaction Unit.  
Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state  
is turned on via the Start/Stop switch.  
197  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
The indicator light goes out automatically  
after you drive off at a speed greater than  
approx. 9 mph/15 km/h.  
The Interaction Unit can be used to en-  
able/disable triggering of the Emergency  
Stop Assistant.  
The driver can manually cancel the Emer-  
gency Stop Assistant at any time.  
System limits  
Safety information  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision  
warning systems" chapter.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing one's physical state. An increasing  
lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de-  
tected or not be detected in time. There is  
a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Make sure that the driver is rested  
and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic  
conditions.  
Functional limitations  
The No Turn on Red function may be lim-  
ited in the following situations, for example:  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
If road signs or light signal systems are  
unclear.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems  
are fully or partially concealed or soiled.  
If traffic signs or light signal systems  
are difficult to read or rotated.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for the Emergency Stop Assistant:  
If traffic signs or light signal systems  
are too small or too large.  
If the traffic signs do not correspond to  
the standard.  
–
–
–
The Emergency Stop Assistant is acti-  
vated on the Interaction Unit.  
With intersections with flashing light  
signal systems.  
The system is activated from a speed of  
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
In the case of navigation data that is  
invalid, outdated or not available.  
The Driver Attention Camera detects  
driver activity.  
In some regions, this function may not  
be completely available or not available  
at all.  
Activating/deactivating Emergency  
Stop Assistant  
To activate/deactivate triggering of the  
Emergency Stop Assistant, go through the  
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Safety and warnings" / "Emergency stop".  
Emergency Stop Assistant  
Principle  
The Emergency Stop Assistant assists the  
driver if they are no longer able to drive  
their vehicle safely. When the system is  
triggered, the vehicle is brought to a stop  
in its own lane by the lane keeping system.  
Triggering the Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
If the Emergency Stop Assistant detects  
that the driver is no longer driving their  
vehicle safely or is ignoring warnings, the  
198  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
system is triggered automatically. The trig-  
gered system is displayed on the Interaction  
Unit.  
At standstill  
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the  
Emergency Stop Assistant will apply the fol-  
lowing settings:  
The Interaction Unit can be used to initiate  
an immediate emergency call.  
–
The vehicle is secured against rolling  
away.  
The following is performed automatically  
when the Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-  
gered:  
–
–
The interior lights are switched on.  
The central locking system is unlocked.  
–
–
–
–
A display appears on the Interaction  
Unit.  
Interaction Unit view  
When triggered, the Emergency Stop Assis-  
tant is shown on the Interaction Unit.  
The system takes over vehicle handling  
until the vehicle comes to a standstill.  
The hazard warning system is switched  
on.  
Icon  
Meaning  
An emergency call is triggered when  
stationary, depending on vehicle equip-  
ment.  
The Emergency Stop Assistant  
has triggered.  
The Emergency Stop Assistant can also be  
triggered via voice input.  
System limits  
The Emergency Stop Assistant does not re-  
lease the driver from their obligation to  
drive safely in traffic.  
Additional information:  
MINI Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 49.  
This system may be restricted in the follow-  
ing situations:  
Canceling Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop  
Assistant at any point by taking active con-  
trol of the vehicle.  
–
When the Driver Attention Camera is  
covered by the steering wheel.  
–
When wearing sunglasses with high  
protection against infrared light.  
For instance, the system will be canceled in  
the following situations:  
Cross Traffic Warning with  
brake intervention  
–
–
–
–
With strong countersteering.  
When flashing.  
If the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.  
Principle  
When switching off the hazard warning  
system.  
The Cross Traffic Warning with brake in-  
tervention helps the driver by providing  
visual and acoustic warnings when driving  
through confusing exits or pulling out of  
perpendicular parking spaces.  
–
–
When stopping the system on the Inter-  
action Unit.  
When changing the selector lever posi-  
tion if the vehicle was already station-  
ary.  
The system detects road users approaching  
from the side earlier than would be possible  
from the driver’s seat.  
199  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
If there is a risk of collision when reversing,  
this system provides assistance by perform-  
ing an automatic brake intervention.  
Sensors  
The Cross Traffic Warning is controlled by  
the following sensors:  
–
–
Side radar sensors, rear.  
Depending on whether vehicle is equip-  
ped with side front radar sensors.  
Activating/deactivating Cross  
Traffic Warning  
The system must be activated on the Inter-  
action Unit for the Cross Traffic Warning  
and brake intervention to switch on auto-  
matically.  
The sensors monitor the area behind the  
vehicle.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking".  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
area around the vehicle in front of the vehi-  
cle is monitored as well.  
The system displays a warning light on the  
exterior mirror, for example, when other  
road users are approaching.  
2. Select the desired setting, depending on  
vehicle equipment:  
–
–
–
"Rear warning"  
"Front and rear warning"  
"Brake intervention at rear"  
The cross traffic warning can be activated  
or deactivated on the Interaction Unit.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
Turning on the cross traffic  
warning automatically  
The Cross Traffic Warning must be acti-  
vated on the Interaction Unit. The system  
turns on automatically as soon as Park Dis-  
tance Control or a camera view activates  
and you engage a gear position.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system  
is switched on.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on the equipment, the front sys-  
tem is turned on when a gear position is  
engaged.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
the system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is started.  
200  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Display in the Park Distance Control view  
Turning off the cross traffic  
warning automatically  
The Cross Traffic Warning switches off au-  
tomatically in the following situations, for  
example:  
–
–
When walking speed is exceeded.  
When a certain distance covered is ex-  
ceeded.  
Warning function  
General information  
With the Cross Traffic Warning, the In-  
teraction Unit displays the corresponding  
view, an acoustic signal may sound, and the  
warning light on the exterior mirror flashes.  
In the Park Distance Control view, the re-  
spective boundary area flashes red if vehi-  
cles are detected by the sensors.  
Display in camera view  
When a brake intervention is performed, a  
message displays on the Interaction Unit  
then closes after a short time.  
Visual warning  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
Depending on the direction of travel, the  
view to the front or back is displayed in the  
camera image.  
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in  
the camera image flashes red if vehicles are  
detected by the sensors.  
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of  
your own vehicle.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror  
flashes if the rear sensors detect other vehi-  
cles when the vehicle is reversing.  
Acoustic warning  
In addition to the visual warning of the  
Cross Traffic Warning function, an acoustic  
signal sounds if your vehicle moves in the  
corresponding direction.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
the signal tone will already sound when the  
gear position is engaged.  
201  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
Depending on vehicle equipment, video re-  
cordings can be saved directly to a mobile  
device, e.g., a smartphone or USB stick.  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
The Cross Traffic Warning may be re-  
stricted by the system limits of the sensors.  
Assistance system cameras are used to re-  
cord, e.g., panorama view cameras.  
In addition, the following parameters are  
stored for the trip:  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 34.  
–
–
–
–
Date.  
Time.  
Functional limitations  
The Cross Traffic Warning system may be  
restricted in the following situations:  
Speed.  
GPS coordinates.  
–
–
In tight curves.  
Data protection  
Crossing objects are moving at a very  
slow or a very fast speed.  
The Drive Recorder is permitted to record  
and evaluate video recordings in accordance  
with applicable regulations of the country  
in which the system is to be used. The user  
is responsible for the use of the system and  
compliance with respective applicable regu-  
lations.  
–
–
Other objects that hide cross traffic are  
in the capture range of the sensors.  
If the trailer power socket is occupied  
or trailer towing is activated, the cross  
traffic warning is not available for the  
area behind the vehicle.  
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that  
you verify there are no statutory or regu-  
latory restrictions on using the system in  
your region or country prior to initial use.  
In addition, the laws with respect to use  
of the system should be verified in regular  
intervals, especially when borders are fre-  
quently crossed.  
Drive Recorder  
Principle  
The Drive Recorder stores brief video re-  
cordings your vehicle's surroundings, e.g.,  
to document surrounding traffic. To do so,  
the system must be activated on the Inter-  
action Unit before using it for the first time.  
Other drivers of the vehicle must be in-  
formed about the system. In addition, you  
should inform others about the system  
when giving them the vehicle.  
The Interaction Unit can be used to config-  
ure video recording settings, e.g., recording  
type and duration.  
Functional requirements  
Video recordings can be saved in different  
ways:  
The following functional requirements apply  
for the Drive Recorder:  
–
Automatic storage of recordings makes  
it possible to document the vehicle acci-  
dent or theft using the corresponding  
recording type configured.  
–
Standby or drive-ready state is switched  
on.  
–
–
The Drive Recorder is activated.  
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.  
–
Saving recordings manually helps you  
document traffic situations using your  
set recording type.  
202  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
–
–
The recording type has been selected.  
onds before and after storage is trig-  
gered.  
The recording duration has been se-  
lected.  
–
In the event of theft, the Drive Recorder  
saves recordings after being triggered.  
Recordings are stored depending on the  
setting selected for recording duration.  
The following functional requirements apply  
when using the theft alert:  
–
The theft notification was activated in  
the Data Protection menu or in the  
Drive Recorder menu.  
When the alarm system is triggered, a  
message is sent to the MINI app.  
After saving the recording, the reduced  
quality video can be downloaded to a  
mobile device.  
–
–
Data transfer is activated.  
The MINI app is installed on the mobile  
device.  
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an auto-  
matic recording may be taken.  
–
–
The MINI app is linked to the MINI Con-  
nected account.  
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.  
Manual recording  
Via the button  
Activating/deactivating the Drive  
Recorder  
The Drive Recorder must be activated on  
the Interaction Unit before using the re-  
cording function for the first time.  
1. Go to the Apps menu.  
2. "All"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. Accept the Privacy Policy.  
5. "Settings"  
To start a manual recording with the  
Drive Recorder, press and hold the  
Park Assist key on the switch clus-  
ter.  
6. "Allow recording"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Recordings are made for the set recording  
time or can be ended manually on the Inter-  
action Unit.  
Recording functions  
Starting/stopping an automatic  
recording  
Via the Interaction Unit  
If the vehicle sensors detect an accident or  
theft, the Drive Recorder starts recording  
automatically and then saves this recording.  
To start recording with Drive Recorder in  
the vehicle, go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" / "Start  
recording" / "(vehicle)".  
–
In the event of an accident, the Drive  
Recorder saves recordings up to 30 sec-  
Recordings are made for the set recording  
time and can be stopped manually by rese-  
lecting the menu item on the Interaction  
Unit.  
203  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
The system saves recordings up to 30 sec-  
onds before and after storage is triggered.  
Functional requirements  
When recording on a mobile device, the  
following functional requirements apply for  
the Drive Recorder:  
Recording playback and  
administration  
Video recordings saved by the Drive Re-  
corder can be played, exported, and deleted.  
–
–
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.  
The Drive Recorder is activated.  
When sending recordings to a mobile de-  
vice, the following functional requirements  
apply for the Drive Recorder:  
For your own safety, video recordings  
are only shown on the Interaction Unit  
if the vehicle speed is below approx.  
2 mph/3 km/h. Depending on national-mar-  
ket version, video recordings are only  
shown when the parking brake is applied  
or selector lever position P is engaged.  
–
Depending on vehicle equipment, pair a  
mobile device with the vehicle via Wi-Fi  
and Bluetooth audio, or connect a USB  
stick.  
–
–
–
The MINI app is installed on the mobile  
device.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" /  
"Recordings".  
The MINI app is linked to the MINI Con-  
nected account.  
2. Select the desired recording.  
3. If necessary, select the camera.  
The MINI app is permitted to access  
your photo library.  
Settings  
Starting/ending recording  
To start recording with Drive Recorder on  
a mobile device, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" /  
"Start recording" / "(USB/MINI App)".  
Recording type  
1. To select the recording type for Drive  
Recorder, go through the menu as  
follows: Apps menu / "All" / "Drive  
Recorder" / "Settings".  
Recordings can be stopped manually by re-  
selecting the menu item on the Interaction  
Unit.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Cameras  
Recording time  
Various Drive Recorder cameras can be se-  
lected.  
1. To configure the recording time for  
Drive Recorder, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "All" / "Drive  
Recorder" / "Settings".  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Drive Recorder" /  
"Settings" / "Camera selection".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Recording on a mobile device  
General information  
The length of the video that can be stored  
depends on the available memory capacity  
on the mobile device.  
2. Select your desired camera.  
System limits  
In the event of a serious accident, the Drive  
Recorder may not be able to store record-  
204  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
ings if the damage to the vehicle is too  
great or the power supply was interrupted.  
–
–
–
Automatic brake intervention by For-  
ward Collision Mitigation.  
With USB sticks that have repeatedly been  
overwritten, it may only be possible to ex-  
port recordings in a limited manner.  
Brake power assistance provided by For-  
ward Collision Mitigation.  
Detection of an impending rear collision  
by the Rear-collision warning.  
The preferred file system for USB storage  
is NTFS. Other file systems may have limita-  
tions.  
Safety information  
In case of theft, the recording is only stored  
automatically when the anti-theft warning  
system has been triggered.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to  
the system limits, critical situations might  
not be detected reliably or in time. There  
is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to  
traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traf-  
fic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate  
If the internet connection is weak or cannot  
be established, theft alerts and video down-  
loads may be restricted or not available.  
The quality of the Wi-Fi connection affects  
whether recordings can be saved on your  
smartphone. This function may be restricted  
or not available if the connection is weak.  
PreCrash functions  
Active Protection  
Depending on vehicle equipment and re-  
quirements, Active Protection activates the  
following individual functions in critical  
driving situations:  
Principle  
Active Protection prepares occupants and  
the vehicle for a possible accident in critical  
driving situations.  
–
Automatic closing of the windows.  
The windows remain open with a small  
gap.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, this system consists  
of various PreCrash functions.  
–
–
Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.  
The sun protection is also closed.  
Active Protection is used to detect certain  
critical driving situations that might lead  
to an accident. This includes the following  
critical driving situations:  
Automatic positioning of the backrest  
for the front passenger seat.  
Systems can be returned to the desired set-  
tings following a critical driving situation  
without accident.  
–
–
–
Emergency braking.  
Severe understeering.  
Severe oversteering.  
PostCrash iBrake  
General information  
Certain functions of some vehicle systems  
can lead to Active Protection being trig-  
gered within their system limits:  
Principle  
In certain accident situations, PostCrash  
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle  
205  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
to a stop without any need for the driver  
to intervene. This can reduce the risk of a  
further collision.  
a break. A notice is also displayed on the  
Interaction Unit.  
The break recommendation can be config-  
ured on the Interaction Unit.  
After coming to a halt, the brake is released  
automatically.  
Safety information  
The driver can intervene manually to brake  
the vehicle more sharply or cancel auto-  
matic braking with PostCrash iBrake.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing one's physical state. An increasing  
lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de-  
tected or not be detected in time. There is  
a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Make sure that the driver is rested  
and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic  
conditions.  
Harder vehicle deceleration  
In certain situations, it may be necessary  
to bring the vehicle to a stop more quickly  
than with PostCrash iBrake automatic brak-  
ing.  
To do this, quickly apply extra force to  
the brake. The brake pressure will then be  
higher than the brake pressure generated  
by automatic braking. Automatic braking  
with PostCrash iBrake is canceled.  
Break recommendation  
Function  
After starting a journey, the break recom-  
mendation function is trained to the driver,  
enabling it to detect decreasing alertness or  
fatigue.  
Abort automatic braking  
It may be necessary to cancel PostCrash  
iBrake automatic braking in certain situa-  
tions, e.g., when making an evasive maneu-  
ver.  
Automatic braking can be canceled by do-  
ing as follows:  
This process takes the following criteria  
into account:  
–
By depressing the brake pedal for  
slightly longer.  
–
–
–
Personal driving style, e.g., steering be-  
havior.  
–
By pressing the accelerator pedal for  
slightly longer.  
Driving conditions, e.g., the time or du-  
ration of the drive.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, infor-  
mation from the Driver Attention Cam-  
era.  
Fatigue alert  
This function activates at speeds greater  
than approx. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also  
display a break recommendation.  
Principle  
The Fatigue Alert system can detect when  
the driver is less alert using various criteria.  
The Fatigue Alert break recommendation  
function can detect driver fatigue, e.g., dur-  
ing long, monotonous trips. If necessary,  
the system will recommend that you take  
206  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Safety  
CONTROLS  
–
–
When the road condition is poor.  
In the event of strong side winds.  
Setting break recommendation  
The Distraction Warning from the Fatigue  
Alert system can be turned on or off or con-  
figured.  
Driver Attention Camera  
1. Go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Safety  
and warnings" / "Fatigue Alert".  
Principle  
A camera on the instrument panel monitors  
the driver’s activity and direction of view,  
depending on vehicle equipment.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Despite this function being off, some driver  
assistance systems may issue break recom-  
mendations.  
The assistance systems help drivers by an-  
alyzing whether they are paying attention,  
e.g., by evaluating their head position and  
eyes.  
Display  
If the Fatigue Alert system detects that  
the driver is paying less attention or has  
become fatigued, a message is displayed on  
the Interaction Unit recommending that the  
driver take a break.  
General information  
For full operability, make sure that the field  
of view of the Driver Attention Camera is  
not obstructed.  
During the display, various settings can be  
selected.  
Overview  
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af-  
ter parking the vehicle. A break recommen-  
dation can only be displayed again after this  
time has elapsed.  
System limits  
The Fatigue Alert system may be limited.  
If the system is limited, either no warning  
may be issued or an unwarranted warning  
may be issued.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the in-  
strument panel may have some infrared  
light sources. Depending on the light con-  
ditions, these light sources can be visible  
when the vehicle is in standby mode.  
The break recommendation function may be  
limited in the following situations:  
–
–
If the time is set incorrectly.  
At a predominantly driven speed below  
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
System limits  
The Driver Attention Camera may not be  
fully operational in the following situations:  
–
–
With a sporty driving style such as dur-  
ing rapid acceleration or when corner-  
ing fast.  
In active driving situations such as  
when changing lanes frequently.  
207  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
–
–
When the Driver Attention Camera is  
covered by the steering wheel.  
When wearing sunglasses with high  
protection against infrared light.  
208  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
Vehicle features and options  
Brake assistant  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
The brake assistant automatically applies  
maximum braking assistance when the  
currently available, or may become available brake pedal is depressed quickly. This re-  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
duces the braking distance to a minimum  
for full braking.  
Additional information:  
To make full use of braking assistance, do  
not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal  
during full braking.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Antilock Braking System  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Principle  
The Antilock Braking System prevents lock-  
ing of the wheels during the braking proc-  
ess.  
Principle  
Dynamic Stability Control can be activated  
or deactivated via MINI Modes. Dynamic  
Stability Control helps keep your vehicle  
safely on the road in critical driving situa-  
tions. The drive power is reduced depend-  
ing on the situation, and wheels can be  
braked individually.  
The vehicle maintains its steerability even  
during emergency braking, which increases  
the active driving safety.  
The Antilock Braking System activates au-  
tomatically whenever drive-ready state is  
turned on.  
The Dynamic Stability Control will detect,  
e.g., the following unstable driving condi-  
tions:  
Malfunction  
–
Skidding, which can lead to oversteer-  
ing.  
The warning light illuminates on the  
Interaction Unit.  
–
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels,  
which can lead to understeering.  
A Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
Safety information  
–
–
The Antilock Braking System is not  
available.  
Warning  
The ability to steer is restricted during  
full braking.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
209  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
To activate/deactivate Dynamic Stability  
Control, proceed as follows:  
1.  
2.  
Select Go Kart Mode using the  
MINI Modes switch on the switch clus-  
ter.  
Tap the Settings icon on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
Warning  
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof  
bars, the vehicle's center of gravity is  
higher. This increases the risk of the ve-  
hicle tipping in critical driving situations.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or prop-  
erty damage. Drive with roof load only  
with activated Dynamic Stability Control.  
3. Go through the menu as follows:  
"Driving dynamics" / "DSC OFF".  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
Dynamic Stability Control reactivates auto-  
matically when changing to another drive  
mode.  
Views on the Interaction Unit  
Overview  
If Dynamic Stability Control  
is deactivated, DSC OFF is  
shown on the Interaction Unit.  
Dynamic Stability Control is deacti-  
vated when the indicator light illumi-  
nates.  
When the warning light flashes, Dy-  
namic Stability Control is regulating  
the driving and brake power. The ve-  
hicle is stabilized. Reduce the vehicle speed  
and adjust your driving style to the road  
conditions.  
The MINI Modes switch is located  
on the switch cluster and labeled EX-  
PERIENCE.  
Activating/deactivating Dynamic  
Stability Control  
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated,  
driving stability is restricted when acceler-  
ating and cornering.  
If the warning light illuminates, Dy-  
namic Stability Control has failed or  
is initializing. Driving stabilization  
is restricted or has failed.  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dy-  
namic Stability Control as soon as possible.  
If the warning light illuminates continu-  
ously, have the vehicle checked immedi-  
ately by an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
210  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Activating/deactivating increased  
driving dynamics  
To activate increased driving dynamics, pro-  
ceed as follows:  
Setting for increased driving  
dynamics  
Principle  
For a more dynamic driving experience,  
MINI Modes can be used to increase driving  
dynamics.  
1.  
2.  
Select Go Kart Mode using the  
MINI Modes switch on the switch clus-  
ter.  
Dynamic Stability Control, and thus driving  
stability, are limited while accelerating and  
cornering.  
Tap the Settings icon on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
3. Go through the menu as follows:  
"Driving dynamics" / "SPORT PLUS".  
Overview  
Increased driving dynamics is activated.  
Dynamic Stability Control automatically re-  
activates when changing to another drive  
mode.  
Interaction Unit view  
If increased driving dynamics is acti-  
vated, the Dynamic Stability Control  
indicator light illuminates on the In-  
teraction Unit.  
The MINI Modes switch is located  
on the switch cluster and labeled EX-  
PERIENCE.  
Automatic program change  
Increased driving dynamics deactivates au-  
tomatically in the following situations, for  
example:  
Functional requirement  
To increase driving dynamics, Go Kart  
Mode must be selected via MINI Modes:  
–
–
When the Distance Control is activated.  
In case of a brake intervention by For-  
ward Collision Mitigation. Deactivate  
Forward Collision Mitigation as neces-  
sary.  
–
–
If the suspension control system fails.  
The vehicle has a flat tire.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-  
tervention, refer to page 173.  
211  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
Drive-off support  
Hill Descent Control  
Principle  
Principle  
Drive-off support provides the best possible  
traction when driving off in certain situa-  
tions, e.g., on difficult surfaces like snow or  
sand.  
Hill Descent Control is a downhill control  
feature for vehicles with all-wheel drive.  
This feature adjusts the vehicle speed on  
steep downhill gradients, e.g., when driving  
on unpaved roads.  
This function ensures maximum drive  
power at low speeds with adapted driving  
stability.  
When Hill Descent Control is on, the vehi-  
cle moves at the speed set by the driver,  
without the driver having to depress the  
brake pedal.  
Activating/deactivating the drive-  
off support  
To activate drive-off support, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Drivetrain  
and chassis" / "Activate drive-off support  
once".  
While Hill Descent Control is adjusting the  
speed, the system automatically distributes  
the brake power to the individual wheels.  
Driving stability and steerability are im-  
proved. If necessary, the Antilock Braking  
System prevents the wheels from locking.  
Hill Descent Control can be enabled at  
speeds below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.  
Drive-off support remains on until it is de-  
activated or the driving mode is changed.  
Speeds can be set between ap-  
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h and approx.  
Display  
20 mph/30 km/h. While driving downhill,  
this system reduces the vehicle speed to the  
set value, as physically possible.  
If drive-off support is activated, the  
drive-off support indicator light illu-  
minates on the Interaction Unit.  
Hill Descent Control provides assistance  
when driving in selector lever positions D,  
N, and R.  
ALL4  
Vehicle features and options  
ALL4 is the vehicle's all-wheel-drive sys-  
tem. The interplay between ALL4 and other  
suspension control systems, e.g., Dynamic  
Stability Control, further optimizes vehicle  
traction and driving dynamics.  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market ver-  
sion or the option for later enabling and  
software updates. This also applies to indi-  
vidual functions of the system.  
ALL4 variably distributes the drive force to  
the front and rear axles as required by the  
driving situation and road conditions.  
For information on whether a function is  
currently available in the vehicle or when  
the function can be installed in the vehi-  
cle, contact an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Additional information:  
212  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Increasing or decreasing vehicle  
speed  
Enabling/disabling Hill Descent  
Control  
To activate/deactivate Hill Descent Control,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver assistance" / "Hill Descent Control".  
Using the rocker button for cruise  
control  
On the left side of the steering  
wheel, repeatedly press the rocker  
button up or down until the desired  
speed is set.  
Hill Descent Control is automatically  
disabled at speeds above approx.  
25 mph/40 km/h.  
–
Press the rocker button up or down to  
gradually increase or decrease the set  
speed.  
While Hill Descent Control is regulating the  
vehicle speed, the following functions are  
deactivated:  
–
Press the rocker button up/down and  
hold it until the desired speed is  
reached.  
–
Forward Collision Mitigation with Brake  
Intervention.  
–
The emergency braking function of Ac-  
tive Park Distance Control.  
Using the brake pedal  
While Hill Descent Control is adjusting the  
speed, the target speed set can be reduced  
by depressing the brake pedal.  
Additional information:  
–
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake  
intervention, refer to page 173.  
Malfunction  
If Hill Descent Control malfunctions, a  
Check Control message is displayed on the  
Interaction Unit.  
–
Active Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 258.  
Display  
The chosen set speed is dis-  
played on the Interaction Unit  
together with the Hill Descent  
Control icon.  
Servotronic  
Servotronic is a speed-dependent steering  
support.  
–
The display illuminates  
green when the system is  
on. Hill Descent Control  
decelerates the vehicle.  
The system provides the steering force with  
more support at low speeds than at higher  
ones. This makes it easier to park, for in-  
stance, and makes steering firmer when  
driving at faster speeds.  
–
The display illuminates gray when the  
system is in standby.  
The steering force adapts to the drive mode  
to convey a firm, sporty feel or a comforta-  
ble steering response.  
Display in the Head-up display  
The status of Hill Descent Control can also  
be shown on the Head-up display.  
213  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Driver assistance systems  
Vehicle features and options  
Speed Limit Info  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Speed Limit Info  
Principle  
Speed Limit Info uses a camera near the  
interior rearview mirror to detect road signs  
at the edge of the road as well as overhead  
sign posts.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Speed Limit Info shows the current speed  
limit on the Interaction Unit and, where ap-  
plicable, Head-up display.  
Speed warning  
Speed Limit Info may also show speed limits  
that apply to routes that are not signposted  
if the navigation system has current map  
data.  
Principle  
The speed warning can be used to set a  
speed limit. A warning will be issued when  
this speed limit is exceeded.  
General information  
Traffic signs with extra icons are consid-  
ered and compared with the vehicle's on-  
board data. Depending on the situation, traf-  
fic signs can either be displayed or ignored  
on the Interaction Unit and, where applica-  
ble, Head-up display.  
General information  
Another speed warning is given when the  
set speed limit is exceeded again after it has  
dropped by 3 mph/5 km/h.  
Settings  
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly,  
current map data for the country in which  
the vehicle is operated must be downloaded.  
The Speed Limit Warning can be activated  
or deactivated. In addition, the speed limit  
for the warning can be configured.  
For information on the current map version  
and map updates, see Map update in the  
Navigation system chapter.  
1. To configure the settings, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Safety and warnings" /  
"Speed warning".  
Without map data, the system is subject to  
certain technical limitations. Traffic signs  
with speed limitations are detected and dis-  
played only. Speed limits due to entering  
towns/cities, highway signs, etc., are not  
displayed. Speed limits with extra traffic  
signs are always displayed.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
214  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Warning signals  
–
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-  
tainment, and Communication, refer to  
page 6.  
Depending on the settings, an acoustic sig-  
nal sounds if the detected speed limit is  
exceeded or the speed limit changes. The  
display also flashes if the detected speed  
limit is exceeded.  
Safety information  
Settings  
Warning  
Individual settings can be configured for  
Speed Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if  
the speed is exceeded or the permissible  
maximum speed changes.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
1. To configure the settings for Speed  
Limit Info, go through the menu as  
follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Driving" / "Speed Limit Assistant".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
System limits  
Sensors  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
The system is controlled by a camera be-  
hind the windshield.  
–
Camera, refer to page 34.  
Display  
Functional limitations  
Speed Limit Info  
Speed Limit Info may be restricted and pro-  
vide incorrect information in the following  
situations:  
Icon  
Description  
Current speed limit.  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Traffic signs are fully or partially con-  
cealed by objects, stickers, or paint.  
Depending on the national-  
market version, it is possi-  
ble to switch between the  
units of measurement.  
Traffic signs do not comply with the  
standard.  
In areas that are not included in the nav-  
igation system map data.  
No data on current speed  
limit available.  
If navigation system map data is invalid,  
outdated, or unavailable.  
Speed Limit Info not availa-  
ble.  
When roads deviate from the navigation  
such as due to changes in road layout.  
When driving very close to the vehicle  
in front of you.  
215  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
–
When passing buses or trucks with traf-  
fic signs applied to them.  
Safety information  
–
–
In case of electronic traffic signs.  
Warning  
When traffic signs that are valid for a  
parallel road are detected.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
–
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
Speed control systems  
Principle  
The speed control systems provide assis-  
tance while driving, for example, by limiting  
your speed, maintaining your distance, or  
keeping your vehicle in its lane.  
Overview  
These systems are operated using the but-  
tons on the steering wheel.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Speed control system information is dis-  
played on the Interaction Unit.  
Turn last active speed control  
system on/off.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the speed  
control systems include the following indi-  
vidual systems:  
Interrupt and continue speed  
control systems.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
–
–
–
Cruise Control, refer to page 218.  
Distance Control, refer to page 221.  
Store current speed.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to  
page 227.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept  
suggested speed manually.  
–
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 233.  
Set speed.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the individual systems are  
enhanced with additional functions.  
Turning on/selecting speed control  
systems  
Some functions can be operated via voice  
control.  
Additional information:  
1.  
To activate the speed control sys-  
tem, press the on/off button on the left  
side of the steering wheel. The Interac-  
MINI Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 49.  
216  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
tion Unit contains a toolbar with availa-  
ble speed control systems.  
–
–
"SPORT PLUS": Upon activating the in-  
creased driving dynamics setting.  
When performing a manual braking  
process.  
2.  
To select a different speed con-  
trol system while this system is active,  
repeatedly press the MODE button on  
the left of the steering wheel until the  
desired system is displayed on the tool-  
bar on the Interaction Unit.  
Interrupting speed control systems  
manually  
Speed control systems can be stopped man-  
ually.  
The system is shown in white when the  
system can be activated.  
–
Press the on/off button on the  
left side of the steering wheel.  
The system is shown in green when it can  
be activated.  
The system is grayed out if the system has  
failed or if the functional requirements are  
not met.  
–
Press the MODE button on the  
left side of the steering wheel.  
The speed control system has been stopped.  
Icon  
Speed control system  
Cruise control.  
Continuing speed control systems  
To resume the speed control system,  
press the on/off button on the left  
side of the steering wheel.  
Distance control.  
The speed control system will resume.  
Assisted Driving Mode: Cruise  
Control with Distance Control,  
Steering Assistance with lane  
keeping.  
Switching off speed control  
systems  
Speed control systems can be switched off  
manually.  
Interrupting speed control systems  
automatically  
Depending on the system, speed control  
systems are interrupted automatically, for  
instance in the following situations:  
To turn off the speed control system,  
press and hold the on/off button on  
the left side of the steering wheel  
until the indicators go out.  
The speed control systems have been  
switched off.  
–
–
–
When changing from selector lever posi-  
tion D to P, N, or R.  
Speed control systems switch off automati-  
cally when drive-ready state is switched off.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regu-  
lates driving stability.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is disa-  
bled.  
Adjusting speed values  
The speeds for the speed control systems  
can be adjusted on the steering wheel.  
217  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
On the left side of the steering  
wheel, repeatedly press the rocker  
button up or down until the desired  
Cruise Control  
Principle  
value is set.  
With the Cruise Control, the buttons on the  
left of the steering wheel can be used to  
adjust your set speed. The system maintains  
the set speed. The system accelerates and  
brakes automatically as needed.  
–
Each time the rocker button is pressed  
to the resistance point, the set speed in-  
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
–
Each time the rocker button is pressed  
past the resistance point, the set  
speed changes by a maximum of  
5 mph/10 km/h.  
Cruise control information is shown on the  
Interaction Unit.  
General information  
Cruise control can be activated starting  
from a vehicle speed of 20 mph/30 km/h.  
Interaction Unit view  
Displaying the set speed  
Depending on the vehicle setting, the  
Cruise Control settings can change under  
certain conditions. For instance, the accel-  
eration can change depending on the driv-  
ing mode.  
The speed set for the speed  
control system is shown below  
the speedometer. The color in-  
dicates the system status.  
–
The speed value illumi-  
nates green when a speed  
control system is acti-  
vated.  
Safety information  
Warning  
–
–
The speed value illuminates gray when  
the system is interrupted.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
If no value is displayed, the system  
turns off.  
Notifications  
Messages are displayed for some functions  
on the Interaction Unit in addition to the  
corresponding speed control system indica-  
tor lights.  
1. To configure the notification scope, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" /  
"Notifications".  
Warning  
The use of the system can lead to an in-  
creased risk of accidents in the following  
situations, for instance:  
2. Select the desired setting.  
218  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
–
–
–
On winding roads.  
For vehicles equipped with Distance Con-  
trol: Change the Cruise Control mode to  
Cruise Control without Distance Control.  
With high traffic volume.  
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or  
wet conditions, or on a loose road  
surface.  
In vehicles without distance control: turn  
on the Cruise Control with the buttons on  
the steering wheel.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or prop-  
erty damage. Only use the system if driv-  
ing at constant speed is possible.  
1.  
2.  
To switch on Cruise Control,  
press the on/off button on the left side  
of the steering wheel.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted  
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Ad-  
just the set speed to the traffic conditions.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and ac-  
tively intervene where appropriate  
To switch on Cruise Control,  
press the MODE button on the left side  
of the steering wheel repeatedly until  
Cruise Control is selected.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed  
is maintained and stored as desired speed.  
The indicator lights on the Interaction Unit  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer  
is set to the current speed.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control activates when cruise control  
is switched on.  
Additional information:  
Turn last active speed control  
system on/off.  
Distance Control, refer to page 221.  
Interrupt and continue speed  
control systems.  
Turning the speed control system  
off/interrupting  
The speed control system can be turned off  
or canceled automatically or manually.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Store current speed.  
Additional information:  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept  
suggested speed manually.  
Speed control systems, refer to page 216.  
Adjusting the speed  
Store/maintain speed  
Set speed.  
The speed can be maintained and stored  
using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
Turning on the Cruise Control  
Cruise Control can be switched on as fol-  
lows:  
Press the rocker button on the left  
side of the steering wheel up or  
219  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
down once while the system is stopped.  
Continuing cruise control  
At the stored speed  
When cruise control is switched on, the  
current speed is maintained and saved as  
the desired speed.  
Warning  
The saved speed is shown on the speedome-  
ter.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted  
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Ad-  
just the set speed to the traffic conditions.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and ac-  
tively intervene where appropriate  
If the Speed Limit Assistant is off, you can  
also save your current speed with the press  
of a button.  
Press the SET button on the left side  
of the steering wheel.  
An interrupted cruise control can be contin-  
ued by calling up the stored speed. The dif-  
ference between the current speed and the  
stored speed should be as little as possible.  
Changing the speed  
The speed can be changed with the buttons  
on the steering wheel.  
To resume Cruise Control while the  
system is stopped, press the on/off  
button on the left side of the steer-  
ing wheel.  
On the left side of the steering  
wheel, repeatedly press the rocker  
button up or down until the desired  
speed is set.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored  
values.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and  
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when  
the road is clear.  
In the following cases, the stored speed  
value is deleted and cannot be called up  
again:  
The maximum speed that can be set de-  
pends on the vehicle.  
–
–
When the system is switched off.  
Press rocker button to resistance point and  
hold: The vehicle accelerates or decelerates  
without the accelerator pedal being pressed.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
At the current speed  
After the rocker button is released, the ve-  
hicle maintains the final speed achieved.  
Pressing the switch beyond the resistance  
point causes the vehicle to accelerate more  
rapidly.  
To continue using the cruise con-  
trol at the current speed, press the  
rocker button up or down on the left  
side of the steering wheel.  
Speed Limit Assistant: at the  
suggested speed  
To apply the speed suggested by the  
Speed Limit Assistant to the Cruise  
Control, press the SET button on the  
left of the steering wheel.  
220  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Views on the Interaction Unit  
Distance control  
Displaying the set speed  
Principle  
With the distance control, a distance to a  
vehicle driving ahead can be adjusted in  
addition to the Cruise Control.  
The speed set for the speed  
control system is shown below  
the speedometer. The color in-  
dicates the system status.  
The distance can be adjusted at several lev-  
els. For safety reasons, it depends on the  
respective speed.  
–
The speed value illumi-  
nates green when a speed  
control system is acti-  
vated.  
The system maintains the set speed on clear  
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes au-  
tomatically.  
–
–
The speed value illuminates gray when  
the system is interrupted.  
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the  
system adjusts the speed of the vehicle so  
that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is  
maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as  
the given situation allows.  
If no value is displayed, the system  
turns off.  
Indicator light  
Distance Control is operated using the but-  
tons on the left of the steering wheel. The  
distance is set using the Interaction Unit.  
The cruise control status is also  
given by the indicator light on the  
Interaction Unit. The indicator light  
illuminates green when the system is acti-  
vated.  
Distance Control information is shown on  
the Interaction Unit.  
General information  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, some  
speed control system information can also  
be displayed on the Head-up display.  
If the preceding vehicle brakes to a stand-  
still and drives off again shortly afterward,  
Distance Control is capable of detecting this  
as far as given conditions allow.  
Otherwise, drive off independently such as  
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by  
pressing the button for the speed setting on  
the steering wheel.  
System limits  
Depending on the drive mode or drive  
power, the vehicle may exceed or drop be-  
low the set desired speed in some situa-  
tions, e.g., when driving uphill or downhill.  
Safety information  
Do not use Cruise Control when towing.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
221  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
–
–
–
When approaching a slowly moving  
vehicle at speed.  
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own  
lane.  
When approaching stationary vehi-  
cles at speed.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and ac-  
tively intervene where appropriate  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move  
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Be-  
fore leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle  
against rolling away.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-  
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-  
lowing:  
–
–
Set the parking brake.  
Turn last active speed control  
system on/off.  
On uphill grades or on downhill  
slopes, turn the front wheels in the  
direction of the curb.  
Interrupt and continue speed  
control systems.  
–
On uphill grades or on downhill  
slopes, also secure the vehicle, for in-  
stance with a wheel chock.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept  
suggested speed manually.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted  
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Ad-  
just the set speed to the traffic conditions.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and ac-  
tively intervene where appropriate  
Set speed.  
Sensors  
Distance Control is controlled by the follow-  
ing sensors:  
Warning  
–
–
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Risk of accident is greater when there is  
a high speed differential to other vehicles,  
for instance in the following situations:  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 34.  
Application range  
Distance Control is best when used on well-  
maintained roads.  
222  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The maximum speed that can be set is lim-  
ited and depends, for example, on the vehi-  
cle and the vehicle equipment.  
Interrupting Cruise Control with  
Distance Control automatically  
Cruise Control with Distance Control is in-  
terrupted automatically in the following sit-  
uations, for example:  
The system can also be activated when sta-  
tionary.  
Do not use Cruise Control and Distance  
Control when towing.  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
When performing a manual braking  
process.  
When selector lever position D is disen-  
gaged.  
Turning on Cruise Control with  
Distance Control  
Switch on Cruise Control with Distance  
Control using the buttons on the steering  
wheel.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is disa-  
bled.  
"SPORT PLUS": When the setting for en-  
hanced driving dynamics is enabled.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regu-  
lates driving stability.  
1.  
2.  
To switch on Cruise Control  
with Distance Control, press the on/off  
button on the left side of the steering  
wheel.  
When the driver’s seat belt and driver’s  
door are opened.  
If the system has not detected objects  
for an extended period, for instance on a  
road with very little traffic without curb  
or shoulder markings.  
If necessary, press the MODE  
button on the left side of the steering  
wheel repeatedly until Distance Control  
is selected.  
–
–
If the detection range of the radar is  
impaired, for instance by contamination  
or heavy precipitation.  
Cruise Control with Distance Control is ac-  
tive. The current speed is maintained and  
stored as desired speed.  
After a longer stationary period when  
the vehicle has been braked to a stop by  
the system.  
The selected distance to a vehicle driving  
ahead is maintained.  
Turning the speed control system  
off/interrupting  
The speed control system can be turned off  
or canceled automatically or manually.  
The indicator lights on the Interaction Unit  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer  
is set to the current speed.  
The driving mode changes or Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control activates when Distance Con-  
trol is switched on.  
Additional information:  
Speed control systems, refer to page 216.  
Adjusting the speed  
The speed can be set with the buttons on  
the steering wheel.  
Additional information:  
Cruise control, refer to page 218.  
223  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Continuing cruise control while  
driving  
Distance  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted  
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Ad-  
just the set speed to the traffic conditions.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and ac-  
tively intervene where appropriate  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to  
the system limits, deceleration can be late.  
There may be a risk of accidents or risk of  
damage to property. Be aware of the sur-  
rounding traffic situation at all times. Ad-  
just the distance to the traffic and weather  
conditions and maintain the prescribed  
safety distance, possibly by braking.  
An interrupted cruise control can be contin-  
ued by calling up the stored speed. The dif-  
ference between the current speed and the  
stored speed should be as little as possible.  
Additional information:  
Adjusting the distance  
Cruise control, refer to page 218.  
1. To adjust the distance, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" / "Driver  
Assistance" / "Driving" / "Distance  
control" / "Distance".  
Continuing cruise control while  
vehicle is stationary  
If the cruise control is stopped, the driver  
may need to confirm their intention to drive  
off in certain situations.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
The displays show the following:  
Automatic adaptation of the distance  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, Distance Control can  
be configured to automatically adjust the  
distance to the preceding vehicle within the  
set distance. The system analyzes the traffic  
situation and ambient conditions, e.g., poor  
visibility.  
The speed set for the speed  
control system is shown in  
gray below the speedometer.  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
To have the distance adjusted automatically,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Distance  
control" / "Situational distance control".  
Cruise control can be continued as follows:  
–
Pressing the accelerator pedal.  
–
Press the rocker button on the  
left side of the steering wheel.  
–
Press the button on the left side  
of the steering wheel.  
224  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Indicator lights and warning lights  
Changing between Cruise Control  
with/without Distance Control  
Icon  
Description  
Safety information  
Indicator light illuminates white:  
No Distance Control because ac-  
celerator pedal is being pressed.  
Warning  
The system does not react to traffic driv-  
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains  
the stored speed. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
the set speed to the traffic conditions and  
brake as needed.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
Vehicle has been detected ahead  
of you.  
The vehicle icon goes out if no  
vehicle has been detected ahead  
of you.  
Indicator light flashes green:  
Changing over the Cruise Control  
mode  
Preceding vehicle has driven off.  
Indicator light flashes gray:  
To switch between cruise control with/  
without Distance Control, go through the  
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Driving" / "Distance control" / "Switch to  
Cruise Control".  
Conditions are not adequate for  
the system to work.  
The system was deactivated but  
applies the brakes until you ac-  
tively resume control by pressing  
on the brake pedal or accelerator  
pedal.  
The setting is reset when the vehicle is  
parked.  
Warning light flashes red and  
acoustic signal sounds:  
Views on the Interaction Unit  
Displaying the set speed  
Brake and make an evasive ma-  
neuver, if necessary.  
The speed set for the speed  
control system is shown below  
the speedometer. The color in-  
dicates the system status.  
Assisted View  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, in Assisted View,  
Distance Control information is shown in  
the central display area on the Interaction  
Unit.  
–
The speed value illumi-  
nates green when a speed  
control system is acti-  
vated.  
Additional information:  
–
–
The speed value illuminates gray when  
the system is interrupted.  
Assisted View, refer to page 150.  
If no value is displayed, the system  
turns off.  
225  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Detection range  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Set speed  
Depending on vehicle equipment, some  
speed control system information can also  
be displayed on the Head-up display.  
Distance information  
The distance information icon ap-  
pears when the distance from the  
preceding vehicle is too short.  
The vehicle sensors detect the traffic situa-  
tion in their detection range.  
The distance information is active in the  
following situations:  
The sensor detection capability and auto-  
matic braking power are limited.  
–
–
–
–
Cruise Control with Distance Control is  
switched off.  
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not  
be detected.  
The view on the Head-up display is se-  
lected.  
Deceleration  
Distance Control does not decelerate in the  
following situations:  
Distance to preceding vehicle is too  
short.  
Vehicle speed is greater than approx.  
40 mph/70 km/h.  
–
For pedestrians or similarly slow-mov-  
ing road users.  
Additional information:  
–
–
For cross traffic.  
Head-up display, refer to page 137.  
For oncoming traffic.  
System limits  
Merging vehicles  
System limits of the sensors  
Distance Control is subject to the system  
limits of the sensors.  
Additional information:  
–
–
Cameras, refer to page 34.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 35.  
Distance Control may not be able automati-  
cally restore your chosen distance if a pre-  
ceding vehicle suddenly cuts into your lane.  
It may not be possible to restore the se-  
lected distance in certain situations, includ-  
ing if you are driving significantly faster  
than vehicles driving ahead of you, for in-  
226  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
stance when rapidly approaching a truck.  
CONTROLS  
Driving off  
When a vehicle has been detected ahead  
of you, the system requests that the driver  
intervene by braking and making an evasive  
maneuver, if needed.  
Your vehicle cannot drive off automatically  
using Distance Control in the following sit-  
uations, for example:  
–
–
–
On steep uphill grades.  
In front of bumps in the road.  
With a heavy trailer.  
Cornering  
In these cases, step on the accelerator  
pedal.  
Weather  
Under unfavorable weather or light condi-  
tions, Distance Control may be limited in  
the following ways:  
–
–
Poorer vehicle detection.  
Short-term interruptions for vehicles  
that are already recognized.  
When Distance Control is on, if your set  
speed is too high for a bend, your vehicle  
will be slowed slightly in the bend. Because  
curves may not be anticipated in advance,  
drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current  
surrounding traffic situation. If necessary,  
intervene actively, for instance by braking,  
steering or making an evasive maneuver.  
Distance Control has a limited detection  
range. Situations can arise in tight curves  
where a vehicle driving ahead will not be  
detected or will be detected very late.  
Drive power  
Depending on the drive mode or drive  
power, the vehicle may exceed or drop be-  
low the set desired speed in some situa-  
tions, e.g., when driving uphill or downhill.  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Principle  
Assisted Driving Mode enhances Distance  
Control with Steering Assistance and lane  
keeping. The system assists the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane. For  
this purpose, the system executes support-  
ing steering movements, for instance when  
cornering.  
When you approach a curve the system may  
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due  
to the bend of the curve. If the system  
decelerates you may compensate for it by  
briefly accelerating. After releasing the ac-  
celerator pedal the system is reactivated  
and controls speed independently.  
Assisted Driving Mode is operated using  
the buttons on the steering wheel.  
227  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Depending on vehicle speed, Assisted Driv-  
ing Mode orients itself using the lane mark-  
ings or preceding vehicles.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Sensors in the steering wheel detect  
whether the steering wheel is being  
touched.  
Turn last active speed control  
system on/off.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, the Driver Attention  
Camera on the instrument panel monitors  
whether the driver is paying attention.  
Interrupt and continue speed  
control systems.  
Select the desired speed control  
system.  
System information is given in the Interac-  
tion Unit views and indicated the steering  
wheel LEDs.  
Store current speed.  
If a lane boundary is crossed, the system  
issues a warning by vibrating the steering  
wheel. The steering wheel vibration inten-  
sity can be adjusted.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept  
suggested speed manually.  
Set speed.  
Safety information  
Sensors  
Warning  
Assisted Driving Mode is controlled by the  
following sensors:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
–
–
–
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, via  
the front, side radar sensors.  
–
Depending on vehicle equipment, via  
the rear, side radar sensors.  
–
–
The sensors in the steering wheel.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version, the Driver At-  
tention Camera on the instrument panel.  
The Cruise Control and Distance Control  
alerts also apply.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
–
–
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 34.  
–
–
Cruise control, refer to page 218.  
Distance Control, refer to page 221.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to  
page 207.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for Assisted Driving Mode:  
228  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
–
Depending on vehicle equip-  
ment, the speed must be be-  
low 130 mph/210 km/h or  
110 mph/180 km/h.  
The indicator light illuminates gray  
when the system is ready and not  
performing any steering movement.  
The indicator light illuminates green  
when the system is activated.  
–
–
–
–
The lane is sufficiently wide.  
Hands are on the steering wheel rim.  
The bend radius is sufficiently large.  
When this system is on, Forward Collision  
Mitigation and, depending on vehicle equip-  
ment, the Side Collision Warning activate.  
The vehicle is driving in the center of  
the lane.  
–
The sensor system calibration process is  
complete.  
Stopping Assisted Driving Mode  
automatically  
Assisted Driving Mode automatically inter-  
rupts steering support in the following sit-  
uations, for example:  
–
–
Distance Control is active.  
The seat belt on the driver's side is fas-  
tened.  
–
–
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.  
–
Depending on vehicle equipment: at  
speeds greater than 130 mph/210 km/h  
or 110 mph/180 km/h.  
The side-collision warning must be ac-  
tive, depending on vehicle equipment.  
–
If the vehicle is equipped with a trailer  
hitch, use the Interaction Unit to config-  
ure the settings and specify whether the  
vehicle is towing a trailer or rear carrier,  
respectively.  
–
–
–
–
After releasing the steering wheel.  
With a strong steering intervention.  
When leaving own lane.  
When the turn signal is switched on  
or, depending on the vehicle equipment,  
when the driver turns the steering  
wheel while the turn signal is switched  
on.  
Additional information:  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 316.  
–
–
Lane is too narrow.  
Switching on Assisted Driving  
Mode  
If a lane boundary is not detected and  
there is no vehicle driving in front.  
–
–
The Cruise Control with Distance Con-  
trol is interrupted.  
1.  
To switch Assisted Driving Mode  
on, press the on/off button on the left  
side of the steering wheel.  
The seat belt on the driver's side is un-  
fastened.  
The indicator light illuminates gray  
when the system is ready and not  
performing any steering movement.  
2.  
If necessary, press the MODE  
button on the left side of the steering  
wheel until Assisted Driving Mode is se-  
lected on the Interaction Unit toolbar.  
System activates automatically as soon as  
all function conditions are fulfilled.  
System activates automatically as soon as  
all function conditions are fulfilled.  
The status of Assisted Driving Mode is dis-  
played on the Interaction Unit.  
229  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Views on the Interaction Unit  
Icon  
Description  
Warning light illuminates yellow:  
Icon  
Description  
Hands are not grasping the steer-  
ing wheel. The system is still ac-  
tive.  
Indicator light illuminates gray:  
The system is ready.  
Grab the steering wheel with your  
hands.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
The system is activated.  
Warning light illuminates red,  
acoustic signal sounds:  
The system supports the driver  
in keeping the vehicle within the  
lane.  
The hands are not on the steering  
wheel or, depending on the vehi-  
cle equipment and national-mar-  
ket version, the driver's line of  
sight is not directed at the sur-  
rounding traffic. System interrup-  
tion is imminent.  
Warning light flashes yellow and  
steering wheel vibrates:  
A lane boundary has been  
crossed.  
Warning light illuminates yellow  
and acoustic signal sounds:  
The system reduces the speed to a  
standstill if applicable.  
System interruption is imminent.  
It is possible that the system will  
not execute any supporting steer-  
ing movements.  
Warning light flashes red and  
acoustic signal sounds:  
The system is switched off or will  
be interrupted very soon.  
Immediately grasp the steering  
wheel with your hands and pay at-  
tention to the surrounding traffic.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, a Check Control mes-  
sage is displayed on the instrument panel  
if the Driver Attention Camera detects that  
the driver is inattentive.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, in Assisted View, As-  
sisted Driving Mode information is shown  
in the central display area on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 150.  
230  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Displays on the steering wheel  
System limits  
General information  
Assisted Driving Mode cannot be activated  
or used meaningfully in certain situations,  
e.g., when towing a trailer.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Similar to the displays for Assisted Driving  
Mode on the Interaction Unit, the two LEDs  
above the keypads on the steering wheel  
illuminate.  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too  
late, incorrectly, or without cause. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Actively intervene as warranted.  
Refer to the information in this Owner’s  
Manual regarding the scope of the sys-  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
1. To turn the steering wheel displays  
on/off, go through the menu as  
follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Feedback via steering wheel" / "Light  
elements".  
The Cruise Control and Distance Control  
alerts also apply.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Additional information:  
–
–
Cruise control, refer to page 218.  
Distance Control, refer to page 221.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, Assisted  
Driving Mode information can also be  
shown on the Head-up display.  
System limits of the sensors  
Assisted Driving Mode is subject to the sys-  
tem limits of the sensors.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
Additional information:  
–
–
–
Cameras, refer to page 34.  
1. To adjust the steering wheel vibra-  
tion intensity, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Feedback via steering wheel" /  
"Vibration intensity".  
Radar sensors, refer to page 35.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to  
page 207.  
Hands on the steering wheel  
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering  
wheel contact in the following situations:  
2. Select the desired setting.  
This setting is applied to all collision warn-  
ing systems.  
–
–
Driving with gloves.  
Protective covers on the steering wheel.  
231  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
Weather  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
With unfavorable weather or light condi-  
tions, Assisted Driving Mode may be lim-  
ited as follows:  
–
Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane  
boundaries.  
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and  
the use of this function may be prohibited  
or limited. Before use, check federal, state,  
and local laws.  
–
Short-term interruptions in case of al-  
ready detected vehicles and lane boun-  
daries.  
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also ap-  
ply.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current  
surrounding traffic situation. If necessary,  
intervene actively, for instance by braking,  
steering or making an evasive maneuver.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 227.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
to the Lane Change Assistant:  
Lane Change Assistant  
–
The functional requirements for As-  
sisted Driving Mode have been met.  
Principle  
The Lane Change Assistant also performs  
slight steering interventions to assist the  
driver when changing lanes on multilane  
roads.  
–
Driving on a highway-like road without  
pedestrians or cyclists. The road is also  
structurally separated from oncoming  
traffic, e.g., guard rails.  
The Lane Change Assistant is turned on/off  
using the Interaction Unit and operated us-  
ing the indicator stalk.  
–
A vehicle has been detected at a suffi-  
cient distance behind your own vehicle  
since beginning the drive.  
System information is shown on the Inter-  
action Unit.  
–
–
Crossable lane boundaries are detected.  
Vehicle speed is max. approx.  
110 mph/180 km/h.  
General information  
The Lane Change Assistant uses the As-  
sisted Driving Mode sensors.  
–
–
The minimum speed is country-specific.  
If the vehicle is equipped with a trailer  
hitch, use the Interaction Unit to config-  
ure the settings and specify whether the  
vehicle is towing a trailer or rear carrier,  
respectively.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Additional information:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
–
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to  
page 227.  
–
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer  
to page 316.  
232  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Turning the Lane Change Assistant Views on the Interaction Unit  
on/off  
Icon  
Description  
To turn the Lane Change Assistant on/off,  
go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Automatic  
Lane Change" / "Automatic Lane Change".  
Steering wheel icon and lane  
change arrow icon are green:  
The system carries out a lane  
change.  
Steering wheel icon is green and  
line for lane marking on respec-  
tive side is gray:  
Changing lanes  
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits  
changing lanes.  
The system detected the lane  
change request. Lane change not  
currently possible.  
2. To change lanes with Lane Change As-  
sistant, press the turn signal lever in the  
desired direction to the resistance point.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment,  
the turn signal lever can also be pressed  
beyond the resistance point.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, in Assisted View,  
Lane Change Assistant information is  
shown in the central display area on the  
Interaction Unit.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 150.  
System limits  
The limits of the Assisted Driving Mode  
system apply.  
Additional information:  
Supporting steering movement in the de-  
sired direction can be felt a short time later.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 227.  
After the lane change, the system helps  
keep the vehicle in the new lane.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The lane change can be canceled by steer-  
ing movement into the opposite direction or  
by operating the turn signal in the opposite  
direction.  
Principle  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus provides assis-  
tance when driving in traffic queues on  
highways.  
The system increases driving comfort in  
suitable driving situations.  
Sensors in the steering wheel detect  
whether the steering wheel is being  
touched.  
233  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is turned on/off  
using the Interaction Unit.  
Overview  
Sensors  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is controlled by  
the following sensors:  
System information is given in the Interac-  
tion Unit views and indicated the steering  
wheel LEDs.  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Safety information  
Side radar sensors, front.  
Side radar sensors, rear.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
The sensors in the steering wheel.  
Driver Attention Camera.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 34.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
to Assisted Driving Mode Plus:  
–
–
Assisted Driving Mode Plus must be  
available in the country in which the  
vehicle is driven.  
Warning  
The functional requirements for As-  
sisted Driving Mode have been met.  
This system is only intended for use on  
roads with structural separation from on-  
coming traffic, e.g., highways. Because of  
the system limits, the system can also re-  
main active on roads without structural  
separations and may not react as expected.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or prop-  
erty damage. Deactivate the system if it  
is enabled on roads without structural sep-  
arations.  
Assisted Driving Mode is active and the  
LED displays on the steering wheel are  
switched on.  
–
Driving on a highway-like road without  
pedestrians or cyclists. The road is also  
structurally separated from oncoming  
traffic, e.g., guard rails.  
–
–
–
–
Lane boundaries are detected.  
The lane is sufficiently wide.  
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and  
the use of this function may be prohibited  
or limited. Before use, check federal, state,  
and local laws.  
The bend radius is sufficiently large.  
The navigation system must clearly  
identify the road and vehicle position.  
–
–
This function must be available on the  
road on which the vehicle is driving.  
The Assisted Driving Mode alerts also ap-  
ply.  
Do not allow antennas on the roof to  
become covered, e.g., by roof loads or  
snow.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 227.  
234  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
–
The Driver Attention Camera on the  
instrument panel detects whether the  
driver is paying attention to surround-  
ing traffic.  
Views on the Interaction Unit  
Icon  
Description  
Indicator light green: system is  
active.  
–
–
–
A vehicle has been detected ahead of  
you.  
Vehicle speed must be less than approx.  
40 mph/60 km/h.  
Indicator light gray: the system  
has been interrupted and will ac-  
tivate automatically as soon as all  
functional requirements are met.  
If the vehicle is equipped with a trailer  
hitch, use the Interaction Unit to config-  
ure the settings and specify whether the  
vehicle is towing a trailer or rear carrier,  
respectively.  
White indicator light: the system  
can be activated.  
Additional information:  
Displays on the steering wheel  
–
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to  
page 227.  
–
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer  
to page 316.  
Switching Assisted Driving Mode  
Plus on/off  
To turn Assisted Driving Mode Plus on/  
off, go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Assisted  
Driving Plus" / "Assisted Driving Plus".  
The two LEDs above the keypads on the  
steering wheel illuminate depending on the  
situation.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus is automatically  
offered when Assisted Driving Mode is ac-  
tive and all functional requirements for As-  
sisted Driving Mode Plus have been met.  
–
The LEDs on the steering wheel illumi-  
nate green when Assisted Driving Mode  
Plus is active.  
–
The LEDs on the steering wheel illumi-  
nate yellow when the system is inter-  
rupted.  
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the  
steering wheel.  
The indicator light on the Interaction Unit  
is shown in green.  
Grab the steering wheel with your  
hands.  
The system begins to assist the driver with  
vehicle control.  
–
The LEDs on the steering wheel illumi-  
nate red when the system is deactivated.  
When the system is switched on, the follow-  
ing functions are enabled:  
Grab the steering wheel immediately  
with your hands.  
–
–
Forward Collision Mitigation.  
Side collision mitigation.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to page 227.  
235  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
–
–
–
–
Cruise control.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, Assisted  
Driving Mode Plus information can also be  
shown on the Head-up display.  
Distance Control.  
Assisted Driving Mode.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus.  
The speed value is suggested as the new  
desired speed to be applied. To apply the  
speed value, the corresponding system must  
be activated.  
System limits  
The system limits of the following systems  
apply:  
–
–
–
Assisted Driving Mode.  
Driver Attention Camera.  
Sensors of the vehicle.  
Depending on the equipment, destination  
system and national-market version, the  
value can be applied automatically.  
Additional information:  
Safety information  
–
–
–
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to  
page 227.  
Warning  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to  
page 207.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 34.  
Speed Limit Assistant  
Principle  
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving  
at the speed limit. You can have speeds  
suggested by the Speed Limit Assistant  
adopted by your vehicle's speed control sys-  
tems.  
Warning  
The Speed Limit Assistant is turned on/off  
using the Interaction Unit and operated us-  
ing the buttons on the steering wheel.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted  
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Ad-  
just the set speed to the traffic conditions.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and ac-  
tively intervene where appropriate  
Suggested speeds can be adjusted by enter-  
ing tolerances.  
System information is shown on the Inter-  
action Unit.  
General information  
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed  
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed  
limit, this new speed value can be applied  
for the following systems:  
236  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Icon  
Function  
Detected change of a speed limit  
with immediate effect.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Depending on the national-market  
version, it is possible to switch  
between the units of measure-  
ment.  
Accept suggested speed man-  
ually.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
The detected speed limit can be  
applied with the SET button.  
Set speed, refer to Cruise Con-  
trol.  
After it has been applied, a green  
checkmark is displayed.  
Turning Speed Limit Assistant  
on/off  
Automatic adoption  
1. To configure the settings for Speed  
Limit Assist, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Driving" / "Speed Limit Assistant".  
"Adjust automatically": Distance Control au-  
tomatically adopts any detected speed limits  
when driving on roads with barriers sepa-  
rating traffic in opposing directions.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
It may not be possible to use this function  
when driving with a trailer.  
–
"Adjust automatically": depending on  
the equipment, detected speed limits  
are applied automatically.  
After automatic adoption, the SET  
button on the left side of the steer-  
ing wheel can be pressed to switch  
–
–
"Adjust manually": detected speed  
limits can be applied manually.  
back to the last value set for desired speed.  
"Show current limit": Current speed  
limits are displayed on the Interac-  
tion Unit without being applied.  
Manual adoption  
A detected speed limit can be applied man-  
ually to the active speed control system.  
–
"Off": depending on the national-mar-  
ket version, Speed Limit Info and  
Speed Limit Assistant will be turned  
off.  
When the SET icon is displayed,  
press the SET button on the left side  
of the steering wheel.  
If necessary, other anticipatory com-  
fort functions will be turned off.  
Additional information:  
Speed adjustment  
General information  
Speed Limit Info, refer to page 214.  
Views on the Interaction Unit  
A message is displayed on the Interaction  
Unit when the Speed Limit Assistant and a  
speed control system activate.  
Speed Limit Assist can be configured to  
adopt the speed limit 1:1 or with a toler-  
ance.  
237  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and  
an additional speed adaptation for speed  
limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be set up.  
–
–
–
System limits of Speed Limit Info, refer  
to page 215.  
System limits of the sensors, refer to  
page 34.  
The additional speed adaptation for speed  
limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be acti-  
vated or deactivated.  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer  
to page 316.  
Setting the speed adjustment  
1. To adjust the speed for Speed Limit  
Assist, go through the menu as  
Adapting the speed to the  
route  
follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Driving" / "Speed Limit Assistant".  
Principle  
The cruise control can be configured to au-  
tomatically adjust the vehicle speed to the  
route when Distance Control is active.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
–
–
–
"Adjust speed limits": Set a tolerance  
for a speed adjustment. This toler-  
ance applies to all speed limits.  
For instance, the speed will be reduced in  
the following situations as necessary:  
"2nd adjustment up to ": Activate or  
deactivate additional speed adjust-  
ment.  
–
–
–
–
Before making turns.  
Before a roundabout.  
Before a curve.  
"Adjust speed limits": First activate  
additional speed adjustment, then  
set a tolerance for speed limits up  
to 40 mph/60 km/h.  
In front of an exit ramp on highways or  
highway-like roads.  
This function is operated via the Interaction  
Unit.  
System limits  
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed  
Limit Info system.  
Safety information  
Note the system limits for Speed Limit Info.  
Warning  
Speed limits cannot be applied automati-  
cally when using Cruise Control without  
Distance Control.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer  
hitch, the speeds to be adopted are limited  
to the trailer towing speed set on the Inter-  
action Unit.  
Additional information:  
238  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, As-  
sisted Driving Mode, and Speed Limit Assist  
alerts also apply.  
Adjusting the cornering speed  
The cornering speed can be adjusted de-  
pending on national-market version.  
Additional information:  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Driving" / "Route  
speed control" / "Cornering speed".  
–
–
–
Cruise control, refer to page 218.  
Distance Control, refer to page 221.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to  
page 227.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
–
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 236.  
Views on the Interaction Unit  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
when adapting vehicle speed to the route:  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, in Assisted View,  
Route-Ahead Assistant information is  
shown in the central display area on the  
Interaction Unit.  
–
–
–
Cruise Control and Distance Control are  
activated.  
Additional information:  
Driving on a highway or highway-like  
road.  
Assisted View, refer to page 150.  
Guidance is activated in the navigation  
system.  
System limits  
Depending on national-market version or  
the country in which the vehicle is cur-  
rently being driven, the Route-Ahead Assis-  
tant may not be available.  
The use of navigation software via  
Apple CarPlay or Android Auto may lead  
to functional limitations, for instance  
deviations with navigation instructions.  
The system does not react or reacts to a  
limited extent to the route ahead in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
–
–
The function must be available in the  
country in which the vehicle is driven.  
If the vehicle is equipped with a trailer  
hitch, use the Interaction Unit to config-  
ure the settings and specify whether the  
vehicle is towing a trailer or rear carrier,  
respectively.  
–
If the vehicle location cannot be clearly  
determined by the navigation system.  
–
On wintry roads.  
Additionally, the limits for Cruise Control,  
Distance Control, Assisted Driving, and  
Speed Limit Assist systems apply.  
Additional information:  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 316.  
Additional information:  
–
–
–
Cruise control, refer to page 218.  
Distance Control, refer to page 221.  
Adapting speed automatically to  
route  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to  
page 227.  
To activate/deactivate automatic speed ad-  
justment, go through the menu as fol-  
lows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Driving" /  
"Route speed control" / "Adjust speed  
automatically".  
–
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 236.  
239  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for lane changes when destination guidance  
is active:  
Lane change with active guid-  
ance  
Principle  
–
–
–
–
–
–
Cruise Control and Distance Control are  
activated.  
Lane change with active guidance assists  
the driver when lane changes are necessary  
to reach a destination. A notice is also dis-  
played on the Interaction Unit. In addition,  
a slight jerk can be felt on the steering  
wheel.  
Driving on a highway or highway-like  
road.  
A situation-dependent minimum speed  
has been reached.  
The system detects a sufficiently large  
gap in traffic in the adjacent lane.  
This function is turned on/off using the In-  
teraction Unit.  
A crossable lane boundary on the side of  
the desired lane change is detected.  
General information  
When route guidance is active, the Lane  
Change function uses the Assisted Driving  
Mode sensors.  
Destination guidance is active on the  
navigation system.  
The function is not available when using  
navigation software via Apple CarPlay or  
Android Auto.  
Safety information  
–
–
The function must be available in the  
country in which the vehicle is driven.  
Warning  
The Driver Attention Camera on the  
instrument panel detects whether the  
driver is paying attention to surround-  
ing traffic.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
–
If the vehicle is equipped with a trailer  
hitch, use the Interaction Unit to config-  
ure the settings and specify whether the  
vehicle is towing a trailer or rear carrier,  
respectively.  
Additional information:  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 316.  
The Cruise Control, Distance Control, and  
Assisted Driving alerts also apply.  
Switching lane change on/off with  
active destination guidance  
Additional information:  
–
–
–
Cruise control, refer to page 218.  
Distance Control, refer to page 221.  
To turn the Lane Change Assistant on/off  
while guidance is on, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Driving" /  
"Lane Guiding with Navigation" / "Lane  
Guiding with Navigation".  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to  
page 227.  
240  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Switching the steering wheel jerk  
Interaction Unit view  
on/off  
Icon  
Function  
To enable/disable the steering wheel jerk  
for Lane Change Assistant, go through the  
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Driving" / "Lane Guiding with Navigation" /  
"Steering wheel impulse".  
Indicates a necessary lane  
change. The icon varies depend-  
ing on the traffic situation.  
A green checkmark on the icon  
indicates that the function is ac-  
tive.  
Changing lanes  
A red cross on the icon indicates  
that the system cannot assist with  
the lane change.  
If it is necessary to change lanes in order  
to reach a navigation destination, a corre-  
sponding notice is displayed on the Interac-  
tion Unit. In addition, a slight jerk can be  
felt on the steering wheel.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, in Assisted View, the  
traffic situation is shown in the central dis-  
play area on the Interaction Unit.  
To change lanes, follow the instructions on  
the Interaction Unit.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 150.  
1.  
The system detects a suitable  
gap in the flow of traffic in the adjacent  
lane. An icon with a green checkmark  
is displayed on the Interaction Unit. The  
system prepares for the lane change.  
System limits  
The limits of the Cruise Control, Distance  
Control, and Assisted Driving Mode sys-  
tems, and Driver Attention Camera apply to  
the lane change function with active guid-  
ance.  
2. When a suitable gap is detected, the  
speed is adapted so that the vehicle re-  
mains level with the opening.  
3. A Check Control message indicates a  
lane change suggestion.  
Additional information:  
–
–
–
Cruise control, refer to page 218.  
Distance Control, refer to page 221.  
4. When the traffic situation permits a  
lane change, the driver can steer the ve-  
hicle into the next lane.  
Assisted Driving Mode, refer to  
page 227.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the  
Lane Change Assistant, the Lane Change  
Assistant can be started by operating  
the turn signal after the Check Control  
message appears.  
–
Driver Attention Camera, refer to  
page 207.  
5. If necessary, the system automatically  
starts additional lane changes.  
241  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
Parking  
The following camera views can be used  
with the basic version:  
Vehicle features and options  
–
–
–
Rearview camera, refer to page 247.  
Trailer hitch view, refer to page 250.  
Panorama view, rear, refer to page 251.  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, additional  
camera views can be used with parking  
view:  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
–
Semi-automatic camera perspective, re-  
fer to page 248.  
–
Automatic camera perspective, refer to  
page 248.  
Parking assistance systems  
–
–
–
–
–
Side view, refer to page 249.  
Principle  
3D view, refer to page 250.  
With the Park Distance Control display  
and various camera views, the parking as-  
sistance systems help to park, maneuver,  
and reverse the vehicle. Parking assistance  
systems are operated using the Park Assist  
key or via the Parking menu.  
Car wash view, refer to page 251.  
Panorama view, front, refer to page 251.  
Activating panorama view using activa-  
tion points, refer to page 252.  
–
–
Door opening angle, refer to page 253.  
Remote 3D View, refer to page 254.  
When parking or reversing, the following  
individual systems provide active support  
with assistance functions and sensors:  
The individual camera-based systems are  
operated by selecting camera views on the  
Interaction Unit. The camera views can be  
turned on and off by selecting the corre-  
sponding icon. Additional views with park-  
ing assistance lines or obstacle markings  
can be shown.  
–
–
Park Distance Control, refer to page 255.  
Active Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 258.  
–
–
–
–
Drive-off monitoring, refer to page 260.  
Park Assist, refer to page 261.  
Maneuver Assistant, refer to page 267.  
Safety information  
Remote Control Parking, refer to  
page 270.  
Warning  
–
–
Reversing Assistant, refer to page 271.  
Trailer Assistant, refer to page 318.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
Various camera views and camera perspec-  
tives provide excellent visibility of the vehi-  
cle surroundings while parking and maneu-  
vering. Depending on vehicle equipment,  
different camera views are available.  
242  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking".  
2. Select the desired settings.  
Display  
Overview  
Turning display on/off  
Button in the vehicle  
General information  
The parking assistance systems view  
switches off automatically when driving for-  
wards or if a certain distance or speed is  
exceeded.  
With reverse gear  
When drive-ready state is on, the parking  
assistance systems display is automatically  
turned on when you engage selector lever  
position R.  
The Park Assist key is located on the  
switch cluster.  
With the Park Assist key  
To turn on the parking assistance  
system display, press the Park Assist  
key on the switch cluster.  
Sensors  
The parking assistance systems are control-  
led by the following sensors:  
–
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear  
bumpers.  
On the Interaction Unit  
To turn on the parking assistance systems  
display, go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Parking".  
–
–
–
–
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
Front camera.  
Exterior mirror cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Interaction Unit view  
General information  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 34.  
The parking assistance system view on the  
Interaction Unit varies depending on vehi-  
cle equipment and the active parking assis-  
tance system.  
Calling up Park menu  
Some parking assistance systems can be set  
individually in the Park menu.  
1. To bring up the Parking menu, go  
through the menu as follows: Apps  
243  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
Assistance view  
Camera image  
Depending on the equipment, one or more  
cameras capture the area from different se-  
lectable perspectives.  
Depending on the view, the vehicle's sur-  
roundings or a part of it is depicted.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
either the automatic or the semi-automatic  
camera perspective is displayed.  
Selecting a camera view  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Selecting a camera view  
Vehicle top view  
Camera image  
Depending on vehicle equipment, various  
camera views can be selected at the top of  
the Interaction Unit:  
Settings  
–
–
"Parking"  
Toolbar, bottom  
Depending on vehicle equipment, cam-  
era views or the Park Distance Control  
view are displayed.  
Status of parking assistance systems  
Parking view  
"Assistance"  
A stylized top view of the vehicle is dis-  
played.  
–
–
"Panorama"  
The cross traffic view is displayed.  
"3D"  
A three-dimensional view of the vehicle  
is displayed.  
–
–
"Trailer hitch"  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Selecting a camera view  
The view shows the zoom onto the  
trailer hitch.  
Selection window  
"Car wash"  
Automatic camera perspective  
Semi-automatic camera perspective  
Side view  
Your own lane can be displayed to make  
it easier to drive into a car wash.  
Camera image  
Settings  
Settings  
Various settings are provided on the right  
side of the Interaction Unit:  
Toolbar, bottom  
–
Depending on national-market ver-  
sion, the acoustic warning for Park Dis-  
tance Control can be turned on/off.  
Status of parking assistance systems  
–
Settings can be configured in the  
Parking menu.  
244  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Toolbar, bottom  
Icon  
Meaning  
Parking Assistant functions are displayed  
on the bottom toolbar:  
No search for parking assistance  
system offers.  
–
Available parking methods of the Auto-  
matic Parking Assistant.  
No other parking assistance sys-  
tems available.  
–
–
–
–
Functions of the Back-up Assistant.  
Functions of the Maneuver Assistant.  
Trailer Assistant functions.  
Parking assistance systems have  
failed.  
Searching for parking assistance  
system offers is active.  
Additional information in case of mal-  
functions.  
White: an available maneuver  
is selected but is not being  
performed. Functional require-  
ments have not been met or the  
function transfer is complete.  
Status of parking assistance systems  
The status of the parking assistance sys-  
tems is indicated by the icons at the bottom  
of the Interaction Unit, near the driving in-  
formation, and on the Head-up display, de-  
pending on vehicle equipment. In addition  
to this icon, supplementary text appears at  
the bottom of the Interaction Unit.  
Green: A parking assistance sys-  
tem is on. Functions are control-  
led depending on the system ac-  
tivated.  
The following parking assistance systems  
are displayed:  
Additional displays  
General information  
Additional views can be shown in the cam-  
era image for the parking assistance sys-  
tems display, e.g., parking aid lines. This  
makes parking and maneuvering easier.  
–
–
–
–
Automatic Parking Assistant.  
Maneuver Assistant.  
Back-up Assistant.  
Trailer Assistant.  
Several additional displays can be active at  
the same time.  
Turning additional displays on/off  
1. To turn additional displays in the cam-  
era view on/off, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Parking".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
245  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
Using parking aid lines  
Parking aid lines  
Pathway lines  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turn-  
ing circle line leads into the boundaries  
of the parking space.  
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the  
green pathway line covers the corre-  
sponding turning circle line.  
Obstacle marking  
The pathway lines help to estimate the re-  
quired space when parking and maneuver-  
ing on level roads.  
Depending on engaged gear position, the  
Interaction Unit camera view provides path-  
way lines in front of or behind the vehicle.  
The pathway lines are continuously ad-  
justed to the steering movements depend-  
ing on the steering-wheel angle.  
The sensors detect obstacles when parking.  
Obstacles detected by Park Distance Control  
are shown and marked in the camera view  
on the Interaction Unit.  
Turning circle lines  
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings  
in green, yellow and red indicate the distan-  
ces.  
Functional limitations  
The parking assistance systems can only be  
used to a limited extent in the following  
situations:  
–
–
–
With a door open.  
With open cargo area.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
The Interaction Unit camera view includes  
turning circle lines that show the path with  
the smallest possible turning circle on a  
level road.  
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in  
the camera image identify areas that are  
currently not shown such as an open door.  
Only one turning circle line is displayed  
after the steering wheel is turned past a  
certain angle.  
Turning circle lines can only be superim-  
posed on the camera image together with  
pathway lines.  
246  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
The malfunctioning camera's detection  
range is shaded.  
System limits  
Safety information  
Rearview camera  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too  
late, incorrectly, or without cause. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Actively intervene as warranted.  
Refer to the information in this Owner’s  
Manual regarding the scope of the sys-  
tem’s operation and limitations.  
Principle  
The rearview camera helps when reverse  
parking and maneuvering. The area behind  
the vehicle is shown in the camera view on  
the Interaction Unit. The rearview camera  
turns on when reversing and can be oper-  
ated via the Interaction Unit or Park Assist  
key.  
Additional displays can be shown on the  
camera view, e.g., parking assistance lines  
and obstacle markings.  
System limits of the sensors  
Parking assistance systems may be re-  
stricted by the system limits of the sensors.  
General information  
Additional information:  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 34.  
Field of view  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for the rearview camera:  
Because of the camera angle, the areas un-  
der the vehicle cannot be viewed by the  
cameras.  
–
–
The trunk is fully closed.  
Detection of objects  
The camera area is clean and clear.  
The sensors may not detect very low obsta-  
cles as well as high, protruding objects, e.g.,  
wall ledges.  
Turning the rearview camera  
on/off  
Objects shown on the Interaction Unit may  
be closer than they appear. Do not estimate  
the distance to objects shown on the Inter-  
action Unit.  
Turning the camera view on  
automatically  
The rearview camera is automatically  
turned on if selector lever position R is en-  
gaged while drive-ready state is on.  
The camera's detection range can be limited  
by protruding cargo, a rear carrier, or a  
trailer.  
Turning the camera view off  
automatically  
The rearview camera turns off automatically  
when driving forward or when a certain dis-  
tance or speed is exceeded.  
Malfunction  
A camera failure is indicated on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
247  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
Turning the semi-automatic camera  
perspective on/off  
1.  
To manually turn on the rearview  
camera, press the Park Assist key on the  
switch cluster.  
1.  
To turn on semi-automatic cam-  
era perspective, press the Park Assist  
key on the switch cluster.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
2.  
Select the semi-automatic camera per-  
spective icon in the selection window.  
The rearview camera view is switched  
on.  
To exit the fixed camera view, select an-  
other camera view in the selection window.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: The  
icon for automatic camera perspective is  
automatically selected in the selection  
window.  
Automatic camera perspective  
To exit rearview camera view, select an-  
other camera view in the selection window  
or press the Park Assist key again.  
Principle  
The automatic camera perspective shows a  
steering-dependent view in the respective  
driving direction. This perspective adapts to  
the respective driving situation.  
Deactivated rearview camera  
When the rearview camera is deactivated,  
for instance when the trunk is open, the  
camera image is displayed with gray shad-  
ing.  
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view  
changes to a fixed display of the area in  
front of or behind the bumper, or switches  
to side Park Distance Control as necessary.  
The side Park Distance Control is automat-  
ically displayed when the automatic cam-  
era perspective is turned on. The function  
shows obstacles located next to the vehicle.  
Semi-automatic camera per-  
spective  
The camera perspective can be turned  
on/off using the Interaction Unit.  
Principle  
Depending on the parking direction and en-  
gaged selector lever position, the semi-au-  
tomatic camera perspective shows a fixed  
camera perspective with the areas in front  
of or behind the vehicle.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
The camera perspective can be turned  
on/off using the Interaction Unit.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
248  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Turning the automatic camera  
perspective on/off  
Lateral Parking Aid display  
Turning the camera view on/off  
automatically  
When the parking assistance systems' dis-  
play is turned on, automatic camera per-  
spective is selected automatically.  
The icon for automatic camera perspec-  
tive is automatically selected in the selec-  
tion window.  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the  
vehicle.  
To exit the steering-dependent camera  
view, select another camera view in the se-  
lection window.  
Colored obstacle markings warn the driver  
when obstacles have been detected.  
When reverse gear is engaged, the auto-  
matic camera perspective is, if necessary,  
exited and the system uses a semi-auto-  
matic camera perspective to the rear. If  
necessary, select the automatic camera per-  
spective when reverse gear is engaged. The  
automatic camera perspective will then be  
maintained for the current parking opera-  
tion.  
If no obstacle markings are displayed, no  
obstacles have been detected.  
Limits of the side protection  
The Lateral Parking Aid only displays sta-  
tionary obstacles that were previously de-  
tected by the sensors while passing them.  
The system does not detect whether an ob-  
stacle moves later on. For this reason, at  
standstill, the marks are not shown anymore  
in the display after a certain time. The area  
next to the vehicle must be newly captured.  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
1.  
To turn on automatic camera per-  
spective manually, press the Park Assist  
key on the switch cluster.  
Side view  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
Principle  
2.  
The icon for automatic camera per-  
spective is automatically selected in the  
selection window.  
Side view shows the vehicle's side sur-  
roundings, making it easier to position the  
vehicle at the curb or with other obstacles  
on the side.  
To exit the steering-dependent camera  
view, select another camera view in the se-  
lection window or press the Park Assist key  
again.  
The camera view looks from the rear to the  
front and, if there is a hazard, focuses auto-  
matically on potential obstacles.  
The side view can be turned on/off using  
the Interaction Unit.  
249  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
General information  
Turning the 3D view on/off  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
1.  
To turn on 3D view, press the  
Park Assist key on the switch cluster.  
Turning the side view on/off  
The selection window lets you choose the  
side view for the left or right side of the  
vehicle.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
2. In the upper selection area, select the  
following camera view: "3D".  
To exit 3D view, select another camera view  
from the selection at the top.  
1.  
To turn on side view, press the  
Park Assist key on the switch cluster.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
Trailer hitch view  
2.  
Select the camera icon for the desired  
vehicle side in the selection window.  
Principle  
To exit the side view, select another camera  
view in the selection window.  
To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can  
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.  
Trailer hitch view can be turned on/off us-  
ing the Interaction Unit.  
3D view  
General information  
Principle  
With 3D view, a circle is displayed around  
the vehicle top view in the selection win-  
dow.  
When zooming in, remember that the view  
may no longer show certain obstacles.  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
Fixed perspectives can be selected directly  
on the circular path in the selection win-  
dow, or by swiping the vehicle in the middle  
of the camera image.  
Turning the trailer hitch view  
on/off  
The current perspective is marked with a  
camera icon on the circular path.  
1.  
To turn on trailer hitch view,  
press the Park Assist key on the switch  
cluster.  
3D view can be turned on/off using the In-  
teraction Unit.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
2. In the upper selection area, select the  
following camera view: "Trailer hitch".  
To exit trailer hitch view, select another  
camera view from the selection at the top.  
250  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
To exit car wash view, select another cam-  
era view from the selection at the top.  
Display  
Display  
Two static circle segments are displayed in  
the camera image. These circle segments  
help to estimate the distance of the trailer  
to the trailer hitch.  
Your own lane is displayed for easier driv-  
ing into a car wash.  
A docking line dependent on the steering-  
wheel angle helps with aiming for the  
trailer with the trailer hitch.  
This view can be used to position the ve-  
hicle correctly within the washing system  
guide rails.  
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to  
roll freely forward.  
Car wash view  
Additional information:  
Principle  
The car wash view assists when entering a  
car wash.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to  
page 124.  
This function can be turned on/off using  
the Interaction Unit.  
Panorama View  
General information  
Principle  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
The panoramic view gives you an earlier  
view of crossing traffic at blind driveway  
exits and intersections.  
Turning the car wash view on/off  
Road users concealed by obstacles to the  
left and right of the vehicle can only be de-  
tected relatively late from the driver's seat.  
To provide greater visibility, the front cam-  
era and, depending on vehicle equipment,  
rearview camera cover the side of the vehi-  
cle.  
1.  
To turn on car wash view, press  
the Park Assist key on the switch clus-  
ter.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, this func-  
tion can be used when reversing or driving  
forward.  
2. In the upper selection area, select the  
following camera view: "Car wash".  
251  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
Panorama view can be turned on/off using  
the Interaction Unit.  
Display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, this func-  
tion can be activated automatically by sav-  
ing activation points.  
General information  
The camera image shows different levels of  
distortion in some areas and is thus not  
suitable for distance estimations.  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
Yellow lines on the screen display identify  
the bumpers of your own vehicle.  
When reverse gear is engaged, the revers-  
ing camera view is displayed. Depending on  
vehicle equipment, the front camera view is  
displayed when forward gear is engaged.  
Sensors  
Panorama view is controlled by the follow-  
ing sensors:  
–
–
Rearview camera.  
Depending on if vehicle is equipped  
with front camera.  
Automatic activation of pan-  
orama view  
Turning the panoramic view on/off  
Principle  
Positions at which panorama view should  
switch on automatically can be saved as ac-  
tivation points.  
1.  
To turn on panorama view, press  
the Park Assist key on the switch clus-  
ter.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
Up to ten activation points can be saved and  
edited.  
2. In the upper selection area, select the  
following camera view: "Panorama".  
The activation points can be used when  
driving forward and, depending on national-  
market version, when reversing.  
To exit panorama view, select another cam-  
era view from the selection at the top.  
General information  
Follow instructions in the Parking assis-  
tance systems chapter.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for automatic activation of panorama view:  
252  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
–
–
A GPS signal must be received.  
Editing activation points  
Activation points can be renamed or de-  
leted, individually or collectively.  
Depending on national-market version:  
A MINI ID or driver profile must be acti-  
vated.  
–
–
The reversing camera and front camera  
must be installed.  
1.  
Press the Park Assist key on the  
switch cluster.  
The direction of travel, the selector lever  
position, and the vehicle angle must  
match a stored activation point.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
2. Go through the menu as follows:  
"Panorama" / "Manage points".  
Storing activation points  
A list of all saved activation points is  
displayed.  
Desired activation points can be saved.  
1. Drive your vehicle to the location where  
you want panorama view to switch on  
automatically, then stop.  
–
To edit an activation point, press and  
hold the desired activation point.  
–
To delete an activation point, swipe  
over the desired activation point.  
2.  
Press the Park Assist key on the  
switch cluster.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
Door opening angle  
3. Go through the menu as follows:  
"Panorama" / "Activation point" / "Save  
activation point".  
Principle  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door  
opening angle display is shown automati-  
cally when stationary.  
Activation points are saved with the follow-  
ing information, for example:  
This display helps estimate how far the  
doors can be opened when parking.  
–
–
–
With the city/town.  
With the city/town and the street.  
A default name.  
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking  
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct  
the opening angles of the doors.  
You can rename the location and street in-  
formation created automatically.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
Using activation points  
To enable/disable the use of activation  
points, go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "GPS-  
based".  
253  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
Display  
Sensors  
Remote 3D View is controlled by the follow-  
ing sensors:  
–
–
–
Front camera.  
Exterior mirror cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
The maximum opening angle of the doors is  
displayed in selector lever position P.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for Remote 3D View:  
System limits  
The door opening angle view does not warn  
you of approaching road users.  
–
–
Data transfer must be activated.  
The MINI app must be installed on the  
mobile end device.  
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in  
the display for technical reasons.  
–
In MINI Connected countries, an exist-  
ing MINI Connected account must be  
used to activate a MINI ID.  
Even if no objects are visible in the door  
opening angle view on the Interaction Unit,  
park carefully when near other objects.  
Additional information:  
–
–
Data protection, refer to page 59.  
MINI ID, refer to page 60.  
Because of the perspective, higher, protrud-  
ing objects may be closer than they appear  
on the Interaction Unit.  
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D  
View  
Remote 3D View can be activated or deac-  
tivated individually or together with other  
functions.  
Remote 3D View  
Principle  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Data privacy".  
The MINI app and parking camera views,  
e.g., automatic camera perspective, can be  
used to display the vehicle’s surroundings  
on a mobile device.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
After activating, Remote 3D View can  
be accessed in the MINI app.  
Remote 3D View shows a snapshot of the  
situation.  
Functional limitations  
Remote 3D View may not be fully opera-  
tional or may not be available in the follow-  
ing situations:  
General information  
For reasons of data protection, Remote  
3D View can only be used three times  
within two hours.  
254  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
–
With a door or the cargo area open.  
Dark fields in the display indicate areas  
that are not recorded by the system.  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
–
–
–
–
With manually folded-in exterior mir-  
rors.  
When other camera functions are being  
performed in the vehicle.  
Warning  
The vehicle moves faster than walking  
speed.  
Due to high speeds when the Park Dis-  
tance Control is activated, the warning can  
be delayed due to physical circumstances.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Avoid approaching an object  
too fast. Avoid driving off quickly while  
Park Distance Control is not yet active.  
In case of missing or weak Internet con-  
nection.  
Park Distance Control  
Principle  
Park Distance Control assists with parking.  
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obsta-  
cles in front of or behind the vehicle.  
Sensors  
Park Distance Control is controlled by the  
following sensors:  
–
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear  
bumpers.  
Obstacles that are detected by the side ul-  
trasonic sensors can also be reported.  
–
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
The range of Park Distance Control, depend-  
ing on obstacles and environmental condi-  
tions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.  
Turning Park Distance Control  
on/off  
Park Distance Control turns on and off au-  
tomatically in certain situations: The Inter-  
action Unit is used to enable/disable auto-  
matic activation.  
Turning on the system automatically  
Park Distance Control switches on automat-  
ically in the following situations:  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
–
When drive-ready state is switched on  
when selector lever position R is en-  
gaged.  
–
While approaching detected obstacles  
if the speed is lower than approx.  
Safety information  
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance  
depends on the situation in question.  
Warning  
To activate/deactivate automatic activation  
when obstacles are detected, go through the  
menu as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Parking" / "Automatic PDC activation".  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
255  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
When there are objects in front of and  
behind the vehicle at the same time, at a  
distance smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm,  
an alternating continuous tone will sound  
between the front and rear speakers.  
Turning off the system automatically  
Park Distance Control switches off automat-  
ically when driving forward or if a certain  
distance or speed is exceeded.  
The intermittent tones and the continuous  
tone are turned off when selector lever posi-  
tion P is engaged.  
Turning the system on/off manually  
To manually turn on Park Distance  
Control, press the Park Assist key on  
the switch cluster.  
Depending on national-market version, the  
intermittent tones are switched off after a  
short time when the vehicle is stationary.  
The parking assistance systems view is dis-  
played.  
If an object approaches when the vehicle  
is stationary, the acoustic signal is reacti-  
vated.  
When the LED above the Park Assist key il-  
luminates, the system is on. When the LED  
goes out, the system is off.  
Adjusting the volume  
If the system is manually switched on when  
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview  
camera image is displayed.  
1. To adjust the volume of the acous-  
tic warning, go through the menu  
as follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" /  
"Driving settings" / "Driver Assistance" /  
"Parking" / "PDC signal volume".  
Depending on the national-market version,  
the system cannot be turned off manually  
when the reverse gear is engaged.  
2. Set the desired value.  
Acoustic warning  
General information  
Depending on national-market version:  
Turn off acoustic warning  
An intermittent tone is given as acoustic  
warning for Park Distance Control to signal  
an approaching object. E.g., when an object  
is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a  
sound is heard from the rear left speaker.  
Depending on national-market version, the  
acoustic warning can be turned off while  
performing a parking maneuver.  
Tap the acoustic warning icon on the  
right edge of the Interaction Unit. The icon  
turns gray and the LED below the icon goes  
out.  
The shorter the distance to the object, the  
shorter the intervals of the intermittent  
tones.  
When the Park Distance Control is switched  
on again, the acoustic warning is automati-  
cally switched on again.  
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an  
impending collision at a distance to the ob-  
ject of approx. 27 in/70 cm.  
Visual warning  
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic  
warning is issued as early as a distance to  
the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.  
General information  
When the distance to a detected object is  
less than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous  
tone is sounded.  
If Park Distance Control is activated, the  
Interaction Unit will indicate when the ve-  
hicle is approaching an object.  
256  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Objects that are farther away are already  
displayed before a signal sounds.  
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turn-  
ing circle lines and obstacle markings are  
shown for a better estimation of the space  
required.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sen-  
sor detection range is shown by the shaded,  
ring-shaped area. Green, yellow, and red  
markings indicate when obstacles are de-  
tected within the detection range.  
Example display of warnings next to the ve-  
hicle.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the Cross  
Traffic Warning, a warning is also shown on  
the display for vehicles approaching from  
the side at the rear and front.  
The shaded area indicates the sensor detec-  
tion range.  
If this area is shaded gray, no obstacles  
have been detected within the detection  
range.  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the  
vehicle.  
Colored markings in the shaded area in-  
dicate that obstacles have been detected  
within the detection range.  
Display  
If the shaded area is not continuous, the  
area next to the vehicle has not been scan-  
ned yet.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings  
may be displayed in front of, next to, and  
behind the vehicle.  
System limits  
General information  
The function for protecting the vehicle  
sides only shows stationary obstacles that  
were previously detected by the sensors  
when passing by.  
Park Distance Control does not detect when  
an obstacle moves later. When the vehicle  
is stationary, the gray shaded areas on the  
sides are hidden after a certain time. The  
area on the side of the vehicle must be  
newly captured.  
Example display of warnings behind the ve-  
hicle.  
Also follow the information on system limits  
in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
Trailer towing  
The rear functions of Park Distance Control  
are turned off when towing a trailer or  
when the trailer socket is occupied.  
257  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sen-  
sor detection range is shown by the shaded  
area on the Interaction Unit.  
Active Park Distance Control  
Principle  
Obstacles next to the vehicle are not dis-  
played.  
Active Park Distance Control is the brake  
function of Park Distance Control and ini-  
tiates emergency braking in the event of an  
acute risk of collision.  
Depending on the national-market version,  
the rear functions of Park Distance Control  
remain switched on when trailer towing is  
enabled.  
The system can be used below walking  
speed when reversing or coasting back-  
ward.  
The trailer towing icon is shown on  
the Interaction Unit.  
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be  
prevented under all circumstances.  
Additional information:  
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts  
the brake intervention. Emergency braking  
is not performed.  
Driving with trailer or rear carrier, refer to  
page 316.  
The Interaction Unit can be used to tempo-  
rarily deactivate Active Park Distance Con-  
trol as well as configure the settings for this  
system.  
Unwarranted warnings  
Unwarranted warnings may be given if the  
system limits of Park Distance Control are  
reached.  
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for in-  
stance in car washes, turn off automatic  
Park Distance Control activation on obsta-  
cle detection.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
Safety information  
Malfunction  
If Park Distance Control malfunc-  
tions, the Attention icon appears on  
the Interaction Unit.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sen-  
sor detection range may not be shown.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Park Distance Control has failed. Have the  
vehicle checked by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
258  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Settings  
Warning  
You can configure which areas of your ve-  
hicle to protect with the Park Distance Con-  
trol system.  
When using the trailer hitch, the assis-  
tance system cannot react correctly be-  
cause the sensors are concealed. There  
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-  
age to property. Do not use the driver as-  
sistance system while towing a trailer or  
when using the trailer hitch, e.g., for a rear  
bicycle rack.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "Active  
PDC emergency braking".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Display  
Sensors  
As soon as the system engages, an  
icon is displayed with a correspond-  
ing message.  
Active Park Distance Control is controlled  
by the following sensors:  
–
–
Ultrasonic sensors in rear bumpers.  
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
System limits  
Driving off after emergency  
braking  
After emergency braking to a stop, further  
creeping toward an obstacle is possible.  
Proceed with caution. To move forward,  
lightly press the accelerator pedal and re-  
lease as needed.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
Functional limitation  
Active Park Distance Control cannot be  
used in the following situations, for exam-  
ple:  
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,  
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is  
possible at any time.  
–
While Hill Descent Control is regulating  
the vehicle speed, emergency braking is  
deactivated.  
Deactivating Active Park Distance  
Control temporarily  
After emergency braking, Active Park Dis-  
tance Control can be temporarily deacti-  
vated on the Interaction Unit. A correspond-  
ing message is displayed.  
–
When driving with a trailer.  
If applicable, turn off the system tempora-  
rily, if needed.  
Additional information:  
Hill Descent Control, refer to page 212.  
Go through the menu as follows:  
"Configure" / "Deactivate temporarily".  
No further emergency braking will be per-  
formed in this situation as you continue  
driving.  
The function is automatically reactivated  
when Park Distance Control is switched on  
again.  
259  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
age to property. Do not use the driver as-  
sistance system while towing a trailer or  
when using the trailer hitch, e.g., for a rear  
bicycle rack.  
Drive-off monitoring  
Principle  
In case of a risk of collision, the start-up  
monitoring reduces the drive power when  
driving off.  
Sensors  
Drive-off monitoring is controlled by the  
following sensors:  
When obstacles are detected in close range  
in front of the vehicle, the acceleration will  
be reduced. If necessary, this permits timely  
manual braking.  
–
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear  
bumpers.  
When obstacles are detected behind the ve-  
hicle, the system will brake.  
–
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
Drive-Off Monitoring can be activated/de-  
activated on the Interaction Unit.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for drive-off monitoring:  
You can cancel reduced acceleration, e.g.,  
by pressing the accelerator twice.  
–
Selector lever position D or R is engaged  
when the vehicle is stationary.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
–
Obstacles in the immediate vicinity are  
detected in front of or behind the vehi-  
cle.  
–
–
The accelerator pedal is heavily applied,  
nearly to the end point.  
Safety information  
The accelerator pedal is immediately ap-  
plied after engaging the selector lever  
position and obstacle detection.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
Activating/deactivating Drive-Off  
Monitoring  
To activate/deactivate Drive-Off Monitor-  
ing, go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "Drive off  
monitoring".  
A Check Control message is displayed  
where applicable.  
Depending on national-market version, this  
system turns on automatically for the next  
drive.  
Warning  
When using the trailer hitch, the assis-  
tance system cannot react correctly be-  
cause the sensors are concealed. There  
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-  
260  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
on the objects detected, e.g., parking vehi-  
cles. The system status is displayed.  
Canceling reduced drive power  
The reduction of the drive power is can-  
celed in the following situations:  
The system calculates the best possible  
parking line for driving in or out of park-  
ing spaces, and takes control of the vehicle  
while parking.  
–
–
The accelerator pedal is released.  
After the accelerator pedal has been de-  
pressed completely twice.  
The operating principle and operation of  
Park Assist is divided into the following  
steps:  
–
A specific distance has been traveled.  
If the reduction in drive power is canceled  
by covering a certain distance, the drive  
power is released gradually.  
–
–
–
–
Parking space search.  
Turning on.  
Parking.  
Display  
Driving out of parking spaces.  
As soon as the system engages, an  
icon is displayed with a correspond-  
ing message.  
The parking manoeuver while parking is  
performed automatically.  
When driving out of parallel parking spaces,  
the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it  
reaches a position where it can be driven  
out of the parking space without further  
steering movements.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
When driving out of perpendicular parking  
spaces, the vehicle is maneuvered out of the  
parking space to enable continued driving  
in the desired direction.  
Functional limitation  
Drive-off monitoring is deactivated when  
the trailer power socket is occupied or  
trailer towing is activated, e.g., when using  
a trailer or rear bicycle rack.  
A parking maneuver can be interrupted and  
continued manually.  
Settings can be customized as desired, e.g.,  
to adjust how parking maneuvers are dis-  
played or to set a sound for suitable parking  
spaces.  
Automatic Parking Assistant  
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professio-  
nal increases the comfort and range of uses  
of the Automatic Parking Assistant. In ad-  
dition to the parking methods of the Auto-  
matic Parking Assistant, parking in parking  
spaces that are marked with lines is possi-  
ble. The parking maneuver can also be per-  
formed using Remote Control Parking on a  
smartphone.  
Principle  
Automatic Parking Assistant provides sup-  
port when parallel parking and parking  
transverse to the road.  
In addition, the system makes it easier to  
park out of parallel and perpendicular park-  
ing spaces.  
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides  
of the vehicle when driving slowly forward.  
Suitable parking spaces are calculated based  
261  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
when using the trailer hitch, e.g., for a rear  
bicycle rack.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market ver-  
sion or the option for later enabling and  
software updates. This also applies to indi-  
vidual functions of the system.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surround-  
ing traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
For information on whether a function is  
currently available in the vehicle or when  
the function can be installed in the vehi-  
cle, contact an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Parking methods  
Park Assist supports the following func-  
tions:  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
When parallel parking: Parking in reverse,  
parallel to the road.  
When perpendicular parking: Parking for-  
ward or in reverse, perpendicular to the  
road.  
Warning  
When using the trailer hitch, the assis-  
tance system cannot react correctly be-  
cause the sensors are concealed. There  
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-  
age to property. Do not use the driver as-  
sistance system while towing a trailer or  
262  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
The Automatic Parking Assistant Professio-  
nal is additionally controlled by the follow-  
ing cameras:  
–
–
–
Front camera.  
Exterior mirror cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Functional requirements  
When driving out of parallel parking spaces.  
Measurement of parking spaces  
The following functional requirements apply  
when measuring parking spaces:  
–
Driving forward: up to approx.  
22 mph/35 km/h.  
–
Maximum distance to row of parked ve-  
hicles: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Suitable parking space  
The following functional requirements apply  
for suitable parking spaces:  
When driving out of perpendicular parking  
spaces.  
Longitudinal parking:  
–
Minimum length of detected object, e.g.,  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
–
Minimum length of gap between two  
objects: vehicle length plus approx.  
2.6 ft/0.8 m.  
–
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Perpendicular parking:  
–
–
–
Minimum length of detected object, e.g.,  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
With Park Assist Professional: Parking in  
car parks with parking lines.  
Minimum width of gap: vehicle width  
plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.  
The minimum depth corresponds to your  
vehicle's length.  
Sensors  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is control-  
led by the following sensors:  
The depth of perpendicular parking  
spaces must be estimated by the driver.  
Due to technical limitations, the system  
is only able to approximate the depth of  
perpendicular parking spaces.  
–
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear  
bumpers.  
–
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
Parking lines for Park Assist Professional:  
263  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
The parking space must be clearly marked  
with lines.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Reverse lengthwise parking,  
right.  
Parking operation  
Reverse lengthwise parking,  
left.  
The following functional requirements apply  
when pulling into a parking space:  
–
–
The doors and cargo area are closed.  
The driver’s seat belt is fastened.  
Reverse perpendicular parking.  
Forward perpendicular parking.  
Leaving parking spaces  
The following functional requirements apply  
when pulling out of a parking space:  
Turning parking operation display  
on/off  
When the Automatic Parking Assistant is  
enabled, the parking maneuver is displayed  
in the camera view on the Interaction Unit.  
–
The vehicle was parked using the Auto-  
matic Parking Assistant, and an object  
has been detected in the area around the  
vehicle.  
To turn the parking maneuver display on/  
off, go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Driver Assistance" / "Parking" / "Show  
assistance information".  
–
The vehicle was manually parked in re-  
verse, and objects have been detected  
in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.  
The distance to a detected curb is at  
least 6 inches/15 cm.  
Turning the signal tone on/off  
–
The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m  
longer than the vehicle.  
To turn the signal tone for suitable park-  
ing spaces on/off, go through the menu as  
follows: Apps menu / "Vehicle" / "Driving  
settings" / "Driver Assistance" / "Parking" /  
"Sound when available".  
Displays  
General information  
The current status of the Automatic Parking  
Assistant is shown on the Interaction Unit  
and Head-up display,depending on vehicle  
equipment.  
Parking using the Automatic  
Parking Assistant  
When parking with Park Assist, you must  
select a parking method depending on the  
available parking spaces.  
Various icons are shown when selecting the  
parking method.  
1. For the parking space search when driv-  
ing past parked vehicles at a speed of  
up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a  
distance of max. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
The sequence of the displayed icons corre-  
sponds to the prioritized parking option.  
The direction of the arrow changes for the  
icons for parking methods for driving out of  
a parking space.  
The parking space search is acti-  
vated.  
2.  
Press the Park Assist key on the  
switch cluster or engage reverse gear.  
264  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
4. Follow the instructions on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
The parking space search and possible  
parking spaces are shown on the Inter-  
action Unit.  
The status symbol for the Automatic  
Parking Assistant illuminates green. The  
system takes control of the maneuver.  
3. Select one of the parking methods of-  
fered on the Interaction Unit. You can  
switch to another parking maneuver as  
necessary.  
The speed can be reduced with the  
brake. Other interventions will cancel  
the system.  
A message will be displayed at the end  
of the maneuver.  
The status symbol for the Automatic  
Parking Assistant illuminates green. The  
system takes control of the parking op-  
eration.  
5. Make sure that the traffic situation per-  
mits driving out of parking space and  
driving off as usual.  
4. Follow the instructions on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is  
turned off automatically.  
The speed can be reduced with the  
brake. Other interventions will cancel  
the system.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant manually  
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be  
canceled manually at any time, e.g.:  
Depending on national-market version,  
an intermittent or continuous tone  
sounds for Park Distance Control.  
–
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal  
twice in succession.  
At the end of the parking operation, se-  
lector lever position P is set.  
–
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and  
move the steering wheel slightly at the  
same time.  
The end of the parking maneuver is indi-  
cated on the Interaction Unit.  
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if  
needed.  
–
Depress the brake pedal and operate the  
selector lever at the same time.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is can-  
celed without engaging selector lever posi-  
tion P. Driving can continue immediately.  
Driving out of a parking space  
using the Automatic Parking  
Assistant  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant automatically  
1. Switch on drive-ready state to pull out of  
the parking space using Park Assist.  
Park Assist is canceled automatically in sit-  
uations such as the following:  
2.  
When your vehicle is stopped,  
press the Park Assist key on the switch  
cluster or engage reverse gear.  
–
When the driver grasps the steering  
wheel or takes over steering.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
–
When operating the accelerator pedal or  
the selector lever.  
3. On the Interaction Unit, select the de-  
sired parking method.  
–
–
When setting the parking brake.  
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.  
265  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
–
–
–
–
With open cargo area.  
With open hood.  
No parking assistance  
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not  
offer assistance in the following situations:  
With the doors open.  
–
–
–
–
In tight curves.  
During activation or intervention by  
driver assistance systems.  
For diagonal parking spaces.  
When towing a trailer.  
–
–
When switching to other functions on  
the Interaction Unit.  
Automatic Parking Assistant: for park-  
ing spaces that are only marked with  
lines on the ground. The system orients  
itself according to objects.  
When overlaying messages on the Inter-  
action Unit display.  
–
–
–
On snow-covered or slippery road.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
–
For special parking spaces, e.g., metered  
parking spaces with automatic locking  
mechanisms, or mechanical parking sys-  
tems.  
When there are obstacles that are hard  
to overcome such as curbs.  
–
–
–
When there are obstacles that suddenly  
appear.  
Functional limitations  
Park Assist may be restricted in the follow-  
ing situations:  
With insufficient distances, which are  
indicated by Park Distance Control.  
When a maximum number of parking  
attempts or the time taken for parking is  
exceeded.  
–
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel  
roads.  
–
–
–
On slippery ground.  
When the system is automatically aborted,  
selector lever position P is engaged.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
With accumulations of leaves/snow in  
the parking space.  
A Check Control message is displayed  
where applicable.  
–
–
–
In case of changes to an already-meas-  
ured parking space.  
Continuing the parking operation  
If parking or leaving a parking space has  
been interrupted, the operation can be con-  
tinued, if needed.  
With ditches or edges, for instance an  
edge of a port.  
Parking spaces that are not suitable may  
be detected or suitable parking spaces  
may not be detected at all.  
Restart the Automatic Parking Assistant  
and follow the instructions on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
Malfunction  
System limits  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant has mal-  
functioned. Have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another quali-  
fied service center or repair shop.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
266  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Maneuver Assistant  
Warning  
Principle  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
The Maneuver Assistant provides support  
for recurring parking and maneuvering sit-  
uations.  
Parking and maneuvering operations can be  
recorded and then carried out automatically  
by the system.  
A recurring maneuver is driven manually  
and thereby recorded.  
When the vehicle reaches the activation  
area for the distance covered by the saved  
maneuver, the maneuver can be activated  
on the Interaction Unit.  
After the activation, the system takes con-  
trol of the vehicle and carries out the ma-  
neuver automatically.  
Warning  
When using the trailer hitch, the assis-  
tance system cannot react correctly be-  
cause the sensors are concealed. There  
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-  
age to property. Do not use the driver as-  
sistance system while towing a trailer or  
when using the trailer hitch, e.g., for a rear  
bicycle rack.  
In addition, the parking maneuver can be  
performed using Remote Control Parking on  
a smartphone.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market ver-  
sion or the option for later enabling and  
software updates. This also applies to indi-  
vidual functions of the system.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surround-  
ing traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
For information on whether a function is  
currently available in the vehicle or when  
the function can be installed in the vehi-  
cle, contact an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
267  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
Detection range  
Recording maneuver  
General information  
Up to ten maneuvers can be recorded at  
different locations.  
Up to four overlapping maneuvers can be  
recorded.  
Identical maneuvers under different ambi-  
ent conditions can be recorded such as light  
conditions.  
The detection range for a maneuver is div-  
ided into the following areas:  
For each maneuver, a maximum distance  
covered of 656 ft/200 m is possible.  
–
Proximity range, arrow 1: the system  
will begin with the localization in the  
background within a range of approx.  
26 ft/8 m around the distance covered  
of a stored maneuver.  
In total, a distance covered of approx.  
1,969 ft/600 m distributed to the ten possi-  
ble maneuvers can be recorded.  
Maneuvers with a distance covered of less  
than 20 ft/6 m cannot be recorded.  
–
–
Close range, arrow 2: A saved maneu-  
ver can be displayed on the Interaction  
Unit within a range of approx. 6 ft/2 m  
around the distance covered.  
Recording maneuver  
1. To record a maneuver, drive the vehicle  
to the desired starting point and stop.  
Activation range, arrow 3: The saved  
maneuver can be activated on the Inter-  
action Unit within a range of approx.  
3.5 ft/1 m. After the activation, the sys-  
tem takes control of the vehicle and car-  
ries out the maneuver automatically.  
2.  
Press the Park Assist key on the  
switch cluster.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
3. Start recording the maneuver using the  
Interaction Unit.  
Sensors  
4. Drive the vehicle to the desired end po-  
sition.  
The Maneuver Assistant is controlled by the  
following sensors:  
The maneuver is recorded.  
–
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear  
bumpers.  
When recording a route, do not drive  
faster than 9 mph/15 km/h.  
–
–
–
–
Ultrasonic sensors at the sides.  
Front camera.  
While recording, the distance covered  
will be displayed.  
Exterior mirror cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
When the maximum distance covered or  
the maximum speed is reached, a mes-  
268  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
sage will be displayed and a signal tone  
will sound.  
The Maneuver Assistant is canceled with-  
out engaging selector lever position P. Driv-  
ing can continue immediately.  
5. Once the vehicle is stopped, save the  
recording using the Interaction Unit and  
rename it as necessary.  
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant  
automatically  
The Maneuver Assistant is canceled auto-  
matically in situations such as the follow-  
ing:  
Do not move the vehicle until the re-  
cording has been stored.  
Performing stored maneuver  
–
–
–
When the driver grasps the steering  
wheel or takes over steering.  
1. To perform the stored maneuver, drive  
the vehicle into the activation area  
and stop. The Interaction Unit indicates  
when a saved maneuver can be used.  
When operating the accelerator pedal or  
the selector lever.  
2. Press the icon to select the stored ma-  
neuver.  
When the driver's seat belt is not fas-  
tened.  
The status symbol for the Maneuver  
Assistant illuminates green. After the  
activation, the system takes control of  
the vehicle and carries out the maneu-  
ver automatically. Follow the instruc-  
tions on the Interaction Unit as neces-  
sary.  
–
–
–
–
With open cargo area.  
With open hood.  
With the doors open.  
During activation or intervention by  
driver assistance systems.  
–
–
–
When the system limits of the ultra-  
sonic sensors and cameras are reached.  
The speed can be reduced with the  
brake. Other interventions will cancel  
the system.  
When switching to other functions on  
the Interaction Unit.  
At the end of the parking operation, se-  
lector lever position P is set.  
When overlaying messages on the Inter-  
action Unit display.  
–
–
–
–
–
In case of obstacles.  
Canceling the Maneuver Assistant  
manually  
The vehicle can be controlled manually dur-  
ing an active maneuver by taking the fol-  
lowing actions:  
On snow-covered or slippery road.  
When the lane is too narrow.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
With trailer towing.  
In the event of an automatic cancellation of  
the system, the vehicle is decelerated to a  
complete stop and selector lever position P  
is engaged.  
–
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal  
twice in succession.  
–
Step lightly on the accelerator pedal and  
move the steering wheel slightly at the  
same time.  
An interrupted maneuver can be continued,  
if needed. Restart the Maneuver Assistant  
and follow the instructions on the Interac-  
tion Unit.  
–
Depress the brake pedal and operate the  
selector lever at the same time.  
269  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
The maneuver is performed independently,  
outside the vehicle, using a smartphone.  
This makes it easy to get in and out of the  
vehicle.  
Editing stored maneuvers  
The Interaction Unit can be used to delete  
or rename maneuvers, individually or collec-  
tively.  
When parking in a suitable spot, e.g., a ga-  
rage, you can correct the parking position  
with Remote Control Parking by maneuver-  
ing slightly.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
A maneuver that has already been started  
can be continued at any time with Remote  
Control Parking.  
Functional limitations  
The Maneuver Assistant does not provide  
support when towing a trailer.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market ver-  
sion or the option for later enabling and  
software updates. This also applies to indi-  
vidual functions of the system.  
System limits can cause functional limita-  
tions such as in the following situations:  
–
–
–
With poor GPS reception.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
For information on whether a function is  
currently available in the vehicle or when  
the function can be installed in the vehi-  
cle, contact an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
In case of recorded maneuvers where  
the system minimum distance to objects  
cannot be maintained.  
–
Greatly deviating conditions when stor-  
ing and driving the distance covered,  
for instance other tires or changed am-  
bient conditions like light conditions or  
weather.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
–
–
Delayed display of overlapping stored  
maneuvers when driving into the activa-  
tion area.  
General information  
Note the information in the Automatic Park-  
ing Assistant and Maneuver Assistant chap-  
ter.  
In multi-story parking garages, for re-  
cordings at different parking levels, or  
for recordings that run over several  
parking levels.  
Protect the smartphone against unauthor-  
ized use.  
The low-beam headlights are switched on  
for the duration of the maneuver.  
Remote Control Parking  
A parking maneuver offered by Park Assist  
Professional is only available for Remote  
Control Parking for a short time after exit-  
ing the vehicle.  
Principle  
With Remote Control Parking, the vehicle  
can be driven remotely when parking and  
maneuvering using the Maneuver Assistant  
and Park Assist Professional.  
270  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
System limits  
The following functional requirements apply Due to ambient conditions, e.g., impaired  
for Remote Control Parking:  
Bluetooth connection transmission due to  
external faults, Remote Control Parking may  
be interrupted.  
–
–
–
All occupants have left the vehicle.  
The doors and cargo area are closed.  
If the power supply of the vehicle battery is  
not sufficiently ensured, e.g., due to exces-  
sive discharge, Remote Control Parking may  
not be available. Follow the instructions on  
the MINI app.  
The smartphone is compatible with Re-  
mote Control Parking.  
–
–
–
–
The MINI app must be installed on a  
compatible smartphone.  
The MINI app must be linked to a MINI  
Connected account.  
It may not be easy to maneuver into a park-  
ing space. The function is offered on the  
MINI app but cannot be used due to ambi-  
ent conditions.  
Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart-  
phone.  
The distance between vehicle and  
smartphone is no greater than approx.  
19 ft/6 m.  
Back-up assistant  
–
A valid digital key must be set up for the  
vehicle, then recognized without issue.  
Principle  
Additional information:  
The Back-up Assistant helps when revers-  
ing, e.g., when pulling out of tight or un-  
clear parking or road situations.  
Digital key, refer to page 83.  
The vehicle stores the driving movements  
of the last distance covered. This stored  
distance can be driven in reverse with auto-  
mated steering.  
Parking with Remote Control  
Parking  
1. To perform the parking maneuver with  
Remote Control Parking, engage selec-  
tor lever position P.  
The Reversing Assistant takes control of  
steering. The driver must control the speed  
using the accelerator and brake pedals.  
2. Leave the vehicle and close the doors  
and cargo area.  
With Back-up Assistant: a maximum dis-  
tance of 164 ft/50 m is saved.  
3. Open Remote Control Parking in the  
MINI app and maneuver forward or  
backward, or select the desired parking  
method.  
With Back-up Assistant Professional: a max-  
imum distance of 656 ft/200 m is saved.  
4. Follow the instructions on the smart-  
phone.  
Vehicle features and options  
This system may not be available in the  
owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected op-  
tional equipment, the national-market ver-  
sion or the option for later enabling and  
software updates. This also applies to indi-  
vidual functions of the system.  
Stop the vehicle manually if obstacles  
are present.  
Depending on the option selected in the  
MINI app, either the vehicle is parked  
at the end of the parking maneuver or  
control of the vehicle is given back to  
the driver.  
271  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
For information on whether a function is  
currently available in the vehicle or when  
the function can be installed in the vehi-  
cle, contact an authorized service center or  
another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surround-  
ing traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for the Reversing Assistant:  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking as-  
sistance systems" chapter.  
–
Drive forward without interruption to  
store the distance covered.  
Safety information  
–
To store the distance covered, do not  
drive faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.  
Warning  
–
–
No trailer towing.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-  
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the  
limits of the system, it cannot independ-  
ently react to all traffic situations. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
ditions. Watch the surrounding traffic sit-  
uation closely, be ready to take over steer-  
ing and braking at any time, and actively  
intervene where appropriate.  
Back-up Assistant Professional: suffi-  
ciently bright light conditions on the  
saved route.  
–
Back-up Assistant Professional: the cam-  
eras on the vehicle must be clean and  
clear.  
Driving in reverse with automated  
steering  
1. To reverse with automatic steering,  
switch on drive-ready state.  
Warning  
2.  
When your vehicle is stopped,  
press the Park Assist key on the switch  
cluster or engage reverse gear.  
When using the trailer hitch, the assis-  
tance system cannot react correctly be-  
cause the sensors are concealed. There  
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-  
age to property. Do not use the driver as-  
sistance system while towing a trailer or  
when using the trailer hitch, e.g., for a rear  
bicycle rack.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
3. On the bottom toolbar, select the follow-  
ing function: "Back-up Assistant".  
The length of the saved distance is dis-  
played on the Interaction Unit.  
Follow the instructions on the Interac-  
tion Unit as necessary.  
272  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Parking  
CONTROLS  
–
–
After an extended period of time when  
the vehicle is stationary.  
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel  
and carefully drive in reverse with the  
accelerator pedal and the brake.  
When exiting the stored lane when  
reversing, for instance with maximum  
steering-wheel angle.  
The status symbol for the Back-up  
Assistant illuminates green. The system  
takes over the steering.  
–
When overlaying messages on the Inter-  
action Unit display.  
When driving in reverse, observe the  
vehicle's surroundings.  
–
–
In case of a slippery surface.  
In case of obstacles, stop immediately  
and take over control of the vehicle. Fol-  
low the instructions for Park Distance  
Control.  
When the vehicle is rolling such as on a  
slope.  
–
–
In case of changed ambient conditions.  
When the trailer power socket is occu-  
pied or when trailer towing is activated.  
5. Right before the end of the stored dis-  
tance covered, a signal tone will sound  
and a message is displayed.  
–
–
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
6 mph/10 km/h.  
Stop no later than when normal road  
traffic is reached and take control of the  
vehicle such as by shifting to forward  
gear.  
Reversing Assistant Professional: if sen-  
sor functionality is limited beyond ap-  
prox. 164 ft/50 m.  
System limits  
Speed threshold  
The maximum speed when reversing is lim-  
ited to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
manually  
The assisted reversing by the Back-up As-  
sistant can be canceled manually:  
–
On the bottom toolbar, select the follow-  
ing function: "Cancel".  
A warning is issued at a speed of approx.  
4 mph/7 km/h.  
–
Press the Park Assist key on the  
switch cluster.  
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the  
function is interrupted.  
Functional limitations  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
automatically  
The Reversing Assistant is canceled auto-  
matically in situations such as the follow-  
ing:  
Different influences can lead to side devia-  
tions when driving the stored distance cov-  
ered in reverse. For example, this includes  
the following factors:  
–
Steering movements when the vehicle  
is stationary while storing the distance  
covered.  
–
–
–
When the driver grasps the steering  
wheel or takes over steering.  
When shifting from reverse gear to an-  
other selector lever position.  
–
–
The speed is not adapted to the distance  
covered.  
During activation or intervention by  
driver assistance systems.  
Certain road characteristics such as gra-  
dients, inclines or slippery road surface.  
273  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
–
–
Greatly deviating conditions when stor-  
ing and driving the route, for instance  
other tires or changed ambient condi-  
tions like weather.  
Light conditions changed for Back-up  
Assistant Professional.  
Also follow the information on system limits  
in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
274  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Driving comfort  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Adaptive suspension  
The adaptive suspension is a variable, me-  
chanically controlled sport suspension that  
reduces movement of the vehicle body  
while driving with a sporty style or on un-  
even roads.  
Driving dynamics and driving comfort are  
increased through the adjustment of the  
chassis.  
MINI Sound  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, the vehicle drive  
sound can be adjusted using MINI Sound.  
1. To configure MINI Sound, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "Driving settings" /  
"Drivetrain and chassis" / "MINI Sound".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
275  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
Climate control  
Icon  
Function  
Vehicle features and options  
Maximum cooling.  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Automatic recirculated-air  
control.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Fresh air.  
Climate control  
SYNC program.  
Seat heating.  
Overview  
Functions in the Climate menu  
Some climate control functions, e.g., seat  
heating or air flow, can be configured using  
the Climate Control menu on the Interaction  
Unit.  
Steering wheel heating.  
Icon  
Function  
Buttons, automatic climate control  
Turn the climate control  
system on/off.  
Automatic program.  
Temperature.  
Air flow.  
The defrost and rear window heating func-  
tions can be turned on/off using the switch  
cluster.  
Air distribution.  
Air conditioning.  
276  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Settings  
Icon  
Function  
Individual settings for climate control func-  
tions, e.g., seat heating intensity, can be  
configured using the Interaction Unit.  
Defrost function.  
Rear window defroster.  
1.  
To configure the climate control  
functions individually, select the icon  
for the Climate Control menu on the  
menu bar.  
Calling up climate control  
functions  
Access the Climate menu via the Interaction  
Unit:  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Select the Climate menu icon on the  
menu bar.  
Automatic program  
Or:  
Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "Climate control".  
Principle  
The automatic program ensures a comforta-  
ble climate, which can be modified with the  
desired temperature and individual settings.  
Turning the air conditioning  
system on/off  
The AUTO program cools, ventilates, and  
heats the vehicle interior automatically.  
The climate control system can be turned  
on/off using the Interaction Unit.  
Depending on the equipment, the automatic  
program provides the best possible settings  
for climate control functions depending on  
the outside temperature, interior tempera-  
ture, sunlight, seat occupancy and the de-  
sired temperature setting:  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the power button.  
–
–
–
–
–
Air flow.  
The entire climate control system is turned  
on or off with the last settings applied.  
Air distribution.  
Temperature.  
When the air conditioning system is turned  
on, individual climate control functions can  
be turned off.  
Seat heating.  
Steering wheel heating.  
General information  
The automatic program takes seat occu-  
pancy into account, regulating the climate  
in an energy-efficient manner that is tail-  
ored to the occupants.  
277  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
At the same time, a condensation sensor  
controls the automatic program in order to  
prevent window condensation to the extent  
possible.  
functions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted in-  
dividually.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
Overview  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Each level has a specific control range of  
the intensity.  
Based on the stored data models, the inten-  
sities are dynamically adjusted while driv-  
ing. It is not necessary to manually change  
the desired intensity to lower or higher lev-  
els while driving.  
1
Temperature  
Seat heating  
Custom settings for climate control func-  
tions are saved and applied automatically,  
e.g., after the vehicle is started.  
Steering wheel heating  
Air flow intensity  
Climate control functions bar  
Settings  
2
3
4
Display  
The indicator on the temperature display  
provides information about the temperature  
difference between the set desired tempera-  
ture and the current interior temperature.  
Turning the automatic program  
on/off  
The AUTO program can be turned on/off  
using the Interaction Unit.  
–
The flashing red or blue bar next to the  
temperature display indicates that the  
interior temperature is being adjusted.  
–
Once the bar stops flashing, the desired  
interior temperature has been reached.  
1.  
2.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
Temperature  
Tap the automatic program but-  
ton.  
Principle  
The automatic climate control cools or heats  
to the configured temperature and then  
keeps the temperature constant.  
Setting the intensity  
When the automatic program is activated,  
the intensity of individual climate control  
Setting the temperature  
The driver and front passenger can each  
adjust the temperature as they prefer.  
278  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Air distribution settings  
Principle  
The air distribution can be adjusted as re-  
quired in manual mode.  
Adjusting the air distribution  
The air distribution can be adjusted via the  
Interaction Unit:  
1. Tap the button with temperature dis-  
play.  
2. Set the desired temperature.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
2. Select the desired setting:  
–
–
Raise the temperature.  
Lower the temperature.  
Do not rapidly switch between different  
temperature settings. Otherwise, the auto-  
matic climate control will not have suffi-  
cient time to adjust the set temperature.  
–
–
–
Aim the air flow downward, arrow 1.  
Aim the air flow upward, arrow 2.  
Aim the air flow at the windshield,  
arrow 3.  
Air flow  
Principle  
The air flow generated by the blower can be  
adjusted as needed.  
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the  
vehicle battery.  
The selected air distribution is displayed.  
Adjusting the air flow  
The air flow can be configured using the  
Interaction Unit:  
Air conditioning  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Principle  
With the climate control function, the air  
inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidi-  
fied, then warmed again depending on the  
temperature settings.  
–
–
Tap the large air flow icon to  
increase the air flow.  
Functional requirement  
The climate control function can be used  
with standby or drive-ready state.  
Tap the small air flow icon to  
reduce the air flow.  
279  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
Switching the cooling function  
on/off  
The air conditioning can be turned on/off  
using the Interaction Unit:  
Turning maximum cooling on/off  
Maximum cooling can be turned on/off us-  
ing the Interaction Unit:  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the maximum cooling button.  
2.  
Tap the climate control function  
button.  
The air vents open. Air flows out of the air  
vents to the upper body area.  
In recirculated-air mode, the air condition-  
ing is automatically turned on to dry the air  
and avoid window condensation.  
Air recirculation mode  
Depending on the weather, the windshield  
and the side windows may fog up briefly  
when drive-ready state is switched on.  
Principle  
With air recirculation, if unpleasant odors  
or pollutants are detected in the outside air,  
the outside air supply can be temporarily  
stopped. The system then recirculates the  
interior air.  
When using the cooling mode, condensa-  
tion that will exit below the vehicle.  
Maximum cooling  
With automatic air recirculation, outside air  
is fed in, or the interior air is recirculated,  
depending on the outside air quality.  
Principle  
When air recirculation is off, outside air is  
channeled into the interior.  
Maximum cooling is used to cool the vehicle  
interior quickly and effectively.  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recircula-  
tion mode.  
The lowest temperature and the maximum  
air flow are set automatically.  
Functional requirement  
Maximum cooling can be used when  
General information  
If there is window condensation, turn off  
the air recirculation.  
the outside temperature exceeds approx.  
32 ℉/0 ℃ and when drive-ready state is on.  
280  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Turning air recirculation on/off  
Turning the SYNC program on/off  
Air recirculation can be turned on/off using  
the Interaction Unit:  
The SYNC program can be turned on/off us-  
ing the Interaction Unit:  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
2. The current operating mode is displayed  
on the climate control functions bar. Tap  
the button and select the desired operat-  
ing mode.  
2.  
Tap the SYNC program button.  
If the temperature settings for the front  
passenger's side are changed, the SYNC pro-  
gram turns off automatically.  
–
–
–
Recirculating air.  
Fresh air.  
Defrost function  
Principle  
With the defrost function, ice and conden-  
sation are quickly removed from the wind-  
shield and the front side windows.  
Automatic recirculated-air  
control.  
In recirculated-air mode, the air condition-  
ing turns on automatically to dry the air and  
prevent condensation.  
The air flow and air temperature are auto-  
matically optimized for the removal of ice  
and condensation.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the air  
recirculation turns off automatically after  
some time based on the ambient conditions  
in order to prevent condensation.  
The air distribution is directed toward the  
windshield and front side windows.  
If there is window condensation, turn on  
the automatic program to take advantage of  
the condensation sensor.  
SYNC program  
Turning the defrost function on/off  
Principle  
To turn the defrost function on/off,  
press the defrost button on the  
switch cluster.  
If SYNC program is activated, the tempera-  
ture settings on the driver's side are trans-  
fered to the passenger's side.  
The LED of the button is illuminated when  
the system is switched on.  
If the SYNC program is deactivated, the fol-  
lowing settings are made automatically in  
the automatic program depending on the  
seat occupancy:  
Make sure that air is able to flow to the  
windshield and front side windows.  
If the front passenger's seat is not occupied,  
the settings on the driver's side are applied.  
281  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
Adjusting seat heating  
Rear window defroster  
Automatic program  
Principle  
When the automatic program is activated,  
the intensity of seat heating can be ad-  
justed: As you drive, the heater output is  
automatically adjusted according to your set  
intensity.  
With the rear window defroster, ice and  
condensation are quickly removed from the  
rear window.  
Functional requirement  
The rear window heating can be used when  
standby or drive-ready state is on.  
Adjusting seat heating manually  
The heater output level can be adjusted  
manually:  
Turning the rear window defroster  
on/off  
1. Tap the button with temperature dis-  
play.  
To turn the rear window heating on/  
off, press the rear window heating  
button on the switch cluster.  
The LED illuminates when the rear window  
heating is turned on.  
The rear window defroster switches off au-  
tomatically after a certain period of time.  
Seat heating  
2. Press the seat heating button repeatedly  
until the desired level is selected, arrow.  
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is  
selected, the heater output is reduced.  
Principle  
When the seat heating is used, seats are  
heated depending on the outside tempera-  
ture and the interior temperature.  
Steering wheel heating  
The intensity can be stored using the au-  
tomatic program. This function can be ad-  
justed as necessary.  
Principle  
When the steering wheel heating is used,  
the steering wheel is heated depending on  
the outside temperature and the interior  
temperature.  
General information  
If the trip is continued within approx.  
15 minutes after an intermediate stop, the  
functions are turned on automatically with  
the temperature that was last set.  
The intensity can be stored using the au-  
tomatic program. This function can be ad-  
justed as necessary.  
282  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
Automatic program  
Front ventilation  
When the automatic program is activated,  
the intensity of steering wheel heating can  
be adjusted. As you drive, the heater output  
is automatically adjusted according to your  
set intensity.  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
manually  
The heater output level can be adjusted  
manually:  
–
–
To adjust the air flow direction, push the  
button in the desired direction.  
To adjust the air flow, turn the knob to  
open and close the vents variably.  
1. Tap the button with temperature dis-  
play.  
Ventilation in the rear  
2. Press the steering wheel heating button  
repeatedly until the desired level is se-  
lected, arrow.  
To adjust the air flow, turn the knurled  
wheel to open and close the vents variably.  
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is  
selected, the heater output is reduced.  
Setting the ventilation  
Depending on the desired ventilation, align  
the air flow directly or indirectly toward the  
passengers.  
Ventilation  
Open the air vents and position them to  
ensure effective climate control.  
Principle  
The ventilation system has different options  
for direct or indirect ventilation to optimize  
air flow in the vehicle.  
Air quality  
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, de-  
pending on the set desired temperature.  
General information  
The following components improve the air  
quality inside the vehicle:  
283  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
–
–
–
Emissions-tested vehicle interior.  
Interior filter.  
tinues to run for some time after being  
switched off.  
Air conditioning system to control the  
temperature, air flow, and air recircula-  
tion.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for pre-ventilation:  
–
Pre-ventilation.  
–
The vehicle is in idle state or standby  
state.  
Interior filter  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recircula-  
tion mode.  
–
The vehicle battery is sufficiently  
charged.  
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the ve-  
hicle battery will be discharged. Thus,  
limit the maximum activation time to  
save the vehicle battery. System can be  
used again once engine is started or af-  
ter a short drive.  
Depending on the equipment:  
–
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the  
inflowing air.  
–
–
–
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.  
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.  
–
–
Time and date are set correctly.  
The ventilation air vents are open.  
Microbial particles, viruses and aller-  
gens are filtered.  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-  
mends having the interior filter changed  
during vehicle maintenance.  
Turning pre-ventilation on/off  
Pre-ventilation can be turned on/off using  
the Interaction Unit:  
Pre-ventilation  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
Principle  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
Pre-ventilation is used to cool or heat the  
vehicle interior before beginning a drive.  
The vehicle interior is ventilated or heated  
as necessary using residual engine heat, de-  
pending on the set temperature and ambi-  
ent temperature.  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Departure time  
Principle  
Different departure times can be set to en-  
sure a comfortable interior temperature in  
the vehicle at the time of departure:  
The system can be switched on and off di-  
rectly or via a preset departure time.  
The activation time is determined based  
on the outside temperature. The system  
promptly switches on before the selected  
departure time.  
–
One-time departure time: the time can  
be set.  
The system switches off automatically after  
a certain period of time. The system con-  
284  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Climate control  
4. "Departure plan"  
CONTROLS  
The system is switched on once.  
–
Departure time with weekday: Time and  
day of week can be set.  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
On the desired weekdays, the system  
will be switched on before the set depar-  
ture time.  
Activating with the MINI app  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the MINI  
app with remote functionality can be used  
to turn on preventilation at a preset depar-  
ture time or immediately.  
The departure time is preselected in two  
steps:  
–
–
Set the departure time.  
Activate departure times.  
Pre-conditioning through Re-  
mote Engine Start  
Allow for at least 10 minutes between set-  
ting and activating the departure time and  
departing at the planned time. This gives  
the air conditioning sufficient time to pre-  
pare the vehicle interior.  
Principle  
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the vehi-  
cle interior to a comfortable temperature  
prior to departure. This system automati-  
cally cools, ventilates, and heats depending  
on the inside/outside temperature and set  
temperature. Snow and ice may be removed  
more easily.  
Setting the departure time  
The departure time can be set on the Inter-  
action Unit:  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
The system starts the engine automatically  
and allows it to run for a limited period of  
time.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
Safety information  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
4. "Departure plan"  
DANGER  
5. Select the desired departure time.  
6. Set the desired departure time.  
7. Select the day of the week, as necessary.  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-  
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases  
can pollute the area in and around the  
vehicle or penetrate the vehicle. The ex-  
haust gases contain pollutants which are  
colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas  
or areas with insufficient ventilation, ex-  
haust gases can also accumulate outside  
of the vehicle. There is a danger to life.  
Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf-  
ficient ventilation. Do not switch on sta-  
tionary climate control in enclosed areas  
or areas with insufficient ventilation, e.g.  
in enclosed garages.  
Activating the departure time  
The departure time can be activated on the  
Interaction Unit:  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
285  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
Climate control  
4. "Remote Engine Start"  
5. "Start engine for climate control"  
6. Confirm the legal disclaimer.  
When stationary climate control is in op-  
eration, high temperatures can occur un-  
derneath the body, for instance caused by  
the exhaust system. If combustible materi-  
als such as leaves or grass come in contact  
with hot parts of the exhaust system, these  
materials can ignite. There is a risk of  
fire. Make sure that no combustible mate-  
rials can come in contact with hot vehicle  
parts during stationary climate control op-  
eration, e.g. leaves, grass, gas, gasoline, oil  
or other combustible objects.  
Turning on/turning off the pre-  
conditioning  
General information  
The pre-conditioning turns off automatically  
after max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.  
The pre-conditioning can only be activated  
twice in a row.  
Pre-conditioning can be used again as soon  
as drive-ready state is activated and then  
deactivated again.  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for pre-conditioning:  
Turning on pre-conditioning via the  
Interaction Unit  
Pre-conditioning can be turned on/off using  
the Interaction Unit:  
–
The vehicle is in idle state or standby  
state.  
–
–
–
–
–
The battery is sufficiently charged.  
The tank capacity is sufficient.  
The hood is closed.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
Time and date are set correctly.  
The ventilation air vents are open.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Start now"  
Enabling the automatic engine  
start function  
The automatic engine start must be enabled  
before using the system. Otherwise, the en-  
gine cannot switch on automatically to air-  
condition the vehicle interior.  
Switching on/off via vehicle key  
Pre-conditioning can be turned on/off using  
the vehicle key.  
Automatic engine start can be enabled on  
the Interaction Unit:  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
three times within 1 second.  
After operating the vehicle key, it  
takes approx. 3 seconds for the engine to  
switch on.  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
To turn off pre-conditioning, press the but-  
ton again three times.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
286  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Switching off with the Start/Stop  
button  
Pre-conditioning can be turned off directly  
by pushing the Start/Stop button without  
depressing the brake pedal.  
Setting the departure time  
The departure time can be set on the Inter-  
action Unit:  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
Climate control for departure time  
Principle  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
Scheduled departure times can be set up in  
the system to ensure a comfortable interior  
temperature in the vehicle at the time of  
departure:  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Set the departure time.  
6. Select the day of the week, as necessary.  
–
One-time departure time: the time of the  
scheduled departure can be set.  
Activating the departure time  
Pre-conditioning is turned on once.  
The departure time can be activated on the  
Interaction Unit:  
–
Departure time with weekday: Time and  
day of week for the scheduled departure  
can be set.  
The departure time is preselected in two  
steps:  
1.  
Select the Climate menu icon on  
the menu bar.  
–
–
Set the departure time.  
Activate departure times.  
2.  
Tap the settings button.  
Pre-conditioning activates automatically a  
few minutes before the set departure time.  
Pre-conditioning stays on for a short time  
after the set departure time.  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
For safety reasons, the air conditioning can  
only be activated once for the departure  
time.  
Display  
The activated pre-condition-  
ing temperature is displayed  
on the instrument cluster.  
Pre-conditioning can be used again as soon  
as drive-ready state is activated and then  
deactivated again.  
The engine runs for the pur-  
pose of operating the pre-con-  
Observe the information about the intended  
use of the vehicle.  
ditioning. The vehicle is not ready to drive.  
Additional information:  
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 9.  
Confirmation signals from the  
vehicle  
Activation of the pre-conditioning is con-  
firmed by the light flashing twice.  
287  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
The parking light turns on while the pre-  
conditioning is on.  
288  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Interior equipment  
Vehicle features and options  
Sockets  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Principle  
The socket can be used for electronic devi-  
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
Additional information:  
General information  
The total load of all sockets must not exceed  
140 watts at 12 volts.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Do not damage the socket by using unsuita-  
ble connectors.  
Sun visor  
Glare shield  
Safety information  
To prevent glare, fold the sun visor up or  
down.  
Warning  
Devices and cables in the unfolding area  
of the airbags such as portable navigation  
devices can hinder the unfolding of the  
airbag or be thrown around in the car's  
interior while unfolding. There is a risk  
of injury and risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that devices and cables are not  
in the airbag's area of unfolding.  
Glare shield from the side  
Folding the sun visor out  
To prevent glare from the side window, pro-  
ceed as follows:  
1. Fold down the sun visor.  
2. Detach the sun visor from its mount and  
swing it toward the side window.  
Warning  
Folding the sun visor in  
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle  
battery via sockets or cigarette lighters in  
the vehicle may overload or damage the  
12 V electrical system. There is a risk of  
injury or risk of damage to property. Only  
connect battery chargers for the vehicle  
battery to the jump-start terminals in the  
engine compartment.  
Proceed in the reverse order to close the  
sun visor.  
Vanity mirror  
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor  
behind a cover.  
289  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
Interior equipment  
USB port  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into  
electronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB  
ports, these objects can cause a short cir-  
cuit and destroy the interface. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of damage to  
property. Make sure to prevent metal ob-  
jects from falling or being plugged into  
electronic interfaces. Insert the cigarette  
lighter or socket cover again after using  
the socket.  
Principle  
The USB port is an interface used to con-  
nect mobile devices to the vehicle via USB  
cable. When connected, data can be sent or  
the mobile device can be charged.  
General information  
Follow the instructions for connecting mo-  
bile devices to the USB port given in section  
“USB connection”.  
Additional information:  
Front center console  
USB connection, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication;  
Safety information  
Warning  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into  
electronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB  
ports, these objects can cause a short cir-  
cuit and destroy the interface. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of damage to  
property. Make sure to prevent metal ob-  
jects from falling or being plugged into  
electronic interfaces. Insert the cigarette  
lighter or socket cover again after using  
the socket.  
A socket is provided on the center console  
under a cover. Pull off the cover before us-  
ing the socket.  
In the cargo area  
A socket is provided on the right side of the  
cargo area under a cover. Open the cover  
before using the socket.  
290  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Front center console  
Wireless charging tray  
Principle  
The wireless charging tray is used to wire-  
lessly charge Qi-certified smartphones.  
General information  
Quick charging functions are supported de-  
pending on the smartphone.  
The integrated fan cools the smartphone be-  
ing charged.  
Two USB ports are located on the front cen-  
ter console.  
When inserting the smartphone to be  
charged, make sure that there is nothing  
between the smartphone to be charged and  
the wireless charging tray.  
Properties:  
–
–
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices and for  
data transfer.  
The charging process is shown by the  
charge indicator on the Interaction Unit.  
–
Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.  
Safety information  
Rear center console  
Warning  
When charging a Qi-compatible device in  
the wireless charging tray, any metal ob-  
jects on the tray together with the device  
can become very hot. Storage media or  
electronic cards, e.g., chip cards, cards  
with magnetic strips, or cards for trans-  
mitting signals, may not function correctly  
when placed together on the tray with the  
device. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of damage to property. When charging mo-  
bile devices, make sure there are no ob-  
jects on the tray together with the device.  
Two USB ports are located in the rear center  
console.  
Properties:  
–
–
–
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices.  
Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.  
Overview  
The wireless charging tray is located in the  
center console.  
291  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Interior equipment  
Forgotten warning  
General information  
A warning may be issued if a Qi-certified  
smartphone was forgotten in the wireless  
charging tray when leaving the vehicle.  
The Forgotten Warning is displayed on the  
Interaction Unit.  
1
2
Storage area  
Fan  
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning  
To activate/deactivate the Forgotten Warn-  
ing, go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "Vehicle" / "System settings" /  
"Wireless charging tray" / "Mobile phone  
reminder".  
Functional requirements  
The following functional requirements apply  
for the wireless charging tray:  
–
The smartphone to be charged must be  
Qi-certified.  
System limits  
The charge current may be reduced or  
charging may be temporarily interrupted in  
the wireless charging tray in the following  
situations:  
–
–
–
Standby state is switched on.  
The charging function is on.  
The smartphone cannot exceed maxi-  
mum dimensions of approx. 6.69 x 3.34  
x 0.7 in/170 x 85 x 18 mm.  
–
–
–
Due to excessive temperatures on the  
tray and smartphone.  
–
–
Protective sleeves and covers must be  
suitable for wireless charging.  
If there are objects between the smart-  
phone and wireless charging tray.  
The smartphone to be charged is located  
in the center of the tray. The smart-  
phone display is facing up.  
If storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic  
strips, or cards for signal transmission,  
are located between the smartphone and  
wireless charging tray.  
Activating/deactivating charging  
To activate/deactivate charging, go through  
the menu as follows: Apps menu /  
"Vehicle" / "System settings" / "Wireless  
charging tray" / "Wireless charging".  
–
–
Due to protective sleeves and covers  
that exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm  
Due to protective sleeves and covers  
made of unsuitable material, e.g., with  
magnetic parts.  
Inserting a smartphone  
Place the smartphone in the middle of the  
tray, with the display facing up.  
–
–
Due to add-on parts for the smartphone,  
e.g., holders.  
By configuring the smartphone settings,  
e.g., for charging. Follow the instruc-  
tions given on the Interaction Unit and  
smartphone, where applicable.  
292  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
intervals, especially when borders are fre-  
quently crossed.  
Interior camera  
Other users and occupants of the vehicle  
must be informed about the system. In ad-  
dition, information about the system is re-  
quired when handing off the vehicle.  
Principle  
The interior camera can be used to record  
the vehicle interior.  
Prior to the first use of the interior camera,  
the recording function and, if necessary,  
data transfer must be activated. To do so,  
confirm on the Interaction Unit. Additional  
activation may be required for some system  
functions.  
Data transfer and data storage  
Whether recording data will be sent or  
stored depends on the recording function.  
The following applies for the interior cam-  
era function:  
The interior camera can provide the follow-  
ing functions:  
–
Data is sent to a mobile device. It must  
be possible to connect to the vehicle  
over Wi-Fi.  
–
–
–
Interior camera.  
Media can be recorded, saved, and  
played.  
–
Data is saved to the vehicle and as-  
signed to the MINI ID or driver profile.  
Remote Inside View.  
The following applies for Remote Inside  
View:  
The vehicle interior can be recorded us-  
ing the MINI app.  
–
Data is sent to a mobile device via the  
MINI app. The MINI app must be linked  
to the MINI Connected account.  
Anti-theft recorder.  
If the alarm system is triggered, the ve-  
hicle interior is automatically recorded.  
Recordings can be shown using the  
MINI app.  
–
Data is saved to the MINI app and, after  
data is sent, to the mobile device.  
The following applies for the Anti-Theft Re-  
corder:  
Follow applicable legal requirements when  
using this system.  
–
Data is sent to a mobile device via the  
MINI app. The MINI app must be linked  
to the MINI Connected account.  
Data protection  
–
Data is saved to the vehicle and, after  
data is sent, to the mobile device.  
General information  
The permissibility of making and evaluating  
recordings for the interior camera depends  
on the applicable regulations of the country  
in which the system is to be used. The user  
is responsible for the use of the system and  
compliance with the respective regulations.  
More information on the scope and content  
of data processing is available online in the  
MINI Connected privacy notices or service  
descriptions.  
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that  
you verify there are no statutory or regu-  
latory restrictions on using the system in  
your region or country prior to initial use.  
In addition, the laws with respect to use  
of the system should be verified in regular  
293  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Interior equipment  
Additional information:  
Overview  
Data protection, refer to page 59.  
Activating/deactivating interior  
camera  
The interior camera can record and send  
data when activated, then be deactivated.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Interior camera" /  
"Settings".  
The interior camera is located in the head-  
liner.  
2. Select the desired setting.  
Additional information:  
Interior camera  
Around the headliner, refer to page 33.  
Recording mode  
Functional requirements  
Recording  
mode  
Function  
The following functional requirements apply  
for the interior camera function:  
–
–
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.  
The camera is activated.  
"Single  
photo"  
Shortly after triggering, a  
photo will be taken.  
When sending recordings to mobile devi-  
ces, the following functional requirements  
apply:  
"Smile"  
When the system detects  
a smile, a picture will be  
taken.  
–
–
Data transfer is activated.  
"Self-timer  
(3 sec.)"  
After the timer has expired,  
a photo will be taken.  
A mobile device is connected to the ve-  
hicle via Wi-Fi.  
"Burst  
mode"  
Shortly after triggering, a  
series of pictures will be  
taken.  
The following functional requirements apply  
for the Remote Inside View and Anti-Theft  
Recorder functions:  
–
–
The Privacy Policy has been accepted.  
Take picture  
A photo can be taken as follows:  
The MINI app is installed on the mobile  
device.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Interior camera" /  
"Camera".  
–
The MINI app is linked to the MINI Con-  
nected account.  
–
–
The vehicle is parked and locked.  
2. Select the desired recording mode.  
3. Trigger a photo.  
The Anti-Theft Recorder can only be  
used if vehicle is equipped with an  
alarm system.  
Depending on the recording mode selected,  
photos are taken shortly after being trig-  
gered, when a smile is detected, or when  
the timer elapses.  
Ensure that the faces of occupants are visi-  
ble and are not partially or completely cov-  
ered, for instance by face masks.  
294  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Interior equipment  
For burst shots, the series of pictures will  
CONTROLS  
Remote Inside View  
be displayed as a preview.  
With Remote Inside View, recordings of the  
vehicle interior can be played on a mobile  
device using the MINI app. The vehicle in-  
terior can be checked, e.g., for forgotten  
items.  
Recording video  
Videos can be recorded as follows:  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Interior camera" /  
"Camera".  
The function is not suitable for monitoring  
people or animals left behind.  
2. Select the recording mode for video re-  
cording.  
Anti-theft recorder  
The Anti-Theft Recorder automatically re-  
cords the vehicle interior when the alarm  
system is triggered. The MINI app sends  
a notification when a recording is being  
taken. The recording can be shown on a  
mobile device.  
3. Start the video recording.  
You can only record video for a certain  
time.  
Displaying and managing  
recordings  
Saved recordings can be played, sent, and  
deleted in the vehicle.  
Up to three media recordings can be saved  
to the vehicle and synchronized with the  
MINI app. If the vehicle is reset to factory  
settings, recordings saved to the vehicle are  
deleted.  
In some national-market versions, record-  
ings are only shown on the Interaction Unit  
for up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h for safety  
purposes.  
Occupying the seats  
The interior camera is also used to detect  
occupied seats.  
1. Go through the menu as follows: Apps  
menu / "All" / "Interior camera" /  
"Gallery".  
The interior camera turns on automatically  
at regular intervals when all doors are  
closed. This system analyzes the vehicle in-  
terior to detect which seats are occupied.  
No media recordings are made in the proc-  
ess. Two infrared light sources next to the  
camera lens illuminate while the interior  
camera is active. Depending on the lighting  
conditions, the infrared light sources may  
be visible.  
2. Select the desired recording.  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Scan the QR code shown on the Interaction  
Unit to send recordings to a mobile device.  
The recording is transferred when the pop-  
up on the mobile device is opened. The mo-  
bile device must be connected to the vehi-  
cle via WLAN.  
Settings  
1. To configure the settings for the interior  
camera, go through the menu as follows:  
Apps menu / "All" / "Interior camera" /  
"Settings".  
2. Select the desired setting.  
295  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Storage compartments  
Storage compartments  
into the vehicle interior during the trip,  
for instance, in the event of an accident  
or when braking or making an evasive ma-  
neuver. There is a risk of injury. Always  
close storage compartments immediately  
after use.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Warning  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can  
damage the dashboard. Attached objects  
could come loose. There is a risk of injury  
or risk of damage to property. Do not use  
anti-slip pads.  
Storage compartments  
Principle  
The vehicle has various options for storing  
or stowing objects, e.g., the glove compart-  
ment or door storage compartments.  
Glove compartment  
Overview  
Safety information  
The glove compartment is located at the  
bottom of the instrument panel on the front  
passenger's side.  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e.,  
mobile phones, may be thrown around the  
vehicle, e.g., in the event of an accident  
or when braking or performing evasive  
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and  
risk of damage to property. Secure loose  
objects or devices that are connected to  
the vehicle via a cable.  
Opening the glove compartment  
Warning  
Pull the handle on the glove compartment.  
Open flaps of the storage compartments,  
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,  
protrude into the interior when folded  
open and may be in the way of an airbag  
that deploys. In addition, objects in the  
open storage compartment can be thrown  
296  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Closing the glove compartment  
To close the glove compartment, press the  
glove compartment lid down until it en-  
gages.  
Storage tray in center console  
Overview  
The storage compartments are located in  
the center console.  
Locking the glove compartment  
The glove compartment can be locked with  
an integrated key. This prevents access to  
the glove compartment.  
Additional information:  
Wireless charging tray, refer to page 291.  
Opening the storage compartment  
To open the storage compartment, proceed  
as follows:  
After the glove compartment has been  
locked, the vehicle key can be given to  
someone without the integrated key, for ex-  
ample, when the car is being parked by a  
parking attendant.  
Additional information:  
Integrated key, refer to page 67.  
Storage compartments in the  
doors  
Use the loop on the storage compartment to  
open the lid, arrow.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Closing the storage compartment  
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or  
glasses can break in the event of an ac-  
cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.  
Broken glass can be scattered in the car's  
interior. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Do not use any  
breakable objects while driving. Only stow  
breakable objects in closed storage com-  
partments.  
To close the storage compartment, press the  
lid down until it engages.  
Front cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders  
may damage the cup holders or be thrown  
about the car’s interior in the event of an  
accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful  
braking. Spilled liquids can distract from  
the surrounding traffic conditions, lead  
to an accident and damage vehicle com-  
ponents. Hot drinks can damage the cup  
Overview  
The storage compartments are located in  
the doors.  
297  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Storage compartments  
holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Do not force objects into the cup holder.  
Make sure that drink containers are se-  
cured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-  
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-  
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately.  
Do not transport hot beverages.  
ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately.  
Do not transport hot beverages.  
Overview  
Overview  
Two cup holders are provided in the rear  
center armrest.  
Coat hooks  
Safety information  
Warning  
The center console includes two cup hold-  
ers.  
Rear cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can  
obstruct the view while driving. There is  
a risk of accident. When suspending cloth-  
ing articles from the coat hooks, ensure  
that they will not obstruct the driver's  
view.  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders  
may damage the cup holders or be thrown  
about the car’s interior in the event of an  
accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful  
braking. Spilled liquids can distract from  
the surrounding traffic conditions, lead  
to an accident and damage vehicle com-  
ponents. Hot drinks can damage the cup  
holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Do not force objects into the cup holder.  
Make sure that drink containers are se-  
cured firmly in the cup holder. Use light-  
weight, shatterproof, and sealable contain-  
Warning  
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead  
to a risk of objects flying about during  
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for  
instance clothing articles, from the coat  
hooks.  
298  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
The coat hooks are located on the rear grab  
handles in the headliner.  
299  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Cargo area  
Cargo area  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e.,  
mobile phones, may be thrown around the  
vehicle, e.g., in the event of an accident  
or when braking or performing evasive  
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and  
risk of damage to property. Secure loose  
objects or devices that are connected to  
the vehicle via a cable.  
This chapter describes model-specific  
equipment, systems, and functions that are  
currently available, or may become available  
in the future, even if they are not present in  
the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Loading  
Warning  
Principle  
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be  
thrown into the car's interior, for instance  
in the event of an accident, braking or an  
evasive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can  
be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. Stow and  
secure objects and cargo properly.  
When loading the vehicle, items and cargo  
must be stowed and secured properly. Do  
not exceed the permissible weights and  
loads.  
Safety information  
Warning  
NOTICE  
High gross vehicle weight can overheat  
the tires, damage them internally and  
cause a sudden tire pressure loss. Driv-  
ing characteristics may be negatively  
impacted, reducing directional stability,  
lengthening the braking distances and  
changing the steering response. There is  
a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Pay attention to the permitted load-  
carrying capacity of the tires and never  
exceed the permitted gross vehicle weight.  
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam-  
age. There is a risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo  
area.  
Steps for determining correct load  
limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo should  
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on  
the vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers that will be riding  
in the vehicle.  
300  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
–
–
–
Cover sharp edges and corners on the  
cargo.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers from XXX kg or  
XXX lbs  
Do not stack cargo above the upper edge  
of the backrests.  
4. The resulting figure equals the availa-  
ble amount of cargo and luggage load  
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”  
amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will  
be five 150 lbs passengers in the vehi-  
cle, the amount of available cargo and  
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 -  
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)  
If stowing sufficiently large items in the  
cargo area, fold down the rear seat back-  
rests completely.  
–
–
Fasten straps, etc. for securing the load  
to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.  
Small, light-weight cargo: Secure with  
tensioning/draw straps or with a cargo  
net.  
5. Determine the combined weight of lug-  
gage and cargo being loaded on the ve-  
hicle. That weight may not safely exceed  
the available cargo and luggage load ca-  
pacity calculated in Step 4.  
–
–
Larger, heavy cargo: Secure with cargo  
straps.  
Stow particularly heavy cargo as far for-  
ward as possible, directly behind and be-  
low the rear seat backrests. When the  
rear seat is not occupied, secure each  
of the outer seat belts in the opposite  
buckle.  
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer,  
load from your trailer will be transferred  
to the vehicle. Consult this manual to  
determine how this reduces the availa-  
ble cargo and luggage load capacity of  
the vehicle.  
Lashing eyes in the cargo area  
Payload  
Principle  
Lashing eyes are devices used to secure  
loads. Depending on vehicle equipment, two  
lashing eyes are provided in the cargo area.  
General information  
To secure cargo, attach suitable devices,  
e.g., lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw  
straps, or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes.  
The maximum payload is the sum of the  
weight of the occupants and the cargo.  
The greater the weight of the occupants, the  
less cargo that can be transported.  
Stowing and securing cargo  
To stow and secure cargo, note the follow-  
ing:  
301  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Cargo area  
Overview  
Net  
Depending on vehicle equipment, there is a  
net on the left side of the cargo area.  
Smaller items can be stored in the net. To  
transport larger objects, slide the net down.  
Storage compartment on the  
right side  
The lashing eyes are located on the side  
panels in the cargo area.  
There is a storage compartment on the right  
side of the cargo area.  
Multifunction hook  
Cargo floor panel  
Principle  
Principle  
Light-weight objects can be hung on the  
multifunction hooks in the cargo area.  
To stow cargo, a storage compartment is  
provided under the cargo area floor. The  
cargo area floor can be folded up and re-  
moved.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Safety information  
Improper use of the multifunction hooks  
can lead to a risk of objects flying about,  
e.g., during braking and evasive maneu-  
vers. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of damage to property. Only hang light-  
weight objects from the multifunction  
hooks. Heavy luggage in the trunk must  
be properly secured.  
Warning  
Improper use of the cargo area floor can  
lead to a risk of objects flying about dur-  
ing braking and evasive maneuvers, for ex-  
ample. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
damage to property.  
–
Do not use the cargo area floor to  
separate the cargo area and vehicle  
interior in the sense of a luggage net.  
Overview  
Depending on vehicle equipment, multi-  
function hooks are provided on the left and  
right side of the cargo area.  
–
Only use the cargo area floor in the  
folded-up position when the rear seat  
backrests are folded up and locked.  
302  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
–
–
Fold down the cargo area floor before  
driving off.  
Always secure cargo against slipping,  
using straps, belts and lashing eyes,  
for instance.  
NOTICE  
The storage space under the cargo floor  
panel is only suitable for soft objects. Hard  
objects may result in damage to the vehi-  
cle electrical system in the event of an  
accident. There is a risk of damage to  
property. Only stow soft objects under the  
cargo floor panel.  
To move the cargo area floor into the  
folded-up position, fold up the cargo area  
floor that was folded down at the front.  
With mild hybrid technology:  
The cargo area floor cannot be moved into  
the folded-up position. Do not fold the cargo  
area floor up.  
Opening the storage compartment  
Additional information:  
Mild hybrid technology, refer to page 376.  
Removing the cargo floor panel  
Without mild hybrid technology:  
The cargo area floor can be removed as fol-  
lows:  
1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor  
panel forward.  
To open the storage compartment, grip the  
rear edge of the cargo area floor and fold it  
forward.  
2. Slightly raise the cargo area floor.  
3. Pull the cargo area floor backward, out  
of the mounts, then remove.  
Folded up position  
Without mild hybrid technology:  
With mild hybrid technology:  
The cargo area floor cannot be removed. Do  
not remove the cargo area floor.  
303  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Cargo area  
Inserting the cargo floor panel  
Proceed in reverse order to insert the cargo  
area floor:  
Warning  
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-  
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s  
interior; for instance, in the event of an  
accident, braking or an evasive maneuver.  
There is a risk of injury. Make sure that  
the rear seat backrest is locked after fold-  
ing it back.  
1. Place the folded cargo area floor flat  
against the mounts.  
2. Push the cargo area floor forward into  
the mounts. The cargo area floor en-  
gages noticeably.  
Enlarging the cargo area  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system  
is limited or compromised with incorrect  
seat setting or improper installation of the  
child seat. There is a risk of injury or  
danger to life. Make sure that the child  
restraint system fits securely against the  
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest  
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly  
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats  
and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust  
the height of the head restraints or remove  
them.  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment version, the  
cargo area can be enlarged as follows:  
–
–
The rear seat backrests can be moved  
into an upright loading position using  
the cargo setting.  
The rear seat backrests can be folded  
down.  
General information  
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio  
of 40–20–40. The side rear seat backrests  
and the center section can be folded down  
separately.  
Cargo position  
Principle  
The rear seat backrests can be moved into  
an upright loading position individually. An  
adjustment in several tilt stages is possible  
as needed.  
The rear seat backrests can be folded down  
from the rear.  
Safety information  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming with fold-  
ing down the rear seat backrests. There  
is a risk of injury or risk of damage to  
property. Make sure that the area of move-  
ment of the rear seat backrest and the of  
the head restraint is clear prior to folding  
down.  
304  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Adjusting  
Folding back the backrest  
To adjust the loading position of the rear  
seat backrests, proceed as follows:  
To fold back the rear seat backrests, pro-  
ceed as follows:  
1. Pull the loop on the side of the seat.  
1. Fold the rear seat backrest down. The  
rear seat backrest first engages in the  
loading position.  
2. Pull the loop on the side of the seat.  
2. Set the loading position of the rear seat  
backrest as required.  
3. Engage the rear seat backrest.  
3. Return the rear seat backrest to the seat  
position and engage it.  
Folding down the rear seat  
backrest  
To fold in the rear seat backrests, proceed  
as follows:  
Cargo cover  
Principle  
The cargo cover separates the cargo area  
from the seat rows and is used to secure  
cargo. The cargo cover can be removed.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Pull the loop on the side of the seat and fold  
the rear seat backrest forward.  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e.,  
mobile phones, may be thrown around the  
vehicle, e.g., in the event of an accident  
or when braking or performing evasive  
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and  
risk of damage to property. Secure loose  
objects or devices that are connected to  
the vehicle via a cable.  
305  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
CONTROLS  
Warning  
Cargo area  
An incorrectly inserted cargo cover can be  
thrown about the car's interior such as in  
the event of an accident or a braking or  
evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. Make sure  
the cargo cover is securely engaged in the  
brackets.  
Warning  
Body parts can become trapped when the  
folding cargo cover is operated. There is a  
risk of injury. When operating the folding  
cargo cover, make sure that the travel path  
of the cover is clear.  
Removing the cargo cover  
The cover can be removed to load bulky  
luggage.  
1. Detach the retaining straps on the tail-  
gate.  
2. Grasp the cover with both hands on the  
rear edge and lift slightly, arrow 1.  
3. Firmly pull the cover backward out of  
the brackets, arrow 2.  
Inserting the cargo cover  
Install the cargo cover in reverse order.  
Make sure that the cargo cover is posi-  
tioned correctly in the brackets and that it  
is engaged.  
306  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
307  
Online Edition for Part no. 01405B39505 - II/24  

Related Topics

Dashboard Sensors of the vehicle Operating state of the vehicle Display and operating concept MINI Remote Software Upgrade Personal settings Opening and closing Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Transporting children safely Driving Displays Light and view Safety Driving stability control systems Driver assistance systems Parking Driving comfort Climate control Interior equipment Storage compartments Cargo area

Popular Owner Manuals

Audi
Audi
BMW
BMW
Citroen
Citroen
Ford
Ford
Honda
Honda
Peugeot
Peugeot